JP7108193B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

The invention described in this specification (hereinafter referred to as "the present invention") relates to gaming machines such as slot machines and pachinko machines.

Slot machines (rotary type gaming machines), which are representative gaming machines, generally control the progress of games using reels (also referred to as "rotating drums") (for example, reel drive control, winning combination determination (" (Also referred to as "lottery"), control the insertion and withdrawal of game media such as game medals, control the transition of game states between multiple game states with different probability of determining a role, etc.). Also referred to as "main control means") and various effects for the purpose of improving the interest of the game according to the game situation (image effect by image display device (also called "liquid crystal display device"), sound effect by speaker device, etc.) and a sub control board (also referred to as "sub control means") that performs control related to the execution of, and information transmission (transmission) between both boards is performed only in one direction from the main control board to the sub control board. It is possible.

In a slot machine, generally, an effective line is set by inserting a specified number of game media, and a player performs an operation to start reel rotation, such as tilting a start lever (also referred to as a "start lever"). Then, a combination determination process (also referred to as a ``combination lottery process'' or an ``internal lottery'') is performed, and any game combination (also simply referred to as a ``combination'') or a loss is determined, and then a plurality of reels start rotating. . When a plurality of reels start rotating and reach a predetermined rotation speed, a reel rotation stop operation such as pressing a stop switch is enabled, and the player performs a reel rotation stop operation for each reel, whereby each reel can be stopped. are sequentially stopped rotating (see, for example, Patent Documents 1 to 3 below).

Usually, the rotation stoppage of a plurality of reels is controlled based on the timing of the reel rotation stoppage operation by the player and the determined combination. That is, each reel is controlled so as to be able to stop at any timing within a predetermined time (usually, the time during which a maximum of 5 symbols can be moved) from the timing when the reel rotation stop operation is performed, thereby determining the winning combination. The combination (also called "acceptable combination") decided (also called "election" or "won") by the process is established as much as possible (combination of symbols constituting the acceptable combination (also called "corresponding symbol") is stop-displayed on the effective line), and a combination that has not been determined by the combination determination process is not established (corresponding symbols constituting a combination other than the combination allowed to be established are not stop-displayed on the effective line). Incidentally, the symbol combination that is stopped and displayed is also referred to as a "rolling number".

Further, as the game combination, in addition to the normal combination called a replay combination and a small combination, a special combination called a bonus combination is generally provided. A replay role means that a game medium (game value) is not given (cannot be acquired) even if it is established, but it is possible to replay (the player can play the next game without inserting a new game medium). It is also called "replay role" in the role. A small combination is a combination that allows a predetermined number of game media to be acquired when established, and is also referred to as a “winning combination”. A bonus role (special role) is a role in which a special game state (also referred to as "special role", "special game" or "bonus game (game)") becomes operable (settable) as a result of its establishment. is. The special gaming state is, for example, the probability of winning a predetermined small winning combination (simply "decision probability" is also possible, or "role lottery probability" (simply "lottery probability" is also possible), "role selection probability" (simply "Selection probability" is also possible), "role winning probability" (simply "winning probability" is also possible)), refers to a gaming state in which it is higher than usual.

In many cases, only a small number of symbols are arranged on each reel as symbols constituting a symbol combination that constitutes a special combination. For this reason, even when a special combination is determined, the player should perform a reel rotation stop operation for each reel (such It is difficult to establish a special role unless the operation is also called "eye pushing". However, even though the special role has been determined, if it cannot be established, the information indicating that the special role has been determined is carried over to the next game ("Special It is also called "carrying over the win of the role", "carrying over the win of the special role", etc.), and even for players who are not good at eyeballing, the opportunity to establish the determined special role is guaranteed (with the winning There are special roles that cannot be passed).

In addition, in a conventional slot machine, a plurality of RT states (game states) having different probability of determining a combination of replay combinations are provided, and a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, winning a special combination based on the combination determination process). , that the corresponding symbol of the special role is displayed, that the game related to the special role is completed, that the predetermined symbol combination is stopped and displayed)) is generally used as a trigger to shift to another RT state. Are known. Such a transition between RT states is controlled by the main control board because it accompanies variations in the probability of determining a winning combination (replaying combination). Also, the period during which the RT state in which the winning combination determination probability of the replaying combination is set to the highest value is sometimes referred to as replay time.

On the other hand, it is also possible to set a game period called AT (assist time), in which information that allows the player to play the game advantageously, is set, and a predetermined notification effect (assist effect) is performed during this game period. ing. Such an AT may be set during a period (replay time) during which the RT state in which the replay combination probability is set to the highest value is set, and during such a replay time, the AT is It is generally called ART (Assist Replay Time). In fact, ART (assist Also called replay time. Assist effects performed during AT include, for example, when a small winning combination that enables the acquisition of game media is determined, this fact is notified, or the determined small winning combination is established (corresponding symbols are displayed on the effective line). stop display on the top), the operation mode of the stop switch (operation order indicating in what order the plurality of stop switches should be operated (also referred to as "push order") and the stop switch, There is known a device that notifies an operating position (also referred to as a “push position”), etc., indicating in what rotational position the reel should be operated. A game combination (result of determination of a combination) that is stop-displayed with a different combination of symbols due to a difference in the pressing order is also referred to as a "push order combination". Also, during AT, a game in which an assist effect is performed is also referred to as an "assist game".

There is also a slot machine (also called "sub-AT machine") in which the above-described AT-related control processing (also called "AT-related control processing") is exclusively performed by the sub control means. However, there was a problem such as being able to forcibly set AT by performing cheating on the sub-control means, so recently it is harder to cheat than the sub-control means. There are many slot machines (also called "main AT machine") in which a part of AT-related control processing is performed by main control means. For example, the main control means exclusively performs the processing related to the setting of the AT and the processing of determining the pressing order to be notified during the AT, and the sub-control means is mainly determined by the main control means during the AT set by the main control means. There is known a main AT machine that performs a process of executing notification of the pressing order (assist effect). In such a main AT machine, the main control means manages various information relating to the AT, and the main control means appropriately transmits this information to the sub-control means.

In general, in a slot machine, the game store side determines the result of winning a role ("role lottery result" (simply "lottery result" is also possible), "role selection result" (simply "selection result" is also possible), "role winning result" (may be simply referred to as "winning result")) can be changed within a range of a plurality of steps. The difference in probability of determining a winning combination (also referred to as a "set difference") affects the payout rate of a slot machine. Interest is high as an index for acquiring more game media. Among the winning combination (winning combination), there are those where the winning combination probability does not change regardless of the setting value (also called "result of winning combination with no set difference") and those where the winning combination probability changes depending on the setting difference ( (Also referred to as "results of winning combinations with set differences").

Japanese Patent No. 6564718 Japanese Patent No. 6528981 JP 2010-227294 A

Conventional gaming machines have been devised in various ways in order to improve the game playability and enjoyment of the game, and to enable the game to be played smoothly, but there is room for further improvement.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of smoothly executing a game.

The present invention has the following features. In addition, in the description of the characteristic configuration below, examples of configurations corresponding to the embodiments described later are shown in parentheses.
A game machine according to the present invention includes a settlement switch and a predetermined bet switch, and in a predetermined situation, settlement processing is executed when the settlement switch is operated for a predetermined period of time after receiving an operation of the settlement switch. In the above-mentioned predetermined situation, if the settlement switch is released before the operation of the settlement switch continues for a predetermined time after the operation of the settlement switch is accepted, settlement processing is not executed. In the predetermined situation, game medals inserted from the medal slot can be accepted from a predetermined timing after accepting the operation of the settlement switch to a specific timing before the settlement processing is executed. It is configured such that when a predetermined bet switch operation is accepted in the predetermined situation, the maximum number of bets can be bet, and after the settlement switch operation is accepted in the predetermined situation From the predetermined timing to the specific timing before the settlement process is executed, even if a predetermined bet switch is operated, the maximum number of bets is not bet . A predetermined bet switch is operated between the predetermined timing after the switch operation is accepted and the specific timing before the settlement process is executed, and the predetermined bet switch is operated before the specific timing. in a situation in which the switch is released after continuing until the timing of and the operation of the payment switch continues for the predetermined time after the operation of the payment switch is accepted, the payment processing can be executed. In a predetermined situation, a predetermined bed switch is operated, and in a situation where the operation of the predetermined bed switch continues, the settlement switch is operated, and in a situation where the settlement switch continues to be operated, When the operation of the settlement switch continues for the predetermined time, the settlement processing is not executed.

A gaming machine of a reference embodiment includes a reel and a stop switch, and is capable of executing reel stop control (eg, deceleration start processing) in response to operation of the stop switch (eg, slot machine). In this case, when the power is turned off during execution of the reel stop control, and then the power is restored and the reels are rotated again, a predetermined determination process ( For example, it is characterized by being configured to be able to execute out-of-step determination.

According to the gaming machine configured as described above, it is possible to smoothly execute a game.

1 is a front view of a slot machine according to a first embodiment of the present invention; FIG. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of the said slot machine roughly. It is a figure which shows the pattern arrangement|positioning of the reel of the said slot machine. It is a figure which shows the symbol combination 1 in the said slot machine. It is a figure which shows the symbol combination 2 in the said slot machine. It is a figure which shows the symbol combination 3 in the said slot machine. It is a figure which shows the symbol combination 4 in the said slot machine. (A) in the above slot machine shows a bonus condition device, and (B) shows a winning re-game condition device (1). It is a figure which shows a winning replay condition device (2) in the slot machine. It is a figure which shows a winning replay conditions device (3) in the said slot machine. It is a figure which shows a winning replay condition device (4) in the slot machine. It is a figure which shows a winning replay conditions device (5) in the slot machine. It is a figure which shows a winning replay conditions device (6) in the slot machine. It is a figure which shows the winning number allocated to each condition device in the said slot machine. 3 is a block diagram conceptually showing the functions of the slot machine; FIG. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing the relationship between RT states in the slot machine; It is a figure which shows the relationship of each game mode in the said slot machine. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing variables used in controlling the slot machine; In the above slot machine, (A) is the advantageous section transition lottery, (B) is the chance mode 1 lottery, (C) is the chance mode 2 lottery -1, (D) is the chance mode 2 lottery -2, (E) is the chance game It is a figure which each shows the content of 3 lotteries. In the above slot machines, (A) is a chance game number lottery, (B) is a chance period lottery, (C) is an EX1 mode lottery, (D) is an EX2 mode lottery, (E) is an AT mode lottery -1, (F) (G) shows the contents of AT mode lottery-2, and (G) shows the contents of AT mode lottery-3. In the above slot machine, (A) is Seven 1 lottery, (B) is Seven 2 lottery, (C) is AT mode rewrite lottery, (D) is Seven loop lottery, (E) is Gold Seven loop lottery, (F) is (G) is a diagram showing the contents of the gold seven-loop rewrite lottery and the addition mode lottery. In the above slot machine, (A) shows the details of the bell number switching lottery, (B) the seven stock 1 lottery, (C) the seven stock 2 lottery, and (D) the performance lever weight lottery. (A) is the AT period lottery-1, (B) is the AT period lottery-2, (C) is the withdrawal 1 lottery-1, and (D) is the withdrawal 1 lottery-2. be. In the slot machine, (A) shows the pull-back 1 lottery -3, (B) shows the pull-back 2 lottery, and (C) shows the AT period preferential game number lottery. In the slot machine, (A) shows the contents of the seven table 1 lottery, and (B) shows the contents of the seven table 2 lottery. In the above slot machine, (A) is a bell number 1 lottery -1, (B) is a bell number 1 lottery -2, (C) is a bell number 2 lottery, and (D) is a diagram showing the details of a bell number 3 lottery. be. (A) in the above slot machine shows the correspondence relationship between the bonus condition device and the effect group A number, and (B) shows the correspondence relationship between the prize replay condition device and the effect group B number. It is a figure which shows the correspondence of the production|presentation group number and the condition device group number in the said slot machine. (A) shows the contents of the symbol combination display 1 and (B) shows the contents of the symbol combination display 2 in the slot machine. (A) is a suggested pattern 1, (B) is a suggested pattern 2, (C) is a suggested pattern 3, and (D) is a suggested pattern 4, respectively. (A) in the above slot machine shows the contents of the ending effect 1, and (B) shows the contents of the ending effect 2, respectively. (A) shows the content of the ending effect 3, and (B) shows the content of the ending effect 4 in the slot machine. (A) is the lottery for ending effect 1, (B) is the lottery for ending effect 2, (C) is the lottery for ending effect 3, and (D) is the lottery for ending effect 4, respectively. be. 3 is a flow chart showing the flow of (A) a setting change process, (B) a game progress control process, and (C) a game start standby process in the slot machine. 3 is a flow chart showing the flow of (A) internal lottery processing and (B) group number setting processing in the above slot machine. FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing a flow of section type number management lever processing in the slot machine; FIG. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing a continuation flow of the section type number management lever processing; FIG. In the above slot machine, (A) is a flow chart showing an advantageous section transition process, and (B) is a flow chart showing a chance game number lottery process. It is a flow chart showing a flow of processing at the time of AT winning in the slot machine. 3 is a flow chart showing the flow of (A) seven number correction processing, (B) correction counter processing, and (C) arrival flag processing in the slot machine. FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing a flow of lever processing at the time of AT entry in the slot machine; FIG. 3 is a flow chart showing the flow of (A) the loop CU rank set process, (B) the seven loop lottery process, and (C) the money seven loop lottery correction process in the slot machine. FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing a flow of bell number counter correction processing in the slot machine; FIG. FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing the flow of lever-time wait processing in the slot machine; FIG. In the slot machine, (A) is the main game state number 1 lever processing, (B) is the chance mode number determination processing, and (C) is the main game state number 2 and 5 lever processing. It is a flow chart showing a flow of lever processing after AT hitting in the slot machine. In the above slot machine, (A) is a flow chart showing the main game state number 3 lever processing, and (B) is a flow chart showing the flow of money seven loop rewrite lottery correction processing. In the slot machine, (A) is a main game state number 4 lever process, and (B) is a flow chart of an AT period preferential game number lottery process. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the standby effect|presentation process in the said slot machine. FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing a flow of a section type number management game ending process in the slot machine; FIG. 4 is a flow chart showing the flow of cumulative counter processing in the slot machine; FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing the flow of main game state number 0 all-stop processing in the slot machine; FIG. FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing the flow of end processing after entering an AT in the slot machine; FIG. FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing the flow of the continuation of the end process after the AT rushes; FIG. In the above slot machine, (A) is a flow chart showing main game state number 1 full stop processing, and (B) is a flow chart showing main game state number 2 and 5 full stop processing. 10 is a flow chart showing the flow of main game state number 3 total stop processing in the slot machine. It is a flow chart showing the flow of the continuation of the main game state number 3 total stop processing. FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing another continuation flow of the main game state number 3 all-stop process. FIG. FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing a flow of main game state number 4 all-stop processing in the slot machine; FIG. In the slot machine, (A) is a flow chart showing the flow of main game state number 6 all-stop processing, and (B) is a flow chart showing the flow of main game state number 7 all-stop processing. 10 is a flow chart showing the flow of advantageous section clear counter management processing in the slot machine. 4 is a flow chart showing the flow of timer interrupt processing in the slot machine; It is a front view of the stop switch unit which concerns on 2nd Embodiment. 4 is a diagram showing a lighting pattern of the stop switch lamp of the stop switch unit in normal state 1. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing a lighting pattern of the stop switch lamp in normal state 2. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing a lighting pattern of the stop switch lamp in abnormal state 1; FIG. 4 is a diagram showing a lighting pattern of the stop switch lamp in abnormal state 2. FIG. The AT information display according to the third embodiment is shown, (A) is a front view of the AT information display, (B) is a diagram showing the arrangement of segment LEDs in the 7-segment display, and (C) is a 7-segment display. It is a figure which shows the lighting mode of a container. It is a figure which shows an example of the operation|movement content according to the progress of the game of the said AT information display. It is a figure which shows an example of the display content according to the progress of the game of the said AT information display. It is a figure which shows an example of the display content according to the timing of power-off and power-off recovery of the said AT information display. It is a transition diagram of the game state in the fourth embodiment. (A) in 4th Embodiment is a figure which shows the charge suggestion mode lottery, (B) shows the content of AT lottery, respectively. In the fourth embodiment, (A) is a charge suggestion occurrence lottery (when charge suggestion mode = 1), (B) is a charge suggestion occurrence lottery (when charge suggestion mode = 2), and (C) is a charge suggestion occurrence lottery (when charge suggestion mode = 2). FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the contents of the charging suggestion mode=3). It is a diagram showing an example of the transition from the AT game state to the ending game state in the fourth embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the game progress control process in 4th Embodiment. It is a flow chart showing the flow of each game state lever processing in the fourth embodiment. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing the flow of AT number counter update processing in the fourth embodiment. FIG. It is a flow chart showing the flow of the main game state 5 lever processing in the fourth embodiment. FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing the flow of advantageous section flag management all stop processing in the fourth embodiment. FIG. It is a flow chart showing the flow of main game state 5 full stop processing in the fourth embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows a flow of limit judging processing in a 4th embodiment. (A) in the fifth embodiment shows a first conversation effect display, and (B) shows a second conversation effect display. (A) in the fifth embodiment is a diagram showing another aspect of the range image in the dialogue display of the conversation effect display, and (B) is a diagram showing a mode in which the dialogue display of the conversation effect display is displayed in an overlapping manner. (A) in the fifth embodiment is a diagram showing another mode in which dialogue display of conversation effect display is superimposed, and (B) is a view showing a mode in which error notification display is superimposed on conversation effect display. In the fifth embodiment, (A) is a mode in which the conversation effect display is displayed while the push-navigation effect display is being displayed, and (B) is another mode in which the conversation effect display is displayed during the push-navigation effect display. FIG. 10 shows. (A) in the fifth embodiment is a diagram showing a first subtitle effect display, and (B) is a diagram showing a second subtitle effect display. FIG. 14A is a diagram showing another mode of the first caption effect display, and FIG. 17B is a diagram showing another mode of the second caption effect display in the fifth embodiment; (A) in the fifth embodiment is a diagram showing a mode in which a background frame is attached to the characters of the second subtitle effect display, and (B) is a diagram showing a mode in which an error notification display is displayed together with the second subtitle effect display. . (A) in the fifth embodiment is a diagram showing a mode in which the subtitle effect display is displayed during display of the push navigation effect display, and (B) is a diagram showing a mode in which the characters of the subtitle effect display are displayed as if they were garbled. be. It is a figure which shows the expectation degree production|presentation display in 5th Embodiment. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing the transition of display in the order of (A) to (F) when the GET effect is executed in the fifth embodiment; FIG. 14 is a timing chart showing the timing relationship of the third stop operation, push navigation effect display, game value addition, GET effect sound, GET effect display, and caption effect display when executing the GET effect in the fifth embodiment. (A) in the fifth embodiment shows a first scene switching effect, and (B) shows a second scene switching effect. (A) in the fifth embodiment is a diagram showing the display state of the image display section immediately before execution of the darkening effect, and (B) is a diagram showing the display state of the image display section when the darkening effect is executed. It is a timing chart when the settlement switch in 6th Embodiment is operated independently. It is a timing chart when the max bet switch in the sixth embodiment is operated alone. It is a timing chart when the max bet switch is operated during the operation of the settlement switch in the sixth embodiment. It is a timing chart when the sub-switch is operated during the operation of the settlement switch in the sixth embodiment. (A) in the sixth embodiment is a timing chart when the stop switch is operated while the settlement switch is being operated, and (B) is a timing chart when the settlement switch is operated while the stop switch is being operated. It is a timing chart when an error occurs during operation of the settlement switch in the sixth embodiment. It is a timing chart when the reset switch is operated during the operation of the settlement switch that was operated during an error in the sixth embodiment. (A) in the sixth embodiment is an example of transition of the push order navigation effect image when the pressing order of the first stop operation is correct, and (B) is an example of transition of the push order navigation effect image when the pressing order of the first stop operation is unsuccessful. It is a figure which shows. In the sixth embodiment, (A) is an example of transition of the push order navigation effect image when the first to third stop operations are correctly pressed, and (B) is a push order when the first to third stop operations are failed. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of transition of a navigation effect image; FIG. 21 is a diagram showing an example of execution timing of a GET effect and a back lamp effect when the pressing order is correct in the sixth embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the execution timing of GET production|presentation and back lamp production|presentation, and the display update timing of the number of credits in 6th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the reel control in 6th Embodiment. In the sixth embodiment, (A) is a flow chart showing the flow of control processing when the power is turned off after accepting the third stop operation, (B) is a flow chart showing the flow of re-rotation processing A, and (C) is a flow chart of re-rotation. 10 is a flowchart showing the flow of processing B; FIG. 20 is a diagram showing an example of a lighting state of a stop switch lamp during reel re-rotation in the sixth embodiment;

Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the above drawings.
It should be noted that the "hand determination process" in the following description refers to one of a plurality of preset hand determination result numbers (consisting of one or more game hands or loss (except when no loss is set)). , a selection act such as a lottery (also referred to as "role determination") executed using an electronic device, etc., in order to randomly select one or more combination determination result numbers (winning items). . Here, the winning combination determination result number means one or a plurality of gaming combinations that are allowed to be established in the game in which the winning combination determination result number is determined (selected) (also called "acceptable winning combination" or "winning combination"). (referred to as the name) or a loss. In addition, determination of a role is also referred to as "internal lottery" or "role lottery", and "selection" in lottery or winning is also referred to as "lottery" or "sen".

In addition, when describing "a game role is established", "a game role is established", etc., "formation" means a game role corresponding to the determined role determination result number (a game role with a payout of game medals ( A combination of symbols (corresponding symbols) that constitutes a small combination) or a game combination that does not pay out (regardless of whether it is a replay combination or a special combination) is a predetermined stop mode (for example, a mode of lining up on an effective line described later) It is used as a concept to indicate that it is displayed in . However, regarding the timing of establishment, for example, when the reel stop operation is performed at the timing at which the symbol corresponding to the game role can be stopped and displayed on the active line, or when the symbol corresponding to the game role is stopped on the active line The timing can be set as appropriate, such as when the symbol is displayed, when the slot machine identifies that the symbol corresponding to the game combination has been stopped and displayed on the active line, or when the identified result is stored in the storage area. .

Further, in the following description, the game medal insertion operation (maintenance operation) by the player into the medal insertion slot 21 described later, and the regulation necessary for playing the game among the credited (stored) game medals A pressing operation of the 1-BET switch 22 or the MAX-BET switch 23 for providing a number of game medals for a game is collectively referred to as a bet operation. In addition, this betting operation, the player's pressing operation of a settlement switch 24 described later, tilting operation of a start lever (also referred to as "start switch") 25, and stop switches (also referred to as "stop buttons") 26a, 26b, 26c. is generically referred to as a game operation. In general, the term "insertion" in a slot machine is used in the sense of "inserting game medals into the slot machine" or in the sense of "providing game medals for use in a game." There is In the following explanation, basically, the term "insertion" is used in the former sense, and the word "bet" is used in the latter sense.

In addition, the “number of game medals to be paid out” (also referred to as “the number of game medals to be paid out”) means the number of game medals awarded to the player in one game. In addition, the act of paying out game medals includes the act of actually paying out game medals from the slot machine to the outside (also referred to as "actual payout"), and the act of electromagnetically distributing game medals as game medals stored in the slot machine. There is also an act of increasing the stored numerical value (also referred to as “stored addition payout”).

In addition, the “acquired number” of game medals (also referred to as “acquired number”) refers to the game medals acquired by the player during a predetermined period (which can be set arbitrarily, but for example, the AT period or the bonus period). means a numerical value counted as the total number of In addition, the “number of difference” (also referred to as “number of difference”) of game medals is the value (negative value) obtained by subtracting the total number of game medals bet from the total number of game medals paid out in a predetermined period. (sometimes). Although the "number of game medals won" and the "difference in the number of medals" can be used as different concepts, they are treated as synonymous below.

"Freeze" means that the execution of a predetermined control process relating to the progress of the game is delayed for a certain period of time. The freeze is set when the operation of the start lever 25 is accepted (also referred to as "freeze at the start of reel rotation"), and a freeze is set after all reels stop rotating ("freeze at reel rotation stop"). can be provided as appropriate. During the freeze period, game operations by the player are not effectively accepted. In addition, during the freeze period, a reel effect (also referred to as “reel effect”) may be performed. The reel performance is a performance of rotating reels 3a, 3b and 3c to be described later and stopping and displaying an arbitrary symbol combination regardless of the game operation by the player.

In the following description, "push navigator" refers to a process (action) of notifying the pushing order and pushing positions in order to assist establishment of the game role selected by the winning combination determination. Of push navigators, those that assist in establishing a replay role are called "RP navigators" (RP is an abbreviation for replay), those that assist in establishing a winning role (small role) are called "prize navigators." Assisting the stop display is also called "eye push navigation" (mainly performed on the side of the sub-control means). Also, if you want to distinguish between the push navigation performed on the main control means side and the push navigation performed on the sub control means side, the former is called "main side push navigation" ("main side RP navigation", "main side winning navigation"). , “Main side push navigation”), and the latter is also called “sub side push navigation” (“sub side RP navigation”, “sub side winning navigation”, “sub side push navigation”), or “push navigation” It may also be referred to as "rendering" ("RP navigating", "winning navigating", or "marking navigating").

In the following description and drawings, numerical values may be expressed in binary numbers or hexadecimal numbers in addition to decimal numbers. Therefore, in order to distinguish between them, "B" is added to the end of the numerical value when it is expressed in binary, and "H" is added to the end of the numerical value when it is expressed in hexadecimal. Also, when notating in decimal numbers, do not add anything to the end of the numerical value.

<<1st Embodiment>>
FIG. 1 shows a slot machine (referred to as "slot machine 1") as a first embodiment of the gaming machine according to the present invention. will be described with reference to.
<Slot machine appearance>
As shown in FIG. 1, the slot machine 1 has a front door 2 attached to the front surface of the main housing so that it can be opened and closed. A middle panel assembly 20, a bottom panel assembly 30 and a pan assembly 40 are attached.

A display screen 11a of an image display device (also referred to as a “liquid crystal display device”) 11 (see FIG. 2) arranged on the back side of the upper panel assembly 10 is arranged so as to face forward in the central part of the upper panel assembly 10, A first effect lamp 12, second effect lamps 13a and 13b, and third effect lamps 14a and 14b are arranged in the peripheral portion thereof. A pair of upper speakers 15a and 15b are arranged on the lower left and right sides of the display screen 11a.

In the central part of the middle panel assembly 20, there is provided a display window W through which the surfaces of the three reels 3a, 3b, 3c arranged side by side in the main housing face. , a medal insertion slot 21 for inserting game medals (game media), a 1-BET switch 22 for betting one game medal within the credited range, and a game with a maximum allowable bet number (for example, 3). A MAX-BET switch 23 for betting medals at once, a settlement switch 24 for paying out bet game medals and/or credited game medals, all reels 3a, 3b, 3c (reel A start lever 25 that is operated when starting rotation of the spinning drum), and three stop switches 26a, 26b, and 26c (left side in the figure) for individually stopping the rotation of the reels 3a, 3b, and 3c. stop switch 26a corresponds to the reel 3a, the central stop switch 26b corresponds to the reel 3b, and the right stop switch 26c corresponds to the reel 3c). A reject switch 27 and the like are provided for returning.

The inside of the medal insertion slot 21 includes a receiving passage (connected to a hopper 50 described later) through which the inserted game medals pass when the inserted game medals are validly received, and a passage when the inserted game medals are not accepted. It branches into a return passage through which game medals pass (which leads to a game medal payout port 41, which will be described later), and a blocker 48 (see FIG. 2) is provided at the branched portion. The blocker 48 guides the game medals inserted into the medal insertion slot 21 to the receiving passage during the period in which the inserted game medals are effectively received, and is inserted into the medal insertion slot 21 during other periods. The receiving passage and the return passage are selectively opened and the other can be closed so as to guide the game medals to the return passage. In the following description, the ON state of the blocker 48 indicates a state in which the game medals inserted into the medal slot 21 are guided to the receiving path (game medal receivable state), and the OFF state of the blocker 48 indicates a medal insertion state. It shows a state in which game medals inserted into the opening 21 are guided to the return path (game medal unacceptable state).

Inside the medal slot 21, three inserted medal sensors 28a, 28b, and 28c (see FIG. 2) for detecting game medals are provided. The inserted medal sensor 28a detects that game medals have been inserted into the medal slot 21, and is positioned upstream of the position where the blocker 48 is installed on the path along which the inserted game medals flow. is installed in The inserted medal sensor 28b detects that the game medals inserted into the medal insertion slot 21 are guided to the reception path and effectively received, and is positioned downstream of the position where the blocker 48 is installed (a hopper to be described later). 50). The inserted medal sensor 28c detects that game medals inserted into the medal slot 21 have passed through the branching portion between the receiving passage and the returning passage. (position slightly closer to the inserted medal sensor 28b).

When both the inserted medal sensor 28a and the inserted medal sensor 28b detect game medals, it means that the game medals have been inserted into the medal insertion slot 21 and that the inserted game medals have been effectively accepted. On the other hand, if the inserted medal sensor 28a detects game medals but the inserted medal sensor 28b does not detect any game medals, the game medals are inserted into the medal slot 21, but the inserted game medals are not accepted. It means that it was returned without In addition, when the three inserted medal sensors 28a, 28b, and 28c detect the passage of the game medals in an order different from the predetermined order (the order of 28a, 28c, and 28b), or when some of the inserted medal sensors detect the passage of the game medals. If is not detected, it means that an abnormal passage such as reverse flow of game medals has occurred.

The display window W is configured so that when all the three reels 3a to 3c are stopped, three symbols per reel, for a total of nine symbols, can be visually recognized by the player. A pay line 29 that horizontally connects the middle pattern display areas of the reels 3a, 3b, and 3c is a pay line that is activated by betting a specified number of game medals. It is configured such that it can be determined whether or not a game combination is established based on the combination of symbols that are stopped and displayed. An activated winning line is also called an “activated line”. Further, pattern display areas DA1 and DA2 (areas enclosed by chain double-dashed lines in the figure) are provided on the left side and above the display window W in the middle panel assembly 20 . The symbol display areas DA1 and DA2 are areas for displaying symbols related to symbol combinations that are important in playing the game, and will be described later in detail.

In addition, the slot machine 1 is provided with various display lamps such as LED lamps. In this embodiment, the display lamps include a MAX-BET switch display lamp 46a, a BET number display lamp 46b, an insertable display lamp 46c, a game start display lamp 46d, a replay display lamp 46e, a status display lamp 46f, and a number display lamp. 46g, a stored number display lamp 46h, and a payout number display lamp 46j. These display lamps are configured to be controlled by a main control board 60 (main control means 100), which will be described later.

The MAX-BET switch display lamp 46a is lit under conditions in which game medals can be bet, and is arranged inside the MAX-BET switch 23. When lit, the MAX-BET switch 23 is turned on partially or wholly. It is designed to illuminate. Other display lamps are arranged on the side of or below the display window W in the middle panel assembly 20 .

The BET number display lamp 46b (hereinafter also referred to as “BET lamp 46b”) displays the number of game medals that have been bet, and is a 1-BET display that lights up when the number of game medals that have been bet is one or more. It consists of a lamp 46bC, a 2-BET display lamp 46bB that lights up when there are two or more, and a MAX-BET display lamp 46bA which lights up when there are three. The insertable display lamp 46c is lit under conditions in which game medals can be inserted, and the game start display lamp 46d is lit under conditions in which the start lever 25 can be operated to start a game. It is what is done. The replay display lamp 46e is lit when a replay combination described later is established in an arbitrary game and game medals are automatically bet by an automatic bet process described later.

The status display lamp 46f is lit when the stored (credited) game medals are cleared, and the number of times display lamp 46g indicates, for example, when AT is set, the number of executable push-navigation ( The number is decremented by 1 each time push navigation is executed, and may be increased by a lottery or the like). A stored number display lamp 46h (hereinafter, also referred to as a "CRE lamp 46h") displays the number of stored game medals while incrementing the number by one, and a payout number display lamp 46j indicates that a small winning combination, which will be described later, has been established. The number of game medals to be paid out is displayed while being incremented by one. The stored number display lamp 46h and the payout number display lamp 46j each have two 7-segment displays (seven segment lamps for representing numbers, a decimal point (dot)) to display upper digits and lower digits. consisting of one segment lamp representing the

The number-of-payouts display lamp 46j is also configured to display characters (alphabet letters) or numbers indicating the type of error when some kind of abnormality (error) occurs in the slot machine 1. FIG. Errors set in this embodiment include HP error, HE error, H0 error, CE error, CP error, CH error, C0 error, C1 error, FE error, E1 error, E5 error, E6 error, E7 error, etc. There is The HP error is an error when it is determined that game medals have accumulated at the medal payout port of the hopper 50, which will be described later, and the HE error is an error when it is determined that the game medals in the hopper 50 are empty (hopper empty error). , and the H0 error is an error when it is determined that the game medals have abnormally passed through the payout sensor. The CE error is an error when the inserted medal sensor determines that the game medals have accumulated (game medal retention error), and the CP error is an error when it is determined that the inserted game medals have passed illegally. The C0 error is an error when it is determined that there is an abnormal input to the inserted medal sensor, and the C1 error is an error when it is determined that there is an abnormality in the passage of the inserted medal sensor. The FE error is an error (full error) when it is determined that the auxiliary storage 85, which will be described later, is full, and the E1 error is an error (RAM error) when the contents of the storage device (RAM) are not normal when the power is turned on. The E5 error is an error (rotational stop error) when the combination of symbols when all the reels are stopped is abnormal (corresponding symbols constituting a combination other than a combination allowed to be established are displayed in a stopped state). E6 error is an error (set value error) when the value of the set value (set value) for determining the winning combination probability is out of range, and E7 error is an update of the built-in random number used in each lottery etc. This is an error (built-in random number error) when an abnormal state is detected. Errors E1, E5, E6, and E7 (also collectively referred to as "E system errors") are canceled by changing the setting described later, and other errors are canceled by operating the reset switch 82 described later. It's like

Further, the payout number display lamp 46j also has a function of displaying a navigation number, which will be described later, indicating the order of operation (push order) of the stop switches 26a to 26c. The number-of-payouts display lamp 46j when displaying the navigation number is also referred to as a "main-side push-order indicator". In addition, the number-of-payouts display lamp 46j also has a function of displaying a set value, which will be described later, when confirming and changing settings, which will be described later. The number-of-payouts display lamp 46j for displaying the set value is also referred to as a "set value indicator".

A transparent lower panel cover 31 is attached to the central portion of the lower panel assembly 30, and decorative lamps 32a and 32b are arranged at both left and right ends thereof. On the back side of the lower panel cover 31, a translucent lower panel base provided with a predetermined pattern and a lower panel illumination lamp (both not shown) are attached, and the lower panel illumination lamp is turned on. The pattern on the lower panel base is illuminated from the rear side by turning on.

The tray assembly 40 is provided with a game medal payout port 41 for paying out game medals, and a game medal storage tray 42 for storing game medals facing the game medal payout port 41. An ashtray 43 is provided on the left side of the game medal storage tray 42 . Further, on the left and right sides of the game medal payout port 41, a pair of lower speakers 44a and 44b (see FIG. 2) arranged on the back side of the tray assembly 40 face the front face of the pair of lower speakers 44a and 44b (see FIG. 2). , 45b are formed.

Further, a hopper 50 (see FIG. 2) for paying out game medals obtained when a predetermined winning mode is established as a result of the game is provided in the main body housing. A medal detector 51 (see FIG. 2) is provided for detecting game medals. Also, the hopper 50 has a function of physically storing game medals that have been inserted and effectively received. Further, in the vicinity of the hopper 50, an auxiliary storage 85 (see FIG. 2) for storing game medals overflowing from the hopper 50 is provided, and the auxiliary storage 85 is in a full state (from the auxiliary storage 85). A full detector 86 (see FIG. 2) is provided for detecting whether or not the game medals are likely to overflow.

<Reel>
Each reel 3a, 3b, 3c is configured to rotate by being driven by a stepping motor 35a, 35b, 35c (see FIG. 2). Each of the reels 3a, 3b, and 3c is made of a light-transmitting member, and on the outer peripheral surface thereof, a light-transmitting reel tape on which a plurality of types of patterns (see FIG. 3) are displayed. pasted. Further, back lamps 38a, 38b, 38c (see FIG. 2) are arranged on the inner surface side of each of the reels 3a, 3b, 3c. The area of each of the reels 3a, 3b, and 3c facing inside W is illuminated entirely from the inner surface side, and a predetermined symbol combination (for example, on the effective line 29, Only a partial area of each of the reels 3a, 3b, 3c is illuminated so as to make the corresponding symbols of the game combination arranged at positions different from the effective line 29 stand out.

<Basic operations for playing games>
In order to play a game on the slot machine 1, first, a player places a bet by actually inserting game medals into the medal slot 21, or operates either the 1-BET switch 22 or the MAX-BET switch 23 to make a credit range. The winning line 29 is activated by betting a prescribed number of game medals within the line. In this embodiment, the specified number of game medals required to activate the winning line 29 is set to three in any of the RT states of non-RT, RT1, RT2, and RT3, which will be described later. However, the specified number is not limited to this, and can be changed as appropriate, such as by setting the specified number to a different value according to the RT state or the like. Also, a plurality of winning lines may be provided, and the number of activated winning lines may be changed according to the number of game medals bet.

Next, when the player operates the start lever 25, the number of bets is determined (the betted game medals are used for the game), and the combination determination process described later is performed. After that, the minimum game time ( The minimum amount of time (e.g., 4.1 seconds) that must be ensured between the start of rotation of all reels in one game and the start of rotation of all reels in the next game has elapsed. After confirming that, each of the reels 3a to 3c starts to rotate, and a plurality of types of symbols displayed on the outer peripheral surfaces of the reels 3a to 3c move up and down (usually from top to bottom) within the display window W. be done. Then, when the rotation of the reels 3a to 3c reaches a predetermined speed and becomes constant speed rotation, each stop switch 26a to 26c is activated (operation of the stop switch can be effectively accepted), and the player operates the stop switch 26a. is operated to stop the rotation of the reel 3a, the stop switch 26b is operated to stop the rotation of the reel 3b, and the stop switch 26c is operated to stop the rotation of the reel 3c.

Here, when it is determined that the symbol combination stopped and displayed on the activated line 29 is a predetermined winning mode (symbols corresponding to a game combination that can obtain a game medal), each winning mode is determined. The number of game medals corresponding to is paid out by the hopper 50 or added as credits.

<Connection between the control board and each device>
In this embodiment, as main control boards for controlling the slot machine 1, as shown in FIG. The main control board 70A and the sub-sub control board 70B are collectively referred to as the sub-control board 70). Main control related to the progress of the game (including drive control of the reels 3a to 3c, combination determination processing, etc.) is performed by a control circuit arranged on the main control board 60, and illumination by lamps such as the back lamps 38a to 38c. Control and the like are configured to be performed by a control circuit arranged on the sub-main control board 70A. Further, the effect image display control by the image display device 11 and the sound generation control from the speakers such as the upper speakers 15a and 15b are mainly performed by the control circuit arranged on the sub-sub control board 70B. there is Furthermore, information can be transmitted between the main control board 60 and the sub-control board 70 only in one direction from the main control board 60 to the sub-main control board 70A. Information can be transmitted bidirectionally with the control board 70B.

The main control board 60 includes a main CPU 61 that performs various arithmetic processes related to games, a ROM 62 that is a read-only storage device that stores control programs and the like, and a RAM 63 that is a storage device in which information can be written and read (" RAM" is also referred to as "RWM"), and each drive circuit and the like operate according to the control program stored in the ROM 62, thereby controlling the progress of the game in the slot machine 1. It's like The ROM 62 and RAM 63 are non-volatile storage devices, and are configured to retain stored information even when power is not supplied.

The main CPU 61 includes a clock pulse generator 64 for generating a clock pulse (clock signal), a frequency divider 65 for dividing the clock pulse generated by the clock pulse generator 64, a clock pulse (or a frequency-divided A random number generator 66 for generating random numbers used for determining a winning combination, etc., and a random number fetching circuit 67 for fetching the random numbers generated by the random number generator 66 are connected. The clock pulse generator 64 is composed of two oscillators (not shown), and asynchronous clock signals are output from the respective oscillators. Hereinafter, a clock signal with a predetermined frequency output from one oscillator will be referred to as an internal clock, and a clock signal with a predetermined frequency (a different frequency from the internal clock, but may be the same) output from the other oscillator. is called an external clock. For example, the internal clock is used as an operation clock of the main CPU 61 and as an update clock for random numbers used in a predetermined lottery other than the determination of a winning combination, and the external clock is used as an update clock for random numbers used in determining a winning combination. The main CPU 61, ROM 62, RAM 63, frequency divider 65, random number generator 66, random number acquisition circuit 67, interface circuit 68, etc. may be mounted on one IC chip to form a one-chip microcomputer. The main CPU 61 also transmits signals to the motor drive circuit 36a, the display lamp control circuit 47, the hopper drive circuit 52, and the sub control board 70 via the interface circuit 68, and the reel position detection circuits 37a and 37b. , 37 c , payout detection signal circuit 53 and storage state signal circuit 87 .

The motor drive circuit 36a is a circuit for performing rotation/stop control of the stepping motors 35a, 35b, and 35c that rotate the reels 3a, 3b, and 3c, respectively. This is a circuit for controlling the lamps for use. The reel position detection circuits 37a, 37b, and 37c are circuits that transmit detection signals from reel sensors (not shown) installed on the reels 3a, 3b, and 3c to the main control board 60 (the detection circuit 37a corresponds to the reel 3a, the detection circuit 37b corresponds to the reel 3b, and the detection circuit 37c corresponds to the reel 3c). The hopper drive circuit 52 is a circuit for driving the hopper 50 to pay out game medals when a small winning combination is established, and the payout detection signal circuit 53 detects when the game medals have been paid out from the hopper 50 . It is a circuit that transmits a payout detection signal to the main control board 60 when detected by the medal detection unit 51 . The storage state signal circuit 87 is a circuit that transmits a storage state signal indicating whether or not the auxiliary storage 85 is full to the main control board 60 according to the detection result of the fullness detector 86 .

Further, power is supplied to the slot machine 1 from the power supply device 80 via the main control board 60 . A power switch 81, a reset switch 82, and a setting key type switch 83 are connected to the power supply device 80, and signals from these switches are transmitted to the main CPU 61 via the interface circuit 68. ing. Furthermore, the main CPU 61 is configured to receive a signal from the setting change switch 84 via the interface circuit 68 .

The power switch 81 is a switch that accepts power-on and power-off operations from the power supply 80 to the slot machine 1. The reset switch 82 is a switch that receives a predetermined error in the slot machine 1 (an error other than the above-described E system error). This switch is operated by a game clerk or the like when the cause of the error is removed and the error is resolved. By operating this reset switch 82, the error occurrence information stored in the main control board 60 and the sub-control board 70 is cleared, and along with this, the main control board 60 and the sub-control board 70 perform the processing when the error is resolved. executed. The setting key type switch 83 is a switch that is operated when confirming and changing setting values that determine the degree (rank) of the odds of winning a winning combination. This is a switch for changing in steps (six steps in this embodiment).

When the front door 2 is open (also referred to as "door open state") and power is being supplied to the slot machine 1 (the power switch 81 is ON), the setting key switch 83 is turned ON. Setting can be confirmed by being operated. When the door is open and power is not supplied to the slot machine 1 (the power switch 81 is OFF), the setting key switch 83 is turned ON, and the power switch 81 is kept in that state. is turned on (the slot machine 1 is powered on), the setting can be changed. Furthermore, each time the setting change switch 84 is operated in that state, the setting value can be updated by one step. After the setting value is updated, the updated setting value is determined by tilting the start lever 25, and the setting change operation is completed by operating the setting key type switch 83 to the OFF state after the determination. It is designed to The setting key type switch 83 can be switched between an ON state and an OFF state by inserting a predetermined key member (setting key) into a predetermined lock member provided on the main body side and turning it. there is In addition, setting confirmation and setting change cannot be performed while a game is in progress (a state in which game medals are betted (including a state in which game medals are automatically betted) or a state in which reels are spinning). It can be executed only in the game standby state. When confirming or changing the setting, the set value is displayed on the payout number display lamp 46j using six integer values from "1 to 6" (a separate may be provided in the housing of the slot machine 1 or the like).

Power from the power supply device 80 is supplied to the sub-main control board 70A via the main control board 60, and further supplied to the sub-sub-control board 70B via the sub-main control board 70A (the power supply device 80 power may be directly supplied to the sub-main control board 70A and the sub-sub-control board 70B). A supply voltage monitoring circuit for monitoring the voltage supply state is provided on the circuit that supplies power from the power supply device 80 to the main control board 60 and on the circuit that supplies power to the sub-main control board 70A via the main control board 60. (not shown) are provided respectively. Each supply voltage monitoring circuit judges that the power supply is cut off when the supply voltage drops to a predetermined voltage value, and outputs a power cutoff detection signal to the main CPU 61 and a sub-main CPU 71 which will be described later. In addition, each supply voltage monitoring circuit detects when the supply voltage returns to a predetermined voltage value (a value different from the voltage value for determining power failure (for example, a higher value), but the same value may be used). It is determined that power is turned on immediately, and a power-on detection signal is output to the main CPU 61 and the sub-main CPU 71 . Note that the voltage value for detecting the power cutoff of the main control board 60 is set to a value higher than the voltage value for detecting the power cutoff of the sub-main control board 70A, and is set to a value higher than the voltage value when detecting the power cut-off of the sub-main control board 70A. The main control board 60 is configured to perform processing (power-off processing) programmed to be executed when the power is turned off (the same may be applied to power-on).

The main CPU 61 also includes a reel stop signal circuit 91, a start lever 25, inserted token sensors 28a, 28b, 28c, a 1-BET switch 22, which are connected to the switch board 90 or mounted on the switch board 90. , the MAX-BET switch 23 and the settlement switch 24 are inputted via the interface circuit 68 .

A blocker 48 is connected to the main CPU 61 via an interface circuit 68, and is configured to be ON/OFF controlled. In the following description, the signal for ON/OFF control of the blocker 48 is also called "blocker signal". Further, although not shown, the slot machine 1 is provided with a door sensor for detecting the open/closed state of the front door 2, and a signal from this door sensor is input to the main CPU 61 via the interface circuit 68. It has become so. The main CPU 61 determines whether the front door 2 is in a closed state (also referred to as a "door closed state") or an open state (door open state) based on a signal from the door sensor.

Also, although not shown, the main CPU 61, when entering a predetermined gaming state (for example, AT state or bonus state), connects data counters, hall computers, and the like to external connection terminal boards and the like. A predetermined signal (also referred to as an "outer end signal") is output, and the number of times a predetermined game state is set can be managed or presented to the player by the outer end signal.

On the other hand, the sub-main control board 70A includes a sub-main CPU 71 that mainly performs various arithmetic processes related to performance management, a ROM 72 that is a read-only storage device that stores control programs and the like, and information that can be written and read. A RAM 73, which is a storage device, is provided, and each drive circuit and the like operate according to a control program stored in the ROM 72, thereby controlling image effects and sound effects in the slot machine 1, and controlling lamp effects. etc. are to be carried out. The ROM 72 and RAM 73 are non-volatile storage devices, and are configured to retain stored information even when power is not supplied. A clock pulse generator and frequency divider (not shown) are connected to the sub-main CPU 71, and predetermined processing is executed according to the clock signal generated by the clock pulse generator and frequency divider. It has become.

The sub-main CPU 71 is configured to receive various signals from the main control board 60 via the interface circuit 74 and transmit signals to the lamp control circuit 18 . The lamp control circuit 18 is a circuit for controlling lighting of lamps such as the back lamps 38a to 38c.

The sub-main CPU 71 is also configured to transmit various signals to the sub-sub control board 70B and receive various signals from the sub-sub control board 70B via the interface circuit 74 . Hereinafter, the signal (control signal) transmitted from the main control board 60 to the sub-main control board 70A is also referred to as "control command", and the signal (notification signal or effect signal) transmitted from the sub-main control board 70A to the sub-sub control board 70B ) is also referred to as a “drawing command”. A signal (state signal) transmitted from the sub-sub control board 70B to the sub-main control board 70A is also called a "state command".

The sub-sub control board 70B includes a sub-sub CPU 75 that mainly performs various arithmetic processing related to control of image effects and sound effects, a ROM 76 that is a read-only storage device that stores control programs, etc., and information can be written and read. A RAM 77 is provided as a storage device, and each drive circuit and the like operate according to a control program stored in the ROM 76, thereby controlling image effects and sound effects. The ROM 76 and RAM 77 are nonvolatile storage devices, and are configured to retain stored information even when power is not supplied.

The sub-sub CPU 75 receives a notification signal or effect signal from the sub-main control board 70A via the interface circuit 78, transmits signals to the display device control circuit 16 and the speaker control circuit 17, and also transmits signals to the sub-main control board 70A. is configured to send a status signal to the The display device control circuit 16 is a circuit for controlling the image display device 11 to display a predetermined effect image, and the speaker control circuit 17 controls the type and volume of sounds generated from speakers such as the upper speakers 15a and 15b. This is the control circuit. The image display device 11 is also configured to function as a push indicator (also referred to as a "sub-side push order indicator") that displays the operation order (push order) of the stop switches 26a to 26c.

<Pattern placement on the reel>
In this embodiment, the symbols displayed by the respective reels 3a to 3c are arranged as shown in FIG. 3b and 3c respectively). That is, each of the reels 3a to 3c has "Red Seven", "Gold Seven", "Black Bar", "Blue Bar", "Blank A", "Blank B", "Bell A", "Bell B", A predetermined number of 10 kinds of patterns of "watermelon" and "replay" are arranged. Hereinafter, the reels 3a, 3b, and 3c are also referred to as a left reel (left reel), a middle reel (middle reel), and a right reel (right reel), respectively.

<Types of game roles>
In this embodiment, the symbol combinations to be stopped and displayed on the respective reels 3a to 3c are set as shown in FIGS. there is As the game role in the present embodiment, two special roles (BB role; BB is an abbreviation for big bonus. Also referred to as "1 type BB" and "bonus role") and five replay roles 1 to 5 A total of 51 winning combinations (small winning combination) of 44 winning combinations (small winning combination) of 1 to 44 small winning combinations are set. The symbol combinations (corresponding symbols) for establishing each game combination, the number of game medals to be paid out when the game combination is established, etc. are as shown in FIGS. 4 to 7. FIG.

BB wins 1 and 2 do not pay out game medals even if they are established, and when the BB wins are established, a predetermined bonus (also referred to as "BB" in the present embodiment) as a special role is activated, and the normal game is started from the next game. It is shifted to a special game state (also called "BB in operation") advantageous to the player, in which a predetermined bonus game (also called "BB game") executed under different conditions from the game can be started. It is a game role (bonus role) indicating that. The BB role 1 has a symbol combination of "blue bar, blue bar, and red seven", and the BB role 2 has a corresponding pattern of "black bar, black bar, red seven" (composing a game role). The symbols are named in the order of the reels 3a, 3b, and 3c (same below). A bonus game that can be started by establishing BB winning combination 1 or BB winning combination 2 ends when a predetermined number of game medals (in this embodiment, for example, 70 medals, but the number can be changed as appropriate) is acquired. (As a modified mode, the game may end when a predetermined number of games (for example, 30 games) have been played). BB hands 1 and 2 may be established in non-RT and RT1 (inside BB), which will be described later, but are not established in RT2 (during BB operation) (see FIGS. 4 to 7). "-" indicates that it does not hold).

In this embodiment, only the BB role is provided as the special role, but as other special roles, the RB role (RB is an abbreviation for regular bonus) and the MB role (MB is an abbreviation for middle bonus. ) may be provided. Then, when the RB combination is established, the next game may be set to start the RB game as a bonus game, and when the MB combination is established, the next game may be set to start the MB game as the bonus game. In this case, the RB game ends when, for example, a small win is established a predetermined number of times (e.g., 8 times) or when a predetermined number of games (e.g., 12 times) are completed, and the MB game is For example, the game may end when a predetermined number (for example, more than 200) of game medals are paid out. In addition, a plurality of special wins (for example, a plurality of types of BB wins may be provided, or both BB wins and MB wins may be provided).

In the replay hands 1 to 5, no game medals are paid out when established, but the next game is played without reducing the number of game medals owned by the player (without inserting new game medals). This is a playing role (replay role) that is permitted. As for the replay combination 1, the corresponding symbol "Bell A Replay Blue Bar/Black Bar/Gold Seven/Red Seven" ("/" means "or") is stop-displayed on the effective line 29. At this time, the pattern "Replay" is arranged on a right downward line connecting the upper left display area, the middle middle display area, and the lower right display area in the display window W. For this reason, the replay combination 1 is also referred to as "downward-sloping replay" (replay is also referred to as "RP"). For the same reason, the replaying hands 2 to 4 are also referred to as rising right RP, upper RP, and middle RP, respectively. Further, the replaying combination 5 is displayed in the upper left part of the display window W when the corresponding symbol "Bell A, blue bar/black bar/gold seven/red seven, bell B" is stop-displayed on the effective line 29. The pattern "watermelon" is arranged on the upper line connecting the display area of , the middle upper display area, and the upper right display area. For this reason, the replay combination 1 is also referred to as "upper stage watermelon RP".

As shown in FIG. 3 (reel symbols), the symbol "replay" on each reel of the left reel, the middle reel and the right reel, which constitutes the replay combination 4, is arranged every five symbols or less on each reel. there is As a result, when the replay combination 4 is won, the corresponding symbol "replay, replay, replay" can be stopped and displayed (also referred to as "pulling in") on the effective line 29 regardless of the order or position of the push. It is possible (see the description of reel rotation stop control by the reel control means 134, which will be described later). Like this replay combination 4, regardless of the operation timing of each stop switch, a combination that can draw the corresponding symbol (if there are multiple groups, one of them) onto the activated line 29 is called "100". It is also referred to as a % retractable game combination. It should be noted that, like the replay combination 4, the replay combinations 1 to 3 and 5 are also 100% drawable combinations. Further, the replayed hands 1 to 5 may be established in non-RT and RT1 which will be described later, but are not established in RT2.

The small wins 1 to 44 are game wins (winning wins) configured to pay out a predetermined number of game medals when established. Of the small wins 1 to 44, the small wins 1 to 36 are wins that can be established in any of non-RT, RT1 and RT2, which will be described later, while the small wins 37 to 39 are RT2 (BB in operation). It is a role that can only be established. In addition, the small wins 1 to 23 and 40 to 43 are also referred to as "one-coin wins" because the number of payouts at the time of establishment is set to one. Similarly, the small wins 24 to 37 are also referred to as "15 wins", and the small wins 38 and 39 are also referred to as "three wins". Note that the 15-card hand is also referred to as a “small bell hand”.

When the corresponding symbols "Bell A, watermelon, blue bar/black bar/gold seven/red seven" are stopped and displayed on the effective line 29, the small combination 37 is displayed on the lower right line in the display window W. It is configured so that the pattern "watermelon" is lined up. For this reason, the small winning combination 37 is also called a "watermelon small winning combination". Further, the small combination 40 is a one-piece combination whose corresponding symbols are "red seven, red seven, red seven". For this reason, the small winning combination of 40 is also referred to as a "red 7 matching single winning combination". Incidentally, the small wins 1 to 7 and 24 to 37 are game wins that can be drawn in 100%.

<Winning items in role lottery (condition device)>
A combination determination process (a combination lottery) is performed once in one game, and one or a plurality of winning items are selected as a combination determination result (lottery result). Here, the combination determination result is referred to as a conditional device. The table of FIG. 8(A) shows the types of bonus condition devices selected by lottery (internal lottery) and the corresponding winning combinations, and FIG. 8(B) and FIGS. 9 to 13. The table shows the types of winning replay condition devices selected by lottery, the winning combinations corresponding thereto, and the combinations and the like. The contents of some conditional devices will be specifically described below.

The bonus condition device shown in FIG. 8(A) includes a type BB-A condition device corresponding to number 1 and a type BB-B condition device corresponding to number 2 (number 0 indicates which bonus condition It indicates a failure in which no device is selected). The type 1 BB-A conditional device is a conditional device in which BB hand 1 wins alone, and is selected during non-RT, which will be described later. Also, if the BB combination 1 is not established even if the player is selected, the selection is carried over to RT1, which will be described later. On the other hand, RT2 is neither selected nor carried over ("-" in the figure indicates neither selected nor carried over). The type 1 BB-B conditional device is a conditional device in which BB hand 2 wins alone, is selected during non-RT, and if BB hand 2 is not established even if it is selected, the selection is carried over to RT1. It's like Also, in RT2, it is neither selected nor carried over.

During non-RT where the 1 type BB-A condition device is selected or during RT1 where the selection of the 1 type BB-A condition device is carried over, depending on the position pressed by the player, the corresponding symbol of BB role 1 “Blue bar ・If the "blue bar/red seven" can be drawn onto the effective line 29, the BB combination 1 is established. Similarly, during non-RT where the 1 type BB-B condition device is selected or during RT1 where the selection of the 1 type BB-B condition device is carried over, depending on the position pressed by the player, the corresponding symbol of the BB role 2 " If a "black bar, black bar, red seven" can be drawn onto the effective line 29, BB win 2 is established.

The replay-A to L condition devices corresponding to numbers 1 to 12 shown in FIG. 8(B) are condition devices in which a replay combination is a winning combination. For example, the replay-A condition device is a condition device in which replay hands 1 to 4 are repeatedly elected, and may be selected during RT1 during non-RT described later, but may be selected during RT2. configured to prevent Further, when selected, the replay combination 4 (middle RP) is always established regardless of the pressing order or pressing position, whether it is non-RT or RT1. The replay-L condition device is a condition device in which replay hands 2 to 5 are duplicated. RP) is established, when selected in RT1, the replay combination 4 (middle RP) is always established regardless of the pressing order or pressing position.

Number 0 shown in FIG. 8(B) indicates a loss in which none of the winning replay condition devices is selected. Although this loss is selected only during non-RT in this embodiment, it may be selected during RT1 or RT2 as well. In the case where a failure is selected in RT1, when a failure is selected, if the pressing order is a predetermined pressing order such as reverse pressing (the pressing order in which the stop switch 26c is operated first), Depending on the pressing position, a pattern combination of "red seven, red seven, red seven" (also referred to as "red seven matching pattern") may be displayed in the display window W (for example, on the effective line 29). good. This symbol with 7 reds is in common with the symbol corresponding to the small winning combination 40 (small winning combination with 7 reds), but the small winning combination 2 is only realized during RT2. The red 7 aligned symbol that is stopped and displayed during RT1 is a lost symbol.

Winning-A1 to A12 condition devices corresponding to numbers 13 to 24 shown in FIGS. 8(B), 9 and 10, respectively, are condition devices in which a small combination is a winning combination. Also, during non-RT, which will be described later, it may be selected during RT1, but it is configured so as not to be selected during RT2. Furthermore, when selected during non-RT, a predetermined single hand is always established regardless of the pressing order or pressing position, and when selected during RT1, the winning combination differs depending on the pressing order and pressing position. It's like For example, the prize-A11 condition device shown in FIG. A small combination 6, which is a one-piece combination, is always established regardless of the number.

On the other hand, if the winning-A11 condition device is selected in RT1, when the pushing order is "middle right left", a small winning combination 6 with 15 cards is established with a probability of 1/1, and the pushing order is "right middle In the case of "Left", the small combination 34, which is a combination of 15 cards, is established with a probability of 1/1. , one of the small wins of 10, 15, and 16, which are one-card wins, is established with a probability of 1/8. "Left", "middle", and "right" mean the stop switches 26a, 26b, and 26c, and the order in which they are arranged indicates the order in which they are operated. For example, "middle, right, left" represents the pressing order of operating the stop switch in the order of 26b→26c→26a. In FIGS. 9 to 12, each pressing order is indicated by the order of numbers "1", "2", and "3". "123", "132", "213", "231", "312", and "321" in the figure are respectively "left center right", "left right center", "center left right", "center right left", Corresponds to the pressing order of "center right left" and "right center left".

Since selection of the bonus condition device is carried over during RT1, BB combination 1 and BB combination 2 may be established depending on the pressing order and pressing position. For example, if the prize-A11 condition device is selected in RT1 where the selection of the 1 type BB-B condition device that BB role 2 wins alone is carried over, when the pushing order is "middle right left" and "right middle In the case of "Left", a small win of 6 and a small win of 34 are always established, so a BB win of 2 is never established. On the other hand, in the case of other pressing orders ("left center right", "left right center", "middle left right", "middle right left"), the corresponding pattern of one of the small wins 10, 15, 16 is drawn depending on the pressing position. If it is possible, BB role 2 is not established, but these corresponding symbols cannot be drawn, and conversely, if the corresponding symbols of BB role 2 "black bar / black bar / red seven" can be drawn, BB role 2 holds.

Specifically, the case of the pressing order of "left, middle, right" will be described as an example. First, the case where the pushing position on the first left reel is within the range where the symbol "red seven" can be drawn will be described. In this case, since the left reel is reel-controlled to draw the symbol "red seven", there remains a possibility that either a small winning combination 16 or a small winning combination 21 will be established at that stage. Subsequently, when the pushing position on the second middle reel is within the range where the symbol "blue bar" can be pulled in, reel control is performed to pull in the symbol "blue bar" on the middle reel. is likely to be established, and finally, if the pushing position on the third right reel is within the range where the symbol "blue bar" can be drawn, reel control is performed to attract the symbol "blue bar" on the right reel. Therefore, a small winning combination 16 (corresponding symbols "red seven, blue bar, blue bar") is finally established. On the other hand, if the pushing position on the second middle reel is within the range where the symbol "red seven" can be drawn, reel control is performed to draw the symbol "red seven" on the middle reel, so at that stage it is lost. (None of the roles are established) is confirmed (there is still a possibility that the symbol combination of "Red Seven, Red Seven, Red Seven" will be stopped and displayed), and finally the push position on the third right reel If is within the range where the symbol "Red Seven" can be drawn, the reel control that draws the symbol "Red Seven" is performed on the right reel, so finally the symbol combination of "Red Seven, Red Seven, Red Seven" is It will be stopped and displayed.

Next, a description will be given of the case where the pushing position on the first left reel is within the range where the symbol "black bar" can be drawn. In this case, since the left reel is reel-controlled to draw in the symbol "black bar", at that stage there is still the possibility that either a BB win of 2, a small win of 10 or a small win of 15 will be established. Subsequently, when the pushing position on the second middle reel is within the range where the symbol "black bar" can be pulled in, reel control is performed to pull in the symbol "black bar" on the middle reel. is likely to be established, and finally, if the pushing position on the third right reel is within the range where the symbol "Red Seven" can be drawn, reel control is performed to attract the symbol "Red Seven" on the right reel. Therefore, the BB combination 2 (corresponding symbol “black bar/black bar/red seven”) is finally established. On the other hand, if the pushing position on the second middle reel is within the range where the symbol "Gold Seven" can be drawn, reel control is performed to draw the symbol "Gold Seven" on the middle reel. If there is still a possibility that the combination 10 will be established, and finally the pushing position on the third right reel is within the range where the symbol "Golden Seven" can be drawn, the reel control to draw the symbol "Golden Seven" on the right reel is performed. As a result, a small combination 10 (corresponding symbols "black bar, gold seven, gold seven") is finally established.

Winning-B1 to B12 condition devices corresponding to numbers 25 to 36 shown in FIGS. , RT2. In addition, when the key is selected during non-RT and when the key is selected during RT1, the winning combination differs depending on the pressing order and the pressing position. For example, the prize-B7 condition device shown in FIG. When it is "middle first", a small winning combination of 15 pieces is 30 with a probability of 1/1, and when the pressing order is "left first" or "right first", a small winning combination of one piece is 5. holds with probability 1/1. "Left 1st" means that the stop switch 26a is operated first, "Middle 1st" means that the stop switch 26b is operated first, and "Right 1st" means that the stop switch 26c is operated first. It shows the pressing order. In FIGS. 10 to 13, the pressing order of "left first", "middle first", and "right first" is indicated by "1 - -", "- 2-" and "- - 3", respectively. ing.

On the other hand, when the prize-B7 condition device is selected in RT1, when the pushing order is "middle left and right", a small winning combination 4 or a small winning combination 5, which is a single hand, is established with a probability of 1/1, and the pressing order is "right-left-center", a small win of 30 with 15 cards is established with a probability of 1/1. ), one of the small wins 8, 13, 18, and 23, which are single wins, is established with a probability of 1/8. Also, if the prize-B7 condition device is selected in RT1 where the selection of the 1 type BB-A condition device that BB role 1 wins alone is carried over, when the pushing order is "middle left and right" and "right left middle , the small wins of 4, 5 and 30 are always established, so the BB win of 1 is never established. On the other hand, in the case of other pressing orders ("left center right", "left right center", "middle right left", "right center left"), one of the small hands 8, 13, 18, 23 corresponds depending on the pressing position. If the symbols can be drawn in, the BB win 11 is not established, but if these corresponding symbols cannot be drawn in, and conversely, if the corresponding symbols of the BB win 1 "blue bar/blue bar/red seven" can be drawn in. BB win 1 is established.

Winning-C to E condition devices corresponding to numbers 37 to 39 shown in FIG. It is configured so that it will not be elected. In addition, regardless of the pressing order or pressing position, a small winning combination 36 with 15 cards is always established regardless of whether the player is selected during non-RT or during RT1.

Winning-F to Q condition devices corresponding to numbers 40 to 51 shown in FIG. is configured to be elected. Of these, the winning - F, G, L, M condition device is always a 15-piece watermelon small role (small role 24 to 37) regardless of the pushing order or pushing position when selected in RT2. is established. Winning-I, J, K, O, P, Q condition device, when selected in RT2, depending on the pushing position, one hand (small hand 1 to 23, 40 to 44) is established there is The prize-H condition device is designed to establish a triple combination (small combination 38, 39) depending on the pressing position when selected in RT2. Winning - N condition device, if selected in RT2, when the pushing order is "left first" or "middle first", depending on the pushing position, a one-piece role is established, and the pushing order is "right first" At the time of "1", depending on the pressing position, a combination of 7 single cards (a small combination of 40) is established.

<Possibility of winning and setting difference>
In the hand determination process, the probability that each conditional device is selected (hand determination probability) can be set arbitrarily. Also, the combination determination probability can be configured so as to be changeable according to the above-described setting value set by a game clerk or the like. In this embodiment, there are 6 stages of setting values from setting 1 to 6, and there is a condition device in which the winning probability is changed according to the setting value, and the winning winning probability remains unchanged even if the set value changes. and a condition device. Hereinafter, setting such that the combination probability is changed according to the setting value is referred to as "providing a setting difference". It is possible to arbitrarily decide whether or not to provide a setting difference for each condition device. As an example, a setting difference is not provided for a conditional device that serves as a lottery trigger for a lottery that affects the payout rate of the slot machine 1 (the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of game medals provided for the game). For the conditional devices that must not be satisfied, it is possible to provide or not provide a setting difference.

FIG. 14 shows the number of winning values (total of 65536 entries) assigned to each condition device as an example of probability of determining a winning combination in the slot machine 1 . In this example, winning numbers in RT states of non-RT, RT1, and RT2 are shown for three setting values of setting 1, setting 3, and setting 6. FIG. According to this example, the probability that the type 1 BB-A condition device and the type 1 BB-B condition device will be selected during non-RT is set to about 7/100, which is relatively high. In addition, during non-RT or during RT1, the probability that any one of the prize-A1 to A12 condition devices is selected is set to be about 7/10, which is quite high.

Next, the characteristic configuration of the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment will be described with additional reference to FIGS. 15 to 33. FIG.
<Functional block>
As shown in FIG. 15, from a functional point of view, the slot machine according to the present embodiment mainly includes a betting operation for betting game medals (for example, an operation for inserting game medals into the medal slot 21). , pressing operation of 1-BET switch 22 or MAX-BET switch 23), reel rotation start operation for rotating each stopped reel 3a to 3c (for example, tilting operation of start lever 25), multiple types of symbols Reel rotation stopping operation (for example, pressing stop switches 26a, 26b, 26c) for stopping the rotation of the three reels 3a, 3b, 3c that variably display , bet or accumulated (credited) game medals Operation signal output means 95 for outputting a signal (also referred to as a "game operation signal") corresponding to each game operation performed by the player, such as a settlement operation (for example, pressing the settlement switch 24) for paying out , main control means 100 (corresponding to the main control board 60) that performs main control related to the progress of the game, and sub-control means 200 (corresponding to the sub-control board 70) that performs predetermined effect control according to the game situation ).

The main control means 100 can be roughly divided into a game state management means 110 that mainly manages the game state, a game progress management means 130 that mainly manages the progress of the game, and a main communication control that controls communication in the main control means 100. Means 150 are provided. Of these, the game state management means 110 includes a set value control means 111, an RT state control means 112, a replay operation control means 113, a bonus operation control means 114, a freeze control means 115, a game mode control means 116, and a random number generator/ A capturing means 117 is provided.

The game progress management means 130 includes received medal management means 131, winning combination determination means 132, performance group number determination means 133, reel control means 134, stop display symbol determination means 135, payout medal management means 136, blocker control means 137, It has display lamp control means 138 , push order management means 139 , and condition device group number determination means 140 . The above-described means in the main control means 100 include hardware such as the main CPU 61, ROM 62, RAM 63, and electronic circuits arranged on the main control board 60 shown in FIG. It is a functional representation of what is configured by software.

(Each Means Constituting Gaming State Management Means 110)
The set value control means 111 is configured to control a numerical value (also referred to as a “management set value”) for internally managing the set value of the winning combination probability (six levels of setting 1 to setting 6). ing. In this embodiment, consecutive integer values from 1 to 6 (the integer values from 1 to 6 correspond to settings 1 to 6, respectively) are used as management setting values. The management set value data is stored in a predetermined storage area of the RAM 63, and is referred to when confirming the set value in the winning combination determination process. It is referred to when the set value is displayed on the value display (payout number display lamp 46j). Also, the setting value for management is changed according to the setting change operation by the game clerk. Specifically, each time the setting key type switch 83 is turned on and the setting change switch 84 is operated in that state, the setting is updated by one.

The RT state control means 112 is configured to control the setting of three RT states, non-RT, RT1 and RT2, as shown in FIG. Non-RT is the RT state set when the RAM (RAM 63) is initialized. During this non-RT period, when the condition P1 is satisfied, the process is shifted to RT1. The condition P1 is that a type 1 BB-A condition device or a type BB-B condition device is selected (also referred to as "BB winning").

RT1 is the RT state set when the selection of 1 type BB-A condition device or 1 type BB-B condition device (winning BB role 1 or BB role 2) is carried over (also known as "inside BB" is called). During this RT1, when the condition P2 is satisfied, the process is shifted to RT2. The condition P2 is that a BB win 1 or a BB win 2 is established (also referred to as “BB establishment” or “BB action”).

RT2 is an RT state (also referred to as "BB in action") that is set from the next game when BB win 1 or BB win 2 is established, and a bonus game can be executed during this RT2. RT2 is set so that no replay combination is won and one of the winning J to Q condition devices is selected (no loss). During RT2, when condition P3 is satisfied, the transition to non-RT is triggered. The condition P3 is that a predetermined number (70) or more of game medals are acquired during RT2 and the bonus game ends (also referred to as "BB operation end").

Returning to FIG. 15, the replay operation control means 113 is in a state in which the player is allowed to play the next game without betting the game medals owned by the player when the replay combination is established ("replay"). It is configured to be set to "game operating state"). When the replay operating state is set, information (also referred to as a "replay operating state flag") indicating the replay operating state is set in a predetermined storage area of the RAM 63 (for example, the value "1" is stored). be done. The set replay operation state flag is cleared (for example, a value of "0" is stored) at a predetermined time until the replay operation state is canceled.

Bonus operation control means 114, from the time of winning the bonus combination (BB combination 1 or BB combination 2 in the case of this embodiment) (at the time of selection of type 1 BB-A condition device or type BB-B condition device), BB A predetermined process is executed during a period until the end of the bonus game which is executed when the winning combination 1 or the BB winning combination 2 is established. Specifically, when BB win 1 or BB win 2 is won, information indicating that BB win 1 or BB win 2 has been won in a predetermined storage area of RAM 63 (also referred to as a “type 1 BB win corresponding flag”) is stored. set (for example, store the value "1"). In addition, when BB win 1 or BB win 2 is established, information (also referred to as "type 1 BB operation flag") indicating a BB operation state is set in a predetermined storage area of RAM 63 (for example, a value "1" is stored).

The freeze control means 115 delays the execution of control processing related to the progress of the game (for example, processing for accepting a bet operation, a reel rotation start operation, a reel rotation stop operation, etc.) for a predetermined time when a predetermined condition is established. is configured to set In this embodiment, there are four types of freezes: win weight (freeze time 2 seconds), fake weight (freeze time 5 seconds), announcement weight (freeze time 2 seconds), end time wait (freeze time 5 seconds) It is ready to run.

The game mode control means 116 is configured to control the setting of eight game modes from game mode 0 to game mode 7, as shown in FIG. The game mode means a game state (also referred to as "main game state") mainly related to the setting state of AT, which is controlled by the main control means side separately from the RT state.

Game mode 0 is a normal (non-advantageous) game state. The game mode 0 is a mode to stay in a normal section different from the later-described advantageous section, and is a mode in which a lottery or the like related to the AT game (assist game) is not performed. In the game mode 0, when the condition Q1 is satisfied, the game mode is shifted to the game mode 1. When the condition Q2 is satisfied, the game mode is shifted to the game mode 2. When the condition Q3 is satisfied, the game mode is shifted to the game mode 1. When the game mode is shifted to the game mode 3 and the condition Q4 is satisfied, the game mode is shifted to the game mode 6. - 特許庁The contents of each transition condition (conditions Q1 to Q15) are shown in simplified form in FIG. 17, but more detailed contents are shown in the flow charts to be described later. In addition, the section type number is a number (takes a value of 0 or 1) that manages whether to stay in either the normal section or the advantageous section described later. Section type number = 0 is the normal section, the section type number =1 indicates staying in each advantageous section (see also FIG. 18). When staying in the game mode 0, the section type number = 0. Also, the AT win flag is a flag (takes a value of 0 or 1) that manages that the AT win has been won. Indicates that the AT has been won (see also FIG. 18).

The game mode 1 is mainly a game state called “chance” in which the player stays when the section type number=1 but the AT is not won. In the game mode 1, when the condition Q5 is satisfied, the game mode is shifted to the game mode 0, and when the condition Q8 is satisfied, the game mode is shifted to the game mode 3. Incidentally, the chance game number counter included in the condition Q5 is a number (takes a value of 0 to 30) for managing the number of games to be played in the game mode 1, and is set to 30 when the game mode 1 is entered. After that, 1 is subtracted every game (see also FIG. 18). In addition, the 1st class BB winning flag included in the conditions Q6 to Q8 is a flag (having a value of 0 or 1) for managing whether or not a BB win is made in the role lottery in the game. Flag = 0 indicates that BB has not been won in the game, and 1 type BB winning flag = 1 indicates that BB has been won in the game (see also FIG. 18).

The game mode 2 is mainly a game state called "after AT winning 1" in which the player stays when the section type number is 1 and the AT is won, but the BB is not won. In the game mode 2, when the condition Q9 is satisfied, the game mode is shifted to the game mode 3.

The game mode 3 is mainly an AT game state that is shifted to when the BB is won while the AT is won. During this game mode 3, push-navigation, which will be described later, is executed, so the game state is very advantageous for the player. In the game mode 3, when the condition Q11 is satisfied, the game mode is shifted to the game mode 0, and when the condition Q11 is satisfied, the game mode is shifted to the game mode 7. The bell number counter included in the conditions Q11 and Q12 is a counter (taking a value of 0 to 134) that manages the number of times push navigation (winning navigation) can be executed (also called "number of bells") in the AT. Yes, and prize navigation can be executed when the value of the bell number counter is 1 or more (see also FIG. 18). The seven number is a number for managing the AT type (red seven or gold seven). Seven number=1 indicates red seven, and seven number=2 indicates gold seven (see also FIG. 18). The seven counter is a counter that manages the stock number of red sevens (takes a value of 0 to 26), and the cumulative counter is a counter that manages the number of game medals won (difference number) in one advantageous section ( 0 to 2412), and the reach flag is a flag (taking a value of 0 or 1) for adjusting the number of game medals acquired (difference number) reaching the upper limit (see also FIG. 18). .

The game mode 6 is mainly a game state called "chance inside" in which the player stays inside the BB when the section type number is 1 and the AT is not won. In the game mode 6, the game mode is shifted to the game mode 1 when the condition Q10 is satisfied.

Game mode 7 is a game state called "inside after AT" in which the player stays when the reach flag is 0 after one AT is completed. In the game mode 7, when the condition Q10 is satisfied, the game mode is shifted to the game mode 4. - 特許庁

Game mode 4 is mainly a game state called “after AT” in which the player stays after BB is established in game mode 7 . In the game mode 4, when the condition Q7 is satisfied, the game mode is shifted to the game mode 5. When the condition Q8 is satisfied, the game mode is shifted to the game mode 3. When the condition Q13 is satisfied, the game mode is shifted to the game mode 5. When the game mode is shifted to the game mode 0 and the condition Q14 is satisfied, the game mode is shifted to the game mode 7.例文帳に追加Note that the AT cycle counter included in the conditions Q13 and Q14 is a counter (having a value of 0 to 3) that manages the stay cycle during AT.

Game mode 5 is mainly a game state called “after AT win 2” in which the player stays after AT win in game mode 4. In the game mode 5, when the condition Q9 is satisfied, the game mode is shifted to the game mode 3.

During the stay in one of the game modes 1 to 7, the game mode is shifted to the game mode 0 when the condition Q15 is satisfied. The advantageous section clear counter included in the condition Q15 is a counter (having a value of 0 to 1500) that manages the number of games in which the advantageous section is continuously stayed. , and is decremented by 1 each time the game is played in an advantageous section (see also FIG. 18). In addition, the net increase counter is a counter (takes a value of 0 to 2412) that manages the number of acquisitions (difference number of sheets) during the advantageous section, and is set to 0 when the normal section transitions to the advantageous section. It is updated according to the number (see also FIG. 18).

The eight game modes 0 to 7 described above are divided into a game mode (game mode 0) belonging to a normal section and a game mode (game modes 1 to 7) belonging to an advantageous section. The normal section is a period in which push navigation (winning navigation, RP navigation and eye push navigation) is not performed, and information that can determine the pushing order (information such as condition device number and instruction number) It is also a period during which no transmission is made to the side. In addition, the normal section is also a period during which a lottery (for example, a lottery for transition to an advantageous section) can be performed to determine whether or not a transition to an advantageous section is possible.

The advantageous section is a period during which push-navigation can be performed, and is also a period during which information for determining the pushing order can be transmitted from the main control means to the sub-control means. In addition, for advantageous sections, a lottery to change the performance of the advantageous section (for example, AT mode lottery) or a process to add the number of AT games in the advantageous section (for example, Seven Stock 1 lottery, Seven Stock 2 lottery), etc. It is also a period in which you can Furthermore, in the advantageous interval, an interval indicator (for example, a DP segment lamp other than the 7-segment lamp among the payout number display lamps 46j (also referred to as an "advantageous interval lamp") for informing the player that it is an advantageous interval ) lights up.While staying in the advantageous section, you may try to perform prize navigation at least once may be disabled).

Also, there is an upper limit (1500 games) for the period during which the player can stay in the advantageous section continuously. Furthermore, when the upper limit is reached and the advantageous interval ends, information related to the advantageous interval (for example, information such as the AT winning flag, the value of the seven stock number counter, etc.) is all cleared. When the upper limit is reached and the advantageous section ends, winning navigation need not be performed even once during the stay in the advantageous section. Also, if the lottery for deciding whether to move to the advantageous section or the lottery for changing the performance, etc. of the advantageous section is based on the result of the winning combination (conditional device), the result of the winning combination that does not have a set difference. In particular, the lottery for changing the performance of the advantageous section may be performed based on conditions other than the combination determination result. At that time, it may be performed without referring to the setting value.

In this embodiment, an advantageous zone clear counter is provided to keep track of the number of games in which players have continuously stayed in the advantageous zone. set. Each time the game is completed in the advantageous interval, the value of the advantageous interval clear counter is decremented by 1, and when the counter value becomes "0", the game is forcibly shifted to the normal interval. In addition, if the advantageous section clear counter value is shifted to the normal section before the value of the advantageous section clear counter becomes "0", the value of the advantageous section clear counter is cleared (set to "0"), and the normal section is changed to the advantageous section again. , the value of the advantageous section clear counter is reset to "1500".

It also has a net addition counter that counts the number of game medals won (difference number) in the advantageous section. This net increase counter sets the counter value to "0" at the start of the advantageous interval (or may be set to "0" at the end of the advantageous interval), and thereafter increases the counter value in accordance with the results of each game. Update. In updating, if the difference number is less than 0, the counter value is corrected to be "0", and if the difference number becomes a positive value, the counter value is accumulated and updated (do not perform such correction). can also be used). Then, when the accumulated difference number exceeds 2400, the advantageous section ends and shifts to the normal section. Note that the cumulative counter is functionally a counter that performs the same counting as the net addition counter. When confirming the number of acquired game medals (difference number) during the control process, there are times when the value of the accumulation counter is referred to and when the value of the net increase counter is confirmed depending on the contents of the process.

Further, a correction counter is provided as a counter for counting related to the number of game medals acquired (difference number) in the advantageous section. This correction counter is calculated by taking into account the value of the net increase counter (cumulative counter), the number of AT stock such as red seven and gold seven, and the value of the bell number counter, and can be obtained during one advantageous section. A counter (having a value of 0 to 2101) that counts the number of game medals expected to be obtained (also referred to as “expected number of wins” or “expected number of possible wins”). When the value of the correction counter (predicted number of acquisitions) exceeds a predetermined value (2100), the advantageous section may end at a predetermined timing and shift to the normal section.

With such a configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand when the advantageous section ends. For example, when the end time of the advantageous interval is determined only by the value of the advantageous interval clear counter or the value of the net increase counter, if those values are displayed to the player, the player can confirm the advantageous interval by confirming them. end time can be easily grasped. However, when a correction counter is provided, the advantageous section ends when the value of the correction counter reaches a predetermined value even though the values of the advantageous section clear counter and net increase counter have not reached the upper limit. things happen. Therefore, it becomes difficult to know the end time of the advantageous section, and the amusement of the game can be improved. Also, by setting the predetermined value (2100) in the correction counter to a value smaller than the upper limit value (2400) in the net increase counter, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the advantageous section ends during AT. For example, if the value of the correction counter (predicted number of acquisitions) exceeds a predetermined value (2100) during an AT, and the next AT can be executed after the end of that AT, the net increase counter will be the upper limit during the execution of the next AT. There is a high possibility that the value (2400) will be exceeded and the advantageous section will end. If the advantageous interval ends during AT, the player may be disappointed. It is possible to avoid such a situation from occurring.

In the game modes 0 to 7, various lotteries are performed. Since these lotteries are summarized in FIGS. 19 to 25, they will be briefly described here. The advantageous section transition lottery shown in FIG. 19(A) is a lottery to determine whether or not to transition to the advantageous section. Or choose one of the lost (0). The number of winning values corresponding to each condition device group A number is as shown.

The chance mode 1 lottery shown in FIG. 19(B) is a lottery that determines the chance mode number (a number that manages the likelihood of winning a lottery in the chance (game mode 1)), based on the condition device group H number. to select one of the chance mode numbers 0 to 4. The number of winning values corresponding to each condition device group H number is as illustrated.

Chance mode 2 lottery-1 shown in FIG. 19 (C) is a lottery to determine the chance mode number during BB operation in the chance (game mode 1), based on the condition device group D number, the chance mode number Pick one from 0 to 4 (actually 0 or 4). The number of winning values corresponding to each condition device group D number is as shown.

Chance mode 2 lottery-2 shown in FIG. 19 (D) is a lottery to determine the chance mode number during BB non-operation in the chance (game mode 1), based on the condition device group B number, the chance mode Pick one of the numbers 0-4 (actually 0 or 4). The number of winning values corresponding to each condition device group B number is as illustrated.

The chance mode 3 lottery shown in FIG. 19(E) is a lottery to newly determine the chance mode number at the end of the stay period during the chance (game mode 1). No lottery), one of the new chance mode numbers 0 to 4 (actually 0 or 4) is selected. The number of winning values corresponding to each chance mode number is as illustrated. It should be noted that chance mode number 4 indicates AT winning. Each of the chance mode lotteries shown in FIGS. 19B to 19E is also collectively referred to as an AT lottery.

In the chance game number lottery shown in FIG. 20(A), when one of the chance mode numbers 1 to 3 is selected in the chance mode 1 lottery (also referred to as "when chance mode wins"), a chance (game mode 1) Based on the selected chance mode numbers 1 to 3, one of the number of games 0, 10, 20, and 30 is selected. The number of winning values corresponding to each chance mode number is as illustrated.

The chance cycle lottery shown in FIG. 20B is a lottery that determines the number of cycles when the chance mode is won. to elect. The number of winning values corresponding to each chance mode number is as illustrated.

The EX1 mode lottery shown in FIG. 20(C) is a lottery to determine the add-on mode number after winning AT (the number that manages the stock add-on state during AT). ∼ 2 (actually 1 or 2). The number of winning values corresponding to each condition device group F number is as shown.

The EX2 mode lottery shown in FIG. 20(D) is a lottery that is performed during the stay in the game mode 2 or 5 in order to determine the mode number to be added after winning the AT as well as the EX1 mode lottery, and the condition device group F number selects one of the superimposed mode numbers 0 to 2 (actually 0 or 2). The number of winning values corresponding to each condition device group F number is as shown.

AT mode lottery-1 shown in FIG. 20 (E) is to determine the next AT mode number (number for managing the ease of winning in the lottery during AT) when AT is won. It is a lottery that is held during, and based on the condition device group J number, one of the AT mode numbers 0 to 5 is selected. The number of winning values corresponding to each condition device group J number is as illustrated.

AT mode lottery-2 shown in FIG. 20(F) is similar to AT mode lottery-1. A lottery is held during the stay in game modes 3-5, and based on the condition device group J number, one of the AT mode numbers 0-5 is selected. The number of winning values corresponding to each condition device group J number is as illustrated.

AT mode lottery-3 shown in FIG. 20 (G) is similar to AT mode lottery-1 and 2, in order to determine the next AT mode number (a number that manages the likelihood of winning in the lottery during AT) when AT wins. In particular, it is a lottery that is performed after all reels have stopped (also referred to as "after all stops"), and one of AT mode numbers 0 to 5 is selected based on the condition device group J number. The number of winning values corresponding to each condition device group J number is as illustrated.

The Seven 1 lottery shown in FIG. 21 (A) is a lottery that is performed especially during the stay in game mode 1 or 4 and after a complete stop in order to determine the type of AT (Red Seven or Gold Seven). Select one of the seven numbers 0 to 2 based on. The number of winning values corresponding to each condition device group F number is as shown.

Like the Seven 1 lottery, the Seven 2 lottery shown in FIG. Select one of seven numbers 0-2. The number of winning values corresponding to each condition device group F number is as shown.

The AT mode rewrite lottery shown in FIG. 21(C) is a lottery in which the AT mode number is rewritten after the AT ends. Pick one. The number of winning values corresponding to the value of each advantageous section clear counter is as shown.

The seven loop lottery shown in FIG. 21(D) is a lottery to determine whether or not to continue Red Seven. 0) is selected. The number of winning values corresponding to each loop number is as shown.

The gold seven loop lottery shown in FIG. 21(E) is a lottery to determine whether or not to continue the gold seven, and either winning (1) or losing (0) is selected. The number of winning values assigned to winning (1) and losing (0) is as shown.

The gold seven loop rewriting lottery shown in FIG. 21 (F) is a lottery for rewriting the continuation rate of gold seven, and based on the condition device group E number, either winning (1) or losing (0) is selected. do. The number of winning values corresponding to each condition device group E number is as shown.

The add-on mode lottery shown in FIG. 21(G) is a lottery for determining the add-on mode number during AT, and one of the add-on mode numbers 0 to 2 (actually 1 or 2) is selected. The number of winning values assigned to each add-on mode number is as shown.

The number-of-bells switching lottery shown in FIG. 22A is a lottery for rewriting the number of bells, and either winning (1) or losing (0) is selected based on the value of the number-of-bells counter. The number of winning values corresponding to the value of each bell number counter is as shown.

The seven stock 1 lottery shown in FIG. 22(B) is a lottery to determine whether or not to add the AT stock number, and based on the condition device group C number, either winning (1) or losing (0) elect. The number of winning values corresponding to each condition device group C number is as illustrated.

The Seven Stock 2 Lottery shown in FIG. (0) is selected. The number of winning values corresponding to each condition device group E number is as shown.

The effect lever weight lottery shown in FIG. 22 (D) is a lottery to determine whether or not to perform a fake weight as a freeze, and based on the condition device group J number, either winning (1) or losing (0) to elect. The number of winning values corresponding to each condition device group J number is as illustrated.

AT cycle lottery-1 shown in FIG. 23(A) is the number of staying cycles during AT (BB operation required from game mode 3 to game mode 3 via game modes 7 and 4) at the end of AT. In order to determine the number of times), it is a lottery that is performed when the AT mode number is 1 or 2, and based on the value of the bell number counter, the number of stay periods 0 to 3 (actually 1 to 3) to elect. The number of winning values corresponding to the value of each bell number counter is as shown.

The AT cycle lottery-2 shown in FIG. 23(B) is performed especially when the AT mode number is 3 or 4 in order to determine the number of staying cycles during the AT at the end of the AT, just like the AT cycle lottery-1. It is a lottery, and based on the value of the bell number counter, one of the number of stay periods 0 to 3 (actually 1 to 3) is selected. The number of winning values corresponding to the value of each bell number counter is as shown.

Pullback 1 lottery-1 shown in FIG. 23(C) is a lottery that is performed especially when the AT mode number is 1 to 3 in order to decide whether or not to win AT again after the AT is finished. Based on the C number, either winning (1) or losing (0) is selected. The number of winning values corresponding to each condition device group C number is as illustrated.

Pull-back 1 lottery-2 shown in FIG. 23(D) is the same as pull-back 1 lottery-1, after the end of AT, to decide whether or not to win AT again, lottery is performed especially when the AT mode number is 4. , and based on the condition device group C number, either winning (1) or losing (0) is selected. The number of winning values corresponding to each condition device group C number is as illustrated.

Pull-back 1 lottery-3 shown in FIG. It is a lottery that is held, and based on the condition device group C number, either winning (1) or losing (0) is selected. The number of winning values corresponding to each condition device group C number is as illustrated.

The pull-back 2 lottery shown in FIG. 24(B) is a lottery that determines whether or not to win AT again after the number of stay cycles during AT becomes 0. Based on the AT mode number, win (1) or Choose one of the losers (0). The number of winning values corresponding to each AT mode number is as shown.

The AT period preferential game number lottery shown in FIG. 24(C) is a lottery to determine the number of games to be set in a predetermined preferential state (also referred to as "preferential state game number") after the end of AT, based on the AT mode number. , one of the preferential game numbers 0, 10, 20, and 30 is selected. The number of winning values corresponding to each AT mode number is as shown.

The seven table 1 lottery shown in FIG. 25A is a lottery to determine the seven table number (the number that manages the table that determines the continuation rate in red seven). choose one of The number of winning values corresponding to each AT mode number is as shown.

The seven table 1 lottery shown in FIG. 25(B) is a lottery to determine the seven table number, similar to the seven table 1 lottery, and selects one of the seven table numbers 0 to 15 based on the condition device group G number. . The number of winning values corresponding to each condition device group G number is as illustrated.

The number-of-bells 1-lottery-1 shown in FIG. A number for managing ease), one of the number of bells 0 to 4, 6, 10, 11, and 20 is selected. The number of winning values corresponding to each CU rank number is as shown.

The number-of-bells 1-lottery-2 shown in FIG. 26(B) is a lottery for the first time that is performed especially when the game mode is 4 or 5 in order to determine the number of bells, like the number-of-bells 1-lottery-1. , one of the number of bells 0 to 4, 6, 10, 11, and 20 is selected based on the CU rank number. The number of winning values corresponding to each CU rank number is as shown.

The lottery for the number of bells 2 shown in FIG. 26C is a lottery for the second and subsequent bells to determine the number of bells. choose one of The number of winning values corresponding to each CU rank number is as shown.

The bell number 3 lottery shown in FIG. 26(D) is a lottery for the second and subsequent bells to determine the number of bells, similar to the bell number 2 lottery. choose one of The number of winning values assigned to each ring count is shown in the figure.

Returning to FIG. 15, the random number generation/capture means 117 is composed of the CPU 61, the clock pulse generator 64, the frequency divider 65, the random number generator 66, and the random number capture circuit 67, and generates random numbers used for various lotteries. generate and capture. In this embodiment, four (4ch: ch is an abbreviation for "channel") 16-bit random number means capable of generating a random number sequence in a numerical range up to "0 to 65535" and up to "0 to 255" It has four (4 ch) 8-bit random number means capable of generating a random number sequence with a numerical value range of up to and including each, and each of them can independently generate a random number sequence. The random numbers generated by these 16-bit random number means or 8-bit random number means are also called hardware random numbers (hard random numbers) because they are updated based on the clock signal generated by the clock pulse generator 64 . Although not shown, in this embodiment, a random number generation means other than the random number generation/acquisition means 118 is provided. This random number generation means is composed of the above-described CPU 61 and RAM 63, and has a random number means capable of generating a sequence of random numbers within a predetermined numerical range as random numbers used for determining a winning combination or the like. Since this random number is updated based on a program, it is also called a software random number (soft random number).

(Each Means Constituting Game Progress Management Means 130)
The received medal management means 131 controls the actually received game medals (which are guided to the receiving passage and detected by the inserted medal sensor 28b) among the game medals inserted from the medal slot 21 (also referred to as "inserted game medals"). It is configured to control whether the game medals (also referred to as “received game medals”) are directly bet game medals or credited game medals. In this embodiment, if the number of bets does not reach the maximum permissible number of bets (the number of bets required to execute a game (specified number "3")), the accepted game medals are directly betted. When the number of bets has reached the maximum permissible bet number and the number of credits has not reached the maximum permissible credit number (for example, "50"), the accepted game medals are the game medals to be credited. ing.

In addition, in the game set to the replay operation state, the received medal management means 131 performs automatic betting processing (the number of game medals equal to the number of bets in the previous game is automatically processed without reducing the number of game medals held by the player). bet status). Even in the replay operation state, if the number of credits does not reach the maximum allowable number of credits, the inserted game medals are accepted as game medals to be credited (or may not be accepted). When the number of bets reaches the maximum permissible bet number and the number of credits reaches the maximum permissible credit number, the inserted game medals are returned without being accepted.

Triggered by the operation of the start lever 25 (the operation of the start lever 25 being effectively accepted), the combination determining means 132 determines a plurality of combinations based on a preset combination determination probability (lottery set number). It is configured to perform a combination determination process (internal lottery) for selecting at least one combination determination result from the results (condition device). This winning combination determination process is performed using random numbers generated by the above-described 16-bit random number means. Specifically, when the start lever 25 is operated, the random number generated by the 16-bit random number means is captured. Then, when performing the winning combination determination process, the loaded random number is read, a predetermined soft random number is added to the read random number, and the random number after the addition is used to select the condition device. A condition device may be selected using a read random number without adding a predetermined soft random number.

The winning combination determination process is performed with reference to a predetermined winning combination determination table (not shown). The combination determination table is configured such that lottery set number data corresponding to each condition device is stored in a predetermined storage area (plurality of addresses) in the ROM 62 for each set value. When one or a plurality of conditional devices are selected in the combination determination process, the game combination corresponding to the selected conditional configuration becomes the establishment-permissible combination in the game. Information on the selected condition device (winning combination) is stored in a predetermined storage area of the RAM 63, but when the information on the winning item stored in one game is information on winning a small combination or a replay combination. is cleared (reset to "0") after the game is completed regardless of whether or not these small wins and replay wins are established. On the other hand, when the BB winning combination is not established even if the BB winning combination is won, the information is not cleared until the BB winning combination is established and is stored.

The effect group number determining means 133 is configured to perform a process of associating the effect group number with the condition device selected by the winning combination determination process. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 27, the bonus condition device is associated with the effect group A group number (0 or 1), and the prize replay condition device is associated with the effect group B group number (0 to 29) are associated. For example, as shown in FIG. 27A, the 1 type BB-A condition device and the 1 type BB-B condition device are commonly associated with the effect group A group number 1. In addition, as shown in FIG. 27(B), the difference in the order of pushing may result in an advantage or a disadvantage in the game (influence on the ball output), or cause a difference in the number of game medals paid out (number of winnings). A performance group B group number 13 is commonly associated with the prize-A1 to A12 condition devices, and a performance group B group number 14 is commonly associated with the prize-B1 to B12 condition devices.

On the other hand, the difference in the pushing order does not affect the advantage or disadvantage of the game (there is no effect on the ball output). Winning replay conditions corresponding to the winning of a small combination (winning combination) in which there is no difference in the number of game medals paid out (the number of acquisitions) or the number of game medals that can be acquired is small (for example, below the prescribed number of bets). As for the devices, different effect group B numbers are associated with individual conditional devices.

Returning to FIG. 15, the reel control means 134 confirms that the minimum playing time has passed, triggered by the operation of the start lever 25 (the operation of the start lever 25 is effectively accepted). , The reels 3a to 3c are started to rotate, and after all the reels that have started to rotate are in a constant speed rotation state, the stop switches 26a, 26b, and 26c are sequentially operated (each operation of the stop switches 26a to 26c is effective ), the rotation of the corresponding reels 3a to 3c is sequentially stopped.

The rotation stop control of each of the reels 3a to 3c is based on each stop table (not shown) that is set (set) according to the winning combination determination result selected in the winning combination determination process. order, operation timing, etc.). Each of the reels 3a to 3c is stopped within a predetermined allowable stop time (for example, 190 milliseconds) from the timing when the stop switches 26a, 26b, and 26c are operated (in this embodiment, within the maximum number of sliding frames of 5 frames).

That is, when a predetermined game combination is selected as an establishment-permissible combination as a result of the combination determination process, the symbol corresponding to the selected combination is stopped on the activated line 29 as long as possible within the allowable stop time. As shown, the reels 3a to 3c are controlled to stop so that the symbol corresponding to any game combination is not stopped and displayed on the activated line 29 in the case of a loss. In addition, if a replay role or a small role is won during the winning carryover of the special role, or if there is a case where the special role and the replay role or the small role are duplicated, the replay role, the special role, the small role Reel rotation stop control may be performed to give priority to a replay combination (a small combination may be given a higher priority than a special combination).

The stop display symbol determination means 135 determines which symbols are stopped and displayed by the reels 3a to 3c based on the timing at which the stop switches 26a to 26c are operated, and also determines which symbols are stopped and displayed on the activated line 29. It is configured to determine whether or not the game combination has been established based on the combination of symbols determined to be true (which may be different from the symbol combination actually stopped and displayed).

A payout medal management means 136 adds the number of game medals corresponding to the established minor winning combination to the credit amount when the credit amount does not reach the maximum allowed credit amount. Thus, when the number of credits has reached the maximum allowable number of credits, the hopper 50 is driven through the hopper drive circuit 52 to actually pay out the coins. In addition, the payout medal management means 136 transfers the number of game medals that have been bet or the number of game medals that have been credited to the hopper 50 when the settlement operation (pressing operation of the settlement switch 24) is effectively accepted. It is designed to be driven and refunded.

The blocker control means 137 outputs a blocker signal for controlling the above-described blocker 48 so as to switch the blocker 48 between an ON state (a state in which game medals can be accepted) and an OFF state (a state in which game medals cannot be accepted). is configured to When the blocker 48 is turned off, the game medals inserted into the medal slot 21 are led to the return path and returned. However, the insertion of game medals is detected by the inserted medal sensor 28a.

The display lamp control means 138 controls the various display lamps (MAX-BET display lamp 46a, BET lamp 46b, insertable display lamp 46c, game start display lamp 46d, replay display lamp 46e, status display lamp 46f, number of times The display lamp 46g, the CRE lamp 46h, and the payout number display lamp 46j) are controlled through the display lamp control circuit 47 for lighting and extinguishing. When the number-of-payouts display lamp 46j is to function as a main-side push-order annunciator, the number-of-payments display lamp 46j is controlled by the push-order management means 139. FIG.

The pressing order management means 139 selects an instruction number (one of 0 to 6) corresponding to the pressing order to be notified according to the result of the winning combination determination (condition device) selected by the winning combination determination process. The instruction number 0 is selected when the pressing order is not reported, and the instruction numbers 1 to 6 are selected when the pressing order is desired to be reported. In this embodiment, the instruction number 1 is "left center right", the instruction number 2 is "left right center", the instruction number 3 is "center left and right", the instruction number 4 is "center right left", and the instruction number 5 is "right left center". , instruction number 6 are associated with the pressing order of "right, middle, left".

Further, the pressing order management means 139 is configured to perform push navigation (main side push navigation) by causing the payout number display lamp 46j to function as a main side pushing order annunciator and notifying the selected instruction number. there is This push navigation notifies the navigation number using two 7-segment lamps (hereinafter sometimes abbreviated as "7-segment") provided in the payout number display lamp 46j. For example, "=" is displayed in the left 7 segments, and the numerical value of the instruction number (for example, "2" for the instruction number 2) is displayed in the right 7 segments. The "=" displayed in the left 7 segment is for distinguishing from the display of the number of payouts on the number-of-payouts display lamp 46j. When the navigation number 0 is selected, the number of payout display lamps 46j are not displayed. Alternatively, "0" may be displayed in both the left 7-segment and the right 7-segment, or "0" may be displayed in only one of the left and right 7-segments.

The condition device group number determination means 140 selects a condition device group number used for selecting a winning value in various lotteries according to the effect group A group number and the effect group B group number determined by the effect group number determination means 133. is configured to determine Specifically, the condition device group number is divided into 10 types from the condition device group A number to the condition device group J number, and for each combination of the effect group A group number and the effect group B group number, the condition Each number value from the equipment group A number to the conditional equipment group J number is associated in advance. A specific correspondence is as shown in FIG. For example, for the combination of effect group A group number 1 and effect group B group number 0, conditional device group A number 1, conditional device group B number 2, conditional device group C number 2, conditional device group D number 0, conditional device Group E number 0, conditional device group F number 1, conditional device group G number 0, conditional device group H number 1, conditional device group I number 0, and conditional device group J number 1 are associated with each other. Incidentally, in the remarks column in the table of FIG. 28, abbreviations representing the content of each combination of the effect group A group number and the effect group B group number are described.

(Means Constituting Main Communication Control Means 150)
The control command transmission means 151 is configured to transmit control commands including various information regarding games at predetermined timings. For example, as the control command to be transmitted before the start lever 25 is operated, a control command including information indicating which game mode is set (also referred to as "game mode command"), which RT state is set There is a control command (also called "RT command") containing information indicating whether or not the player is playing, and a control command (also called "operating state command") containing information indicating the operating state of the replay. In addition, the control command transmitted when the start lever 25 is operated includes, for example, a control command including instruction number information (also referred to as an "instruction number command"), an effect group number (effect group A number and effect There is a control command (also referred to as "effect group number command") including information on group B number). In addition, a control command including information on set values, a control command including information on the value of various counters such as a bell counter, a control command including information for instructing the content of effects to be executed by the sub control means, and a bonus game described later , may be transmitted before the start lever 25 is operated, triggered by the start lever 25 being operated, or triggered by other triggers.

In addition, the control command transmitting means 151 is triggered by the fact that the minimum playing time has passed, and the control command (" (also referred to as a full reel rotation start command). Furthermore, when the first stop operation (operation of the stop switch for stopping the first reel) is accepted, a control command containing information indicating that the first stop operation has been accepted ("first stop acceptance command"), and when the first reel stop (reel stop corresponding to the first stop operation) is triggered, a control command including information on the first reel stop (also called "first stop command") is transmitted. ). Similarly, when the second stop operation (operation of the stop switch for stopping the second reel) is accepted, a control command containing information indicating that the second stop operation has been accepted ("second stop (Also referred to as "receiving command") is transmitted, and when the second reel stop (stop of the reel corresponding to the second stop operation) is triggered, a control command including information on the second reel stop ("second stop command" ). Similarly, when the third stop operation (operation of the stop switch for stopping the third reel) is accepted, a control command containing information indicating that the third stop operation has been accepted ("third stop acceptance command"), and with the third reel stop (reel stop corresponding to the third stop operation) as a trigger, a control command containing information on the third reel stop (also referred to as a "third stop command") ). Furthermore, before determining the stop symbol, a control command including information on stopping all reels (also referred to as "all stop command"), after determining the stop symbol, a control command including information on the number of payouts of game medals ("payout number command). Further, at a predetermined timing after all reels are stopped, a control command (also referred to as a "combination result command") including information on the combination determination result (bonus condition device and winning replay condition device) is transmitted. Communication between the main control means 100 and the sub-control means 200 (sub-main control means 200A) is possible only in one direction from the former to the latter.

The outer end signal transmission means 152 is configured to transmit an outer end signal to an external device such as a data counter or hall computer when a predetermined game state is reached. In this embodiment, when staying in the game mode 3 of the advantageous section, when winning-A1 to A12 condition device or winning-B1 to B12 condition device is selected, 15 game medals are paid out twice. An outer end signal is output when a situation occurs (continuously). Such a situation can occur both while inside the BB and when not inside the BB (while not inside the BB). If an outer end signal is output only when such a situation occurs inside the BB, it will be possible to determine that the outer end signal is inside the BB. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the outer end signal is output when the above-described situation occurs whether the BB is inside or not. Therefore, even if the outer end signal is output, it is difficult to reliably determine whether the BB is inside or not. However, the possibility of paying out 15 game medals while not inside the BB is considerably lower than during the inside of the BB. Therefore, if the outer-end signal is output, it is highly probable that it was output inside the BB. Therefore, even if the player confirms the number of times the outer end signal is output using an external device or the like, and judges that the number of times is the number of times that the player has moved to the inside of the BB, the judgment is greatly deviated from the actual situation. (Reliability can be ensured when the outer end signal is regarded as a signal indicating that the BB is inside).

The sub-control means 200 mainly controls a sub-main control means (also referred to as a "first sub-control means") 200A that mainly manages (instructs) lamp effects, image effects and sound effects, and mainly controls image effects and sound effects. (executing) sub-control means (also referred to as "second sub-control means") 200B.

200 A of sub-main control means are provided with the performance management means 210 and the sub-main communication control means 230, if divided roughly. Effect management means 210 includes game effect management means 211, notification effect management means 212, and lamp effect control means 213. Sub-main communication control means 230 includes control command reception means 231, effect command transmission means 232, and status command A receiving means 233 is provided. The above-described means in the sub-main control means 200A are implemented by sub-main CPU 71, ROM 72, RAM 73, hardware such as electronic circuits, etc. arranged on the sub-main control board 70A shown in FIG. It functionally represents what is configured by software such as.

(Each Means Constituting Production Management Means 210)
The game effect management means 211 mainly controls the execution timing of the image and sound effects (also referred to as “game effects”) executed by the sub-sub control means 200B, mainly for the purpose of improving the interest and playability of the game. It is configured to manage based on control commands from means 100 . Game effects include, for example, a continuous effect, a single effect, an assist effect, and the like.

A continuous effect is a continuous effect over a plurality of game periods. For example, an effect image or the like that symbolizes staying in a predetermined game mode (for example, game mode 5) is displayed. It should be noted that when performing a continuous effect or a single effect described below, effects are performed using the effect lamps 12, 13a, 13b, 14a, 14b and decorative lamps 32a, 32b, or speakers 15a, 15b, 44a, 44b are used. It is also possible to perform a combination of performances.

A one-shot effect is an effect that is executed sporadically, for example, when a specific situation occurs in the process of progressing a game. For example, when each reel is rotated, an effect may be given in which an image that suggests the degree of expectation for winning a game combination is displayed by the image display device 11 . In addition, when the number of AT games (the number of bells) is added in the main control means 100, the value of the number of AT games added (for example, characters such as "+10") is displayed on the display screen 11a of the image display device 11. The production shown above is also an example of the one-shot production.

The assist effect is a effect for assisting the player, and in this embodiment, the push navigation effect is mainly performed according to the navigation number information transmitted by the navigation number command from the main control means 100 . This push-navigation effect (sub-side push-navigation) utilizes the image display device 11 as a sub-side push-order indicator to show the player the push order (correct push order) corresponding to the navigation number on the display screen 11a. It is a one-shot production displayed in In this embodiment, the RP navigation effect (sub-side RP navigation) corresponding to the above-mentioned RP navigation, the prize-winning navigation effect (sub-side prize-winning navigation) corresponding to the prize-winning navigation, and the sight-pressing navigation effect ( It is designed to execute sub-side push navigation).

As a specific aspect of the push navigation effect (RP navigation effect, winning navigation effect) that informs the pressing order, a mode of displaying a number indicating the corresponding pressing order (for example, in the case of the pressing order of "left first", "1" is displayed in the lower left part of the display screen 11a, and in the case of the pressing order of "middle left and right", the numbers indicating the pressing order are arranged in the order of "2, 1, 3" from the left side in the lower part of the display screen 11a. notification mode) can be mentioned as an example. When the first to third push orders are displayed, when the player operates the first stop switch according to the displayed first push order, the display of the first push order is erased, and the displayed second push order is displayed. When the player operates the second stop switch according to the pressing order, the display of the second pressing order is erased, and when the player operates the third stop switch according to the displayed third pressing order, the third pressing order is displayed. The display may be turned off.

Further, when the player operates the stop switch in an order different from the displayed order of pushing, the push navigation effect may be terminated immediately. Furthermore, when displaying the pressing order, the sounds "Naka", "Hidari", and "Migi" are output from the speakers 15a, 15b, etc. in association with the next operation. may Further, the effect lamp 13a may correspond to "left", the effect lamp 12 to "middle", and the effect lamp 13b to "right", and may be caused to emit light or blink in association with the operation to be performed next. Also, a display for performing sub-side push navigation may be provided. For example, under the display window W, a display device configured by arranging three 7-segment lamps horizontally is provided. 3”, “2”, and “1” are displayed, respectively.

The notification effect management means 212 is mainly for the purpose of notifying the player of information about the game, and mainly controls the execution timing of the image and sound effects (hereinafter referred to as "notification effect") executed by the sub-sub control means 200B. It is configured to be managed based on control commands from the control means 100 . Examples of notification effects include an error notification effect that notifies the occurrence of an error with text information such as "Error Occurred", and an image that is being prepared when the power is restored, such as "Preparing Image". The production etc. which notify with character information are mentioned. In addition, in order to prevent the player from being excessively immersed in the game (addiction), an effect of displaying an image containing character information (also referred to as a "caution image") to call the player's attention is also notified. An example of performance.

The lamp effect control means 213 is configured to control various lighting effects using the effect lamps 12, 13a, 13b, 14a, 14b, decorative lamps 32a, 32b, and back lamps 38a to 38d. In addition, it is configured to perform a suggestive effect, which will be described later.

(Each Means Constituting Sub-Main Communication Control Means 230)
The control command receiving means 231 is configured to receive control commands from the main control means 100 and store them in a predetermined storage area such as the RAM 73 (for example, a command buffer for received control commands).

The effect command transmission means 232 is configured to transmit effect commands including various information regarding effects (for example, effect commands including image information, etc.) to the sub-sub control means 200B based on the control command from the main control means 100. ing.

The state command receiving means 233 receives a state command from the sub-sub control means 200B (for example, a state command including information that an effect command reception error has occurred), and stores a predetermined storage area such as the RAM 73 (for example, the received command buffer for status commands).

In contrast to the sub-main control means 200A configured as described above, the sub-sub-control means 200B is provided with an effect execution control means 250 and a sub-sub-communication control means 270 when roughly classified. Effect execution control means 250 includes game effect execution control means 251 and notification effect execution control means 252 , and sub-sub communication control means 270 includes effect command reception means 271 and state command transmission means 272 . The above-described means in the sub-sub control means 200B are sub-sub CPU 75, ROM 76, RAM 77, hardware such as electronic circuits arranged on sub-sub control board 70B shown in FIG. 2, and software such as control programs stored in ROM 76. It functionally expresses what is configured by hardware.

(Each means constituting production execution control means 250)
The game effect execution control means 251 is configured to control the image display device 11, the speakers 15a and 15b, etc. based on the effect commands from the sub-main control means 200A, and execute the game effects described above.

The notification effect execution control means 252 is configured to control the image display device 11, the speakers 15a and 15b, etc. based on the effect command from the sub-main control means 200A, and execute the above-described notification effect.

(Each Means Constituting Sub-Sub Communication Control Means 270)
The effect command receiving means 271 is configured to receive effect commands from the sub-main control means 200A and store them in a predetermined storage area such as the RAM 77 (for example, a command buffer for received effect commands).

The state command transmission means 272 is configured to transmit the above-mentioned state command to the sub-main control means 200A.

Transmission of the control command from the control command transmission means 151, transmission of the effect command from the effect command transmission means 232, and transmission of the state command from the state command transmission means 272 are all performed by a serial communication method (parallel communication method). communication method may be used). Each of the transmission means 151, 232, and 272 has the same configuration, and includes a command buffer (also referred to as "CB") as a storage area for temporarily storing commands to be transmitted, writing and reading of commands to be transmitted. and a command transmission unit for transmitting commands by serial communication.

The CB has a plurality of storage areas distinguished by respective addresses, and is configured to be able to store 1-byte command data in each storage area. The command processing unit generates command data to be transmitted, writes it to the address area indicated by the write pointer of the CB, reads the previously written command data from the address area indicated by the read pointer of the CB, and transfers it to the command. It is configured to write to the TDR (transmission data register) of the transmitter. The command transmission unit is configured to move the command data written in the TDR to a TSR (transmission shift register), convert it to serial there, and transmit it.

When the parallel communication method is used, previously written command data is read from the address area indicated by the read pointer of the CB, and the command data is sent to a predetermined output port (output port for sending to the sub-control means). configured to send by writing to One command in this embodiment is normally composed of 2 bytes (a checksum is composed of 1 byte). The communication method is asynchronous (asynchronous), and has a 1-bit stop bit and a 1-bit parity bit (even parity) (the communication method and command structure can be changed as appropriate).

<Designs displayed in the design display area>
As shown in FIG. 29(A), in the design display area DA1 (see also FIG. 1), three display designs, ie, a display design GK1, a display design GK2 and a display design GK3 are displayed. The display design GK1 is a design in which three patterns of "blue bar", "blue bar", and "red seven" are arranged horizontally in this order from the left side on the background part BK1. The design GK2 is a design in which three patterns of "black bar", "black bar", and "red seven" are arranged horizontally in this order from the left side on the background part BK2. The display design GK3 is a design in which three patterns of "."

The display design GK1 is a design that allows the player to understand that it represents the corresponding design of BB win 1, ``blue bar, blue bar, and red seven''. It is a design that the player can understand that it represents "bar, black bar, red seven". On the other hand, the display design GK3 is a design that reminds the player of a pattern combination in which "Red Seven" is positioned on the right side, for example, a combination of "Red Seven, Red Seven, Red Seven". The background portion BK3 of the display design GK3 is colored in the same color (red) as or similar to the color of the design "Red Seven". Further, the background portion BK1 of the display design GK1 may be colored in the same or similar color (blue) as the color of the “blue bar” design, and the background portion BK2 of the display design GK2 may be colored in the “black bar” design. It may be colored the same or similar to the color (black). Instead of the symbol "red seven" in the display symbol GK3, a symbol not provided on the reels, for example, a symbol such as "☆" may be displayed.

As shown in FIG. 29(B), in the pattern display area DA2 (see also FIG. 1), three "red seven" patterns are displayed side by side. The player is made aware of the pattern combination of "Red Seven, Red Seven". In addition, the pattern combination of "Red Seven, Red Seven, Red Seven" is a corresponding pattern of the small winning combination 40 that is established only in RT2 (during BB operation), and in RT1 (inside BB), a predetermined Displayed as a lost pattern if the symbol "Red Seven" is drawn in depending on the pressing order and pressing position when the combination determination result (eg, winning-A1 to A12 condition device or winning-B1 to B12 condition device) is selected. It is a symbol combination that may be done.

〈Suggestion performance〉
A plurality of illumination lamps (also referred to as “design illumination lamps”), not shown, are arranged at predetermined positions on the back side of the design display area DA1 shown in FIG. By blinking, the display designs GK1 to GK3 can be illuminated from the back side to make them stand out. The lighting and extinguishing of the pattern lighting lamp is controlled by the sub-control means.

In this embodiment, a suggestive effect (suggestive notification) is performed using a design illumination lamp. The suggesting effect is a effect suggesting a combination of symbols that the player can aim at by eye pressing, and as shown in FIG. Suggestion pattern 1 is a suggestion performance in which two display designs GK1 and GK2 out of three display designs GK1 to GK3 are illuminated from the back side by design illumination lamps to make them conspicuous. Suggestive pattern 2 is a suggestive effect in which only the display design GK3 among the three display designs GK1 to GK3 is illuminated from the back side by the design illumination lamp to make it stand out. Suggestive pattern 3 is a suggestive effect in which only the display design GK1 among the three display designs GK1 to GK3 is illuminated from the back side by the design illumination lamp to make it stand out. Suggestive pattern 4 is a suggestive effect in which only the display design GK2 among the three display designs GK1 to GK3 is illuminated from the back side by the design illumination lamp to make it stand out. Note that in FIG. 30, a pattern whose frame is indicated by a one-dot chain line indicates that the pattern is illuminated from the rear side.

The suggesting effect of the suggesting pattern 2 is basically performed when BB is won while AT is being won. Specifically, when the start lever is operated, the sub control means controls the information (command) of the AT win flag = 1 and the information (command) of the effect group A number 1 (indicating that BB win 1 or BB win 2 has been won). Triggered by the reception from the means, the suggestive effect of the suggestive pattern 2 is performed. By performing the suggestive production of suggestive pattern 2, the pattern combination "Red Seven, Red Seven, Red Seven" is pressed in the order of "right first" (in the display design GK3, the pattern "Red Seven" is arranged on the right side. (because of the distance), the player can be urged to aim. By this suggestive effect, the player aims at the symbol combination "red seven, red seven, red seven", the corresponding symbol of BB role 1 "blue bar, blue bar, red seven" and the corresponding symbol of BB role 2 "black bar".・The black bar/red seven" will not be aligned, and as a result, it is possible to shift to AT (game mode 3) while the BB is inside. Since the AT inside the BB is in a very advantageous game state for the player, the suggestive effect of the suggestive pattern 2 is also an effect that leads the player to an advantageous game state. It should be noted that when the suggestive effect of the suggestive pattern 2 is performed, a voice such as "Aim for the red seven" may be output.

The suggesting effect of the suggesting pattern 1 is basically performed when the BB is won in a state where the AT is not won. Specifically, when the start lever is operated, the sub control means controls the information (command) of the AT win flag = 0 and the information (command) of the effect group A number 1 (indicating that BB win 1 or BB win 2 has been won). Triggered by the reception from the means, the suggestive effect of the suggestive pattern 1 is performed. The suggestive effect of the suggestive pattern 1 is BB role 1 whose corresponding symbol is the symbol combination "blue bar/blue bar/red seven" and BB role 2 whose corresponding symbol is the symbol combination "black bar/black bar/red seven". It is a production that does not know which one has been elected, although it is known that one of them has been elected. Therefore, by performing the suggestive effect of the suggestive pattern 1, the player is made to think which of the BB role 1 and the BB role 2 has been won, and aim at the corresponding pattern of the person who thinks it is the player. Since it is possible to provide amusement, the amusement of the game can be improved. Further, when the suggestive effect of the suggestive pattern 1 is performed, even a player who is good at eye-pushing will be shifted into the inside of the BB without being able to achieve the BB role with a probability of about half. will be Therefore, the suggestive effect of the suggestive pattern 1 also has a function for adjusting the payout rate in the case where the payout rate is different between inside the BB and during the BB operation.

The suggestive effect of the suggestive pattern 3 and the suggestive effect of the suggestive pattern 4 are basically set at a predetermined timing (for example, the start of the spinning of the next game) after all the reels stop in the game in which the suggestive effect of the suggestive pattern 1 is performed. time). Specifically, when the sub-control means receives the information of the bonus condition device number 1 (1 win in BB hand) from the main control means after all the reels are stopped, the suggestion pattern 3 is performed and the bonus is performed. When the sub-control means receives the information of the condition device number 2 (2 wins of BB combination) from the main control means, the suggestion pattern 4 suggestion effect is performed. The suggestive effects of the suggestive patterns 3 and 4 are effects that show which of the BB role 1 and the BB role 2 has been won. Therefore, by performing the suggestive effects of the suggestive patterns 3 and 4, the player can aim at the symbol corresponding to the winning BB combination by eye pressing. It should be noted that the image display device 11 may be used to display the suggestive effect and the design (design combination) as described above.

<Pachislot production>
In this embodiment, a red seven-reel effect is performed as the reel effect performed during freezing. The red seven reel performance is a reel performance in which three symbols "red seven" are arranged in the display window W and stopped and displayed. At the time of winning, the suggestive effect of the suggestive pattern 2 was performed, but at the timing of the player's eye pressing, the symbol combination of ``red seven, red seven, red seven'' can be stopped and displayed in the display window W. done if it fails. In addition, even when the AT enters, if the symbols corresponding to BB role 1 "blue bar, blue bar, red seven" and symbols corresponding to BB role 2 "black bar, black bar, red seven" are stopped and displayed , Red seven reel production is not performed. By performing such a red seven reel effect, even if the symbols "red seven" cannot be aligned by eye pressing, the symbols "red seven" can be aligned and displayed. Therefore, the symbol combination of "red seven, red seven, red seven" can impress the player as a symbol combination that triggers the shift to the game mode 3 in the state inside the BB and the AT game is started. can. Note that the red seven reel effect is also executed when the next AT is continuously performed after one AT is finished, due to the availability of the AT stock.

In addition to the red seven reel production, gold seven reel production and gold seven promotion reel production are also performed. The gold seven reel performance is a reel performance in which three symbols "gold seven" are displayed in a display window W, and the gold seven promotion reel performance is a display window W in which three symbols "red seven" are displayed. After stopping and displaying the symbols inside the display window W, the drum is rotated again to align the three patterns "golden seven" within the display window W and stop and display them.

<Display ratio of red seven matching>
In this embodiment, as an opportunity for the symbol combination of "red seven, red seven, red seven" to be stopped and displayed in the display window W, while BB is not operating (during non-RT or during RT1), BB role 1 or BB There are times when the winning combination 2 is won and times when the reel performance is performed, and there are times when the small winning combination 40 is won during the BB operation. When the BB is in operation and the BB is not in operation, the ratio of displaying the symbol combination "red seven/red seven/red seven" is higher in the case of the BB not in operation than in the case of the BB in operation. In addition, comparing the time when BB role 1 or BB role 2 is won and the time when the pachislot production is performed, the pattern combination of "red seven, red seven, red seven" is more when the pachislot production is performed. The percentage displayed is higher.

The symbol combination of "red seven, red seven, red seven" displayed in the symbol display area DA2 (also referred to as "red seven alignment") is displayed in the display window W while the BB is not in operation, and when the BB When displayed in the display window W during operation, its function is different. That is, the matching red sevens displayed while the BB is not in operation has a function of notifying the start of the AT game, and the matching red sevens displayed while the BB is in operation indicates that a small combination 40 (one piece combination) has been established. It has a notification function. In this embodiment, since the ratio of displaying the red sevens is higher when the BB is not in operation than when the BB is in operation, the red sevens are used as an opportunity to start the AT game (shift to an advantageous state). It is possible to make a strong impression on the player as a combination of symbols. In addition, when the BB win 1 or BB win 2 is won, the percentage of cases in which the player succeeds in pushing and the red sevens are displayed is higher than the ratio of the case where the player fails to push and the red sevens are displayed by the reel effect. Since the ratio of cases where the can proceed smoothly.

<Ending production>
In this embodiment, when the number of staying games during the advantageous interval exceeds 1500, or when the values of the net increase counter and the correction counter exceed their respective upper limit values, the advantageous interval ends. If the advantageous section ends without warning, the player may become discouraged and lose motivation to play. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the image display device 11 is used to produce an effect (also referred to as an "ending effect") for suggesting to the player the end time of the advantageous section. Such an ending effect is also performed in conventional gaming machines, but the purpose of the conventional game machines is to inform the player that the advantageous section is approaching, and the game performance is low. I was poor. Therefore, in the ending effect of the present embodiment, the content of the effect is configured to change in a plurality of ways according to the progress of the game during the advantageous section, and the player is given a privilege according to the way of change. . Therefore, it is possible to make the player interested in how the ending effect will change, and to improve the amusement of the game. A specific example of the ending effect will be described below with reference to FIGS. 31 and 32. FIG.

The ending effect 1 shown in FIG. 31(A) is such that the content of the effect changes according to the number of games in the advantageous zone (the number of games played after shifting to the advantageous zone). This is a suggested setting value. In this ending effect 1, the image GZ1 is displayed on the image display screen 11a during the period in which the number of games in the advantageous section is 0-250. The image GZ1 may be a still image or a moving image (the same applies to the other images GZ2 to GZ10). The content of the display is not particularly limited, but for example, it may indicate that an advantageous section has started, or display the expected value of the number of game medals to be obtained. Next, in a period in which the number of games in the advantageous section is 251 to 500, the image GZ1 is switched to the image GZ2 or the image GZ5 at a predetermined timing (for example, triggered by the winning of a predetermined game combination). The display contents of the image GZ2 and the image GZ5 are different from each other.

Also, during the period in which the number of games in the advantageous section is 251 to 500, the image is switched at a predetermined timing. In this example, when the image GZ2 is displayed, the image GZ2 is switched to the image GZ3 or the image GZ6, and when the image GZ5 is displayed, the image GZ5 is switched to the image GZ6 or the image GZ8. The images GZ3, GZ6, and GZ8 have different display contents. Furthermore, during the period of 1001 to 1500 advantageous section games, the image is switched at a predetermined timing. In this example, when the image GZ3 is displayed, the image GZ3 is switched to the image GZ4 or the image GZ7, and when the image GZ6 is displayed, the image GZ6 is switched to the image GZ7 or the image GZ9. Further, when the image GZ8 is being displayed, the image GZ8 is switched to the image GZ9 or the image GZ10.

The content suggested to the player differs depending on which one of the images GZ4, GZ7, GZ9, and GZ10 is displayed. That is, the image GZ4 indicates that the setting value of the slot machine 1 may be setting 6 (setting 6 is suggested), and the image GZ7 indicates that setting 3 or setting 6 may be set. (Settings 3 and 6 suggested). On the other hand, GZ9 and GZ10 do not suggest set values. How the images are switched is determined at a predetermined timing (for example, at the transition to the advantageous section) by lottery for ending effect 1 shown in FIG. 33(A). In this lottery, one image transition is selected from among eight image switching flows (also referred to as “image transition”), and the selection probability depends on the set value of the slot machine 1. set to change. For example, the probability of selecting an image transition of GZ1→GZ2→GZ3→GZ4 is 0 for setting 1, 10/256 for setting 3, and 32/256 for setting 6.

The ending effect 2 shown in FIG. 31(B) is such that the content of the effect changes according to the value of the correction counter, and the flow of image switching and benefits are as shown. Also, the image transition in the ending effect 2 is determined by the ending effect 2 lottery shown in FIG. 33(B). The image GZ4 in this ending effect 2 indicates that setting 6 is certain (setting 6 is confirmed), and the image GZ4 in ending effects 1 and 3 (suggesting setting 6) is easier for the player. It is highly reliable.

The ending effect 3 shown in FIG. 32(A) is such that the content of the effect changes according to the number of wins (difference number) in the advantageous section, and the flow of image switching and benefits are as shown in the figure. . Also, the image transition in the ending effect 2 is determined by the lottery for the ending effect 3 shown in FIG. 33(C).

The ending effect 4 shown in FIG. 32(B) is such that the content of the effect changes according to the given point value in the advantageous section, and the flow of image switching and benefits are as shown. Also, the image transition in the ending effect 2 is determined by the lottery for the ending effect 4 shown in FIG. 33(D). The image GZ4 in the ending effect 4 has a content indicating that the setting 6 is certain (setting 6 confirmed), and is more reliable for the player than the images GZ4 in the ending effects 1 and 3. It has become. It should be noted that the given point value refers to some kind of prize different from game medals, which is given to the player during the game (may be limited to during the bonus game or AT game) according to the result of the role lottery, etc. It means the number of benefits (for example, wallpaper data, etc.) provided. Also, the advantageous section may be terminated when the given point value exceeds an upper limit value (for example, 10000).

In the ending effects 1 to 4, images are switched based on a certain variable (the number of games in the advantageous section or the correction counter value) that changes in the advantageous section. and the correction counter value, the correction counter value and the assigned point value). When switching images based on multiple variables, the image switching may be performed based on the variable that reaches the image switching timing first, or one of the variables may be prioritized for image switching. You may For example, when the images are switched based on the two variables of the number of winnings and the value of the awarded points, the number of winnings, which is highly relevant to the number of balls rolled out, may be prioritized in switching the images. Also, the content of the privilege to be given to the player according to the result of the ending effect is not limited to the suggestion of the set value, and can be changed as appropriate.

[Main control processing]
Of the control processes performed by the main control means 100 of the slot machine 1, the setting change process, game progress control process and timer interrupt process will be described below with additional reference to FIGS. 34 to 62. FIG. Variables such as counters and flags used in the following description are briefly described in the variable list in FIG.

<Setting change processing>
First, with reference to FIG. 34(A), the basic flow of the setting change device processing will be described. The setting change device process is executed when the setting is changed, and saves "0" in all RWMs (addresses for storing information about advantageous sections in the RAM 63) that affect the performance of the instruction function. (Step K1).

<Game Progress Control Processing>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 34B to 61, the basic flow of game progress control processing will be described. The game progress control process is a process that is repeatedly executed during the game, and as shown in FIG. 34(B), the game start standby process is first performed (step S1). In this game start waiting process, as shown in FIG. 34(C), it is determined whether or not the wait number for all stop is 0 (step S11). Here, if the total stop wait number is not 0, the system waits for the standby time corresponding to the total stop wait number (step S12), proceeds to step S13, and if the total stop wait number is 0, The process proceeds to step S13 as it is. Then, in step S13, 0 is stored in the wait number for all stoppages, the game start standby process is terminated, and the process returns.

After the end of the game start waiting process, the process proceeds to step S2 in FIG. 34(B). Here, the system waits in that state until the operation of the start lever 25 is accepted, and when the operation is accepted, internal lottery start processing is performed (step S3). In this internal lottery start process, as shown in FIG. 35A, an internal lottery is performed (step S21). In this internal lottery, a bonus condition device number and a winning replay condition device number are determined. After executing the internal lottery, proceed to the group number setting process.

In the group number setting process, as shown in FIG. 35(B), a value corresponding to the bonus condition device number (see FIG. 27(A)) is stored in the effect group A number (step S31), and the effect group B number is stored. A value (see FIG. 27(B)) corresponding to the winning replay condition device number is stored in (step S32). Next, a value corresponding to the effect group A number and the effect group B number (see FIG. 28, hereinafter the same) is stored in the condition device group A number (step S33), and the effect group A number and effect are stored in the condition device group D number. A value corresponding to the group B number is stored (step S34), and a value corresponding to the effect group A number and the effect group B number is stored in the condition device group G number (step S35).

Similarly, a value corresponding to the effect group A number and the effect group B number is stored in the condition device group B number (step S36), and a value corresponding to the effect group A number and effect group B number is stored in the condition device group C number. Store (step S37), and store a value corresponding to the effect group A number and the effect group B number in the condition device group E number (step S38). Further, the values corresponding to the effect group A number and the effect group B number are stored in the condition device group I number (step S39), and the values corresponding to the effect group A number and effect group B number are stored in the condition device group F number. (step S40), and the value corresponding to the effect group A number and the effect group B number is stored in the condition device group H number (step S41). Then, a value corresponding to the effect group A number and the effect group B number is stored in the conditional device group J number (step S42), and the process proceeds to section type number management lever processing.

In the section type number management lever process, as shown in FIG. 36, first, it is determined whether or not the section type number is 0 (normal section) (step S51). Here, if the section type number is 0, the process proceeds to step S52 to determine whether or not the BB has not been operated. Here, if the BB is not in operation, it is determined whether or not it is inside the BB (step S53). It is determined whether or not the A number is 1 (step S54), and if the condition device group A number is 1, the process proceeds to step S51. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S52 that the BB is in operation, and if the conditional device group A number is not 1 in the determination of step S54, the process does not proceed to step S51, but proceeds to the waiting effect process described later.

In step S51, advantageous section transition processing is performed. In this advantageous section transition process, as shown in FIG. 38A, it is determined whether or not the condition device group A number is 0 (step S71), and if it is 0, the advantageous section transition process is terminated. to return. On the other hand, if the condition device group A number is not 0, an advantageous section lottery is performed (step S72), and the lottery result is stored in the section type number (step S73). Next, it is determined whether or not the section type number is 0 (step S74), and if it is 0, the advantageous section transition processing is terminated and the process returns. On the other hand, if the section type number is not 0, the chance mode 1 lottery is performed (step S75), and the lottery result is stored in the chance mode number (step S76). Further, seven table 1 lottery is performed (step S77), and the lottery result is stored in the seven table number (step S78).

Next, it is determined whether or not the chance mode number is 4 (step S79). Here, if the chance mode number is not 4, the process advances to step S83 to perform a lottery process for the number of chance games. In this chance game number lottery process, as shown in FIG. 38B, the chance game number lottery is performed (step S91), the lottery result is stored in the chance game number counter (step S92), and the process returns. Upon return from the chance game number lottery process, the process proceeds to step S84 in FIG. Then, the lottery result is stored in the chance cycle counter, the advantageous interval transition processing is terminated, and the process returns.

On the other hand, if the chance mode number is 4 in the determination at step S79, the process proceeds to step S80 to perform the process at the time of AT winning. In this AT winning process, as shown in FIG. 39, first, 1 is stored in the AT winning flag (step S101). Next, an AT mode lottery is performed and the result of the lottery is stored in the AT mode number (step S102). Then, seven number correction processing is performed (step S104).

In this seven number correction process, as shown in FIG. 40(A), first, a correction counter process is performed (step S121). In this correction counter process, as shown in FIG. 40(B), the correction counter data (counter for summing the value of the gold seven counter and the value of the seven counter) is set to 0 (step S131), and the seven number is 2. It is determined whether or not there is (step S132). Here, if the seven number is 2, the value of the gold seven counter is set in the correction counter data (step S133), and 1 is added to the correction counter data (step S134), and the process proceeds to step S135. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S132 that the seven number is not 2, the process proceeds directly to step S135. In this step S135, the value of the seven counter is added to the correction counter data, and the process proceeds to step S136. In step S136, a value calculated based on each value of the cumulative counter, the corrected counter data, and the number-of-bells counter is stored in the corrected counter data, and the process returns from the corrected counter process.

Upon returning from the correction counter process, the process advances to step S122 in FIG. 40A to determine whether the value of the correction counter is 1901 or more. Here, if the value of the correction counter is 1901 or more, 1 is stored in the seven number (step S123), the seven number correction processing is terminated and the process returns, and if the value of the correction counter is not 1901 or more, Return as is. In the arrival flag process, which will be described later, the process procedure is branched depending on whether the value of the correction counter is 2101 or more. On the other hand, in this process, it is determined whether or not 1 is stored in the seven number depending on whether the value of the correction counter is 1901 or more. ) are different. By storing 1 in the seven number, it is possible to play at least one more AT game next time. It is set to be less than 2101. Thus, by changing the determination value according to the situation, the number of game medals that can be obtained in the future can be managed without counting excessively more than necessary.

Upon returning from the seven number correction process, the process proceeds to step S105 in FIG. 39 to determine whether the seven number is 1 or not. Here, if the seven number is not 1, after storing 3 in the gold seven counter (step S106), the process proceeds to step S107, and if the seven number is 1, the process proceeds directly to step S107. In this step S107, an arrival flag process is performed.

In this arrival flag process, as shown in FIG. 40(C), first, a correction counter process is performed (step S141). After completion of the correction counter process, it is determined whether or not the correction counter is equal to or greater than 2101 (step S142). If it is equal to or greater than 2101, 1 is saved in the arrival flag (step S143), and the arrival flag process is terminated. to return. On the other hand, if the correction counter is not equal to or greater than 2101, it is determined whether or not the main game state number is 3 (step S144). from (step S145) and return.

After returning from the arrival flag process, the process proceeds to step S108 in FIG. Here, if the conditional device group A number is 1, the processing at the time of AT winning is terminated as it is, and the process returns. On the other hand, if the conditional device group A number is not 1, the EX mode 1 lottery is performed (step S109), the lottery result is stored in the EX mode number (step S110), and then the AT win process is terminated. return.

Upon returning from the AT winning process, the process proceeds to step S81 in FIG. Here, if the condition device group A number is not 1, the transition to the advantageous section is terminated as it is and the process returns, and if the condition device group A number is 1, AT rush lever processing is performed (step S82).

As shown in FIG. 41, in this AT plunge lever process, first, a loop CU rank set process is performed (step S151). In the loop CU rank set process, as shown in FIG. 42A, 1 is added to the seven set counter (step S171), and the seven table number and the value corresponding to the seven set counter are stored in the loop number (step S172). , stores the value corresponding to the seven table number and the seven set counter in the CU rank number (step S173), and returns.

Upon return from the loop CU rank set process, the process advances to step S152 in FIG. 41 to determine whether the seven number is 1 or not. Here, if the seven number is 1, the process advances to step S154 to perform a seven loop lottery process. In the seven-loop lottery process, as shown in FIG. 42B, seven-loop lottery is performed (step S181), the lottery result is stored in the seven counter (step S182), and the process returns. Upon return from the seven-loop lottery process, the process proceeds to step S155 in FIG. 41, where the reach flag process is executed and the process proceeds to step S156. On the other hand, if the value of the seven counter is not 0 as determined in step S153, the process proceeds directly to step S156. If the number seven is not 1 in the determination at step S152, the value of the gold seven counter is decremented by one (step S158), and the gold seven loop lottery correction process is performed (step S159).

In this gold seven-loop lottery correction process, as shown in FIG. 42(C), it is determined whether or not the arrival flag is 0. If not 0, the gold seven-loop lottery correction process is terminated and the process returns. . On the other hand, if the arrival flag is 0, a correction counter process is performed (step S192), and after that, it is determined whether or not the value of the correction counter is smaller than 1900 (step S193). Here, if the value of the correction counter is 1900 or more, the gold seven-loop lottery correction process is terminated and the process returns. On the other hand, when the value of the correction counter is smaller than 1900, a gold seven loop lottery is performed (step S194), and it is determined whether or not the result is 0 (step S195). Here, if the result of the money seven-loop lottery is 0, the money seven-loop lottery correcting process is terminated and the process returns. On the other hand, if the result of the money seven loop lottery is not 0, store 3 in the money seven counter (step S196), execute the reach flag process (step S197), and return.

Upon return from the gold seven-loop lottery correction process, the process proceeds to step S156 in FIG. 41, where the extra mode lottery is performed and the result is stored in the extra mode number (step S157). Next, a correction counter process is performed (step S160), and after that, a lottery for the number of bells is performed (step S161), and the result is stored in the bell number counter (step S162). Next, a bell number counter correction process is performed (step S163).

In this bell count counter correction processing, as shown in FIG. The value of the number of times the bell is allowed to reach the value) is stored (step S201). Next, it is determined whether or not the arrival flag is 0 (step S202). If not 0, the process proceeds to step S203. (step S206), and if smaller, the process proceeds to step S203. In step S203, 7 is stored in the number-of-bells counter, and after storing, the number-of-bells-counter correction process is terminated and the process returns. After returning from the bell number counter correction process, the process proceeds to step S164 in FIG. 41, where the reach flag process is executed, the lever process at the time of AT entry is completed, and the process returns. Upon returning from the AT entry lever process, the advantageous section transition process in FIG. 38 is also completed and returned, and the process proceeds to step S56 in FIG. 36, where the lever time wait process is executed.

In this lever-time wait process, as shown in FIG. 44, first, it is determined whether or not the condition device group A number is 1 (step S211). Here, if the conditional device group A number is 1, it is determined whether or not the AT winning flag is 0 (step S212), and if the AT winning flag is 0, 2 is stored in the lever weight number. (step S213), and if it is not 0, 1 is stored in the lever weight number (step S214). After saving, the lever-time wait process is terminated and the process returns. On the other hand, if the conditional device group A number is not 1 in the determination of step S211, the process proceeds to step S215 to determine whether the main game state number is smaller than 2 or not. Here, if the main game state number is smaller than 2, the process proceeds to step S217, and if the main game state number is 2 or more, it is determined whether or not the main game state number is 4 (step S230). If it is 4, the process proceeds to step S217. On the other hand, if the main game state number is not 4, the wait process at the lever is terminated and the game returns.

In step S217, it is determined whether or not the AT win flag is 0, and if it is 0, the lever-time wait process is terminated and the process returns. On the other hand, when the AT win flag is not 0, the effect lever weight lottery is performed (step S2189). Then, it is determined whether or not the result is 0 (step S219), and if the result is 0, the lever-time wait process is terminated and the process returns. On the other hand, if the result of the effect lever weight lottery is not 0, the process proceeds to step S213, stores 2 as the lever weight number, and after storing, terminates the weight processing for the lever and returns. By returning from the wait process at the time of the lever, it returns to the section type number management lever process of FIG.

On the other hand, if the section type number is not 0 in the determination of step S51 in FIG. step S58). Here, if the condition device group A number is 1, 1 is stored in the 1st class BB winning flag (step S59), and if not 1, 0 is stored in the 1st class BB winning flag (step S60). ). After saving, it is determined whether or not the winning replay condition device number is any one of 13 to 36 (step S61). Here, if the winning re-gaming condition device number is any one of 13 to 36, after saving the value corresponding to the winning re-gaming condition device number of the instruction number (step S62), go to step S63 of FIG. If the winning regame condition device number is not one of 13 to 36, the process proceeds directly to step S63.

In step S63, the main game state number is discriminated. According to the main game state number, if the main game state number is 1, the main game state number 1 lever processing is performed (step S64), and if the main game state number is 2, If so, main game state numbers 2 and 5 lever processing is performed (step S65). Further, when the main game state number is 3, the main game state number 3 lever processing is performed (step S66), and when the main game state number is 4, the main game state number 4 lever processing is performed (step S67), and the main game is performed. If the state number is 5, main game state numbers 2 and 5 lever processing is performed (step S68). After execution of each lever process, the process proceeds to step S56 in FIG. On the other hand, if the main game state number is any other number, no particular processing is performed, and the process proceeds to step S56.

In the main game state number 1 lever processing, as shown in FIG. 45A, chance mode 2 lottery is performed (step S241), and then chance mode number determination processing is performed (step S2421). In this chance mode number determination process, as shown in FIG. 45B, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the chance mode 2 lottery or the chance mode 3 lottery is 0 (step S251). Here, if the lottery result is 0, the chance mode number determination process is terminated as it is, and the process returns. If the lottery result is not 0, the lottery result is stored in the chance mode number (step S252), and the process returns. do.

Upon return from the chance mode number determination process, the process proceeds to step S243 in FIG. 45A to determine whether the chance mode number is 4 or not. Here, if the chance mode number is not 4, the process proceeds to step S247 to determine whether or not the 1st type BB winning flag is 0, and if it is 0, the main game state number 1 lever processing is terminated. If it is not 0, the chance game number lottery process is performed, and after that, the main game state number 1 lever process is terminated and the process returns. On the other hand, if the chance mode number is 4 as a result of the determination in step S242, the process proceeds to step S244 to perform the AT hit process. After that, it is determined whether or not the 1 type BB winning flag is 0 (step S245). Lever processing is performed when AT enters, and then returns.

In the main game state numbers 2 and 5 lever processing, as shown in FIG. 45(C), first, lever processing is performed after winning AT (step S261). In this AT winning lever process, as shown in FIG. 46, first, it is determined whether or not the reach flag is 0 (step S271). Here, if the arrival flag is not 0, the lever processing after AT winning is finished and returns as it is, and if the arrival flag is 0, the process proceeds to step S272, and it is determined whether the EX mode number is 1. do. Here, when the EX mode number is 1, an EX mode 2 lottery is performed (step S273), and it is determined whether or not the lottery result is 2 (step S274). Here, if the lottery result is 2, 2 is saved as the EX mode number (step S275), and the process proceeds to step S276. On the other hand, if the EX mode number is not 1 in the determination of step S272, the process proceeds directly from there to step S276, and if the result of the EX mode 2 lottery is not 2 in the determination of step S274, the process proceeds directly to step S276. proceed to

In step S276, it is determined whether or not the seven table number is smaller than thirteen. Here, if the seven table number is smaller than 13, it is determined whether or not the lottery completed flag is 0 (step S277). is determined (step S278), and if the condition device group G number is not 0, the process proceeds to step S279. In step S279, seven table 2 lottery is performed, and it is determined whether or not the lottery result is 0 (step S280). Here, if the result of the seven table 2 lottery is 0, the process proceeds directly to step S282, and if the result of the 7 table 2 lottery is not 0, the lottery result is stored in the seven table number (step S281), The process proceeds to step S282. In step S282, 1 is stored in the lottery completion flag, and the process proceeds to step S283. On the other hand, if the seven table number is 13 or more in the determination of step S276, if the lottery completed flag is not 0 in the determination of step S277, or if the condition device group G number is 0 in the determination of step S278, Each proceeds to step S283 from there.

In step S283, it is determined whether or not the seven number is one. Here, if the Seven number is 1, a Seven 2 lottery is performed (step S284), and it is determined whether or not the lottery result is 2 (step S285). Here, if the result of the Seven 2 lottery is 2, the lottery result is stored in the Seven number (step S286), and the seven number correction process is performed (Step S287). After executing the seven number correction process, it is determined whether or not the seven number is 2 (step S288). If it is 2, 3 is stored in the gold seven counter (step S289), and the process proceeds to step S290. On the other hand, if the seven number is not 1 in the determination of step S283, if the result of the seven 2 lottery is not 2 in the determination of step S285, or if the seven number is not 2 in the determination of step S289, then The process proceeds to step S291. In step S291, one lottery for seven stock is performed, and after adding the lottery result to the seven counter, the process proceeds to step S290. In this step S290, an arrival flag process is performed, and after that, the lever process after winning the AT is finished, and the process returns.

Upon returning from the lever process after winning AT, the process proceeds to step S262 in FIG. Here, if the 1 type BB win flag is 0, the main game state number 2, 5 lever processing is finished and returns, and if it is not 0, the AT entry lever processing is performed, and then the game state number End the 2, 5 lever processing and return.

In the main game state number 3 lever processing, as shown in FIG. 47(A), first, it is determined whether or not the instruction number is 0 (step S301). Here, if the instruction number is not 0, the value of the bell counter is decremented by 1 (step S302), and the process proceeds to step S303. If the instruction number is 0, the process proceeds directly to step S303. In step S303, it is determined whether the arrival flag is 0 or not. Here, if the reach flag is not 0, the main game state number 3 lever processing is finished and the process returns. Add to the seven counter (step S306). Next, an arrival flag process is performed (step S306), and it is determined whether or not the arrival flag is 0 (step S307). Here, if the arrival flag is not 0, the main game state number 3 lever processing is terminated as it is and returns, and if the arrival flag is 0, whether the value of the gold seven counter is 1 or 2 is checked. Determine (step S308). Here, when the value of the money seven counter is not 1 or 2, the main game state number 3 lever processing is terminated and returned, and when the value of the money seven counter is 1 or 2, the money seven loop rewrite lottery is performed. Proceed to correction processing.

In the gold seven-loop rewrite lottery correction process, as shown in FIG. 47B, first, a correction counter process is performed (step S311), and then it is determined whether or not the value of the correction counter is smaller than 1900 (step S312). ). Here, if the value of the correction counter is 1900 or more, the gold seven-loop rewrite lottery correction process is terminated as it is and returns. ), and it is determined whether or not the lottery result is 0 (step S314). Here, if the result of the money seven loop rewrite lottery is 0, the money seven loop rewrite lottery correction process is terminated as it is and returns, and if it is not 0, 3 is saved in the money seven counter (step S316). Then, an arrival flag process is performed (step S316), after which the money seven loop rewrite lottery correction process is terminated and the process returns. At the return from the gold seven loop rewrite lottery correction process, the main game state number 3 lever process of FIG. 47(A) is also completed and returned.

In the main game state number 4 lever processing, as shown in FIG. 48(A), one pull-back lottery is performed, and it is determined whether or not the lottery result is 0 (step S321). Here, if the result of the pullback 1 lottery is not 0, the AT winning process is performed (step S323), and then it is determined whether or not the 1 type BB winning flag is 0 (step S324). Here, if the 1st type BB winning flag is 0, the main game state No. 4 lever processing is terminated and returned, and if the 1st type BB winning flag is not 0, lever processing is performed at the time of entering AT. After that (step S325), the main game state number 4 lever processing is terminated and the process returns. On the other hand, if the result of the pullback 1 lottery is 0 in the determination in step S322, the process proceeds to step S326 to determine whether the 1 type BB winning flag is 0 or not. Here, if the 1st kind BB winning flag is 0, the main game state number 4 lever processing is terminated and returned, and if the 1st kind BB winning relevant flag is not 0, AT period preferential game number lottery processing proceed to In this AT period preferential game number lottery process, as shown in FIG. 48B, the AT period preferential game number lottery is performed (step S331), and the lottery result is stored in the AT period preferential game number counter (step S332). , terminates the AT period preferential game number lottery process and returns. Upon return from this AT period preferential game number lottery process, the main game state number 4 lever process in FIG. 48A is also terminated and returned.

Next, the standby effect processing performed after the section type number management lever processing of FIG. 49 will be described. In this standby effect process, as shown in FIG. 49, first, it is determined whether or not the section type number is 0 (step S341). Here, if the section type number is not 0, it is determined whether or not the main game state number is 3 (step S342). (step S344). Here, if the value of the seven set counter is 1, it is determined whether or not the seven table number is smaller than 15 (step S344). If smaller than 15, the process proceeds to step S345. proceed to In step S347, it is determined whether the winning replay condition device number is one of 1 to 12 or 37 to 39, and if it is determined that it is not one of them, the process proceeds to step S345. If so, the standby effect process is terminated and the process returns. On the other hand, if the section type number is 0 as determined in step S341, and if the main game state number is not 3 as determined in step S342, the process proceeds directly to step S345.

In step S345, it is determined whether or not the lever weight number is zero. Here, if the lever weight number is 0, the process proceeds to step S345, and if the lever weight number is not 0, waits for the time corresponding to the lever weight number, saves 0 as the lever weight number, and then ( Step S349) and proceeds to step S346. In step S346, it is determined whether or not the standby effect number is zero. Here, if the standby effect number is 0, the standby effect process is terminated and the game returns. On the other hand, when the standby effect number is not 0, the standby effect is executed (step S349), the standby effect process is terminated, and the process returns.

By returning from the end of the waiting effect process, the section type number management lever process of FIG. 36 is also ended, thereby ending the internal lottery start process of FIG. 35(A), and proceeding to step S4 of FIG. 35(B). In step S4, it is continuously determined whether or not all the spinning drums have stopped, and if all spinning drums have stopped, game medals are paid out (only when a winning combination is established) (step S5), Furthermore, according to the number of game medals to be paid out, count management is carried out, such as updating the number displayed on a display (not shown) that displays the number of game medals won during AT (step S6). Thereafter, a section type number management game ending process is performed (step S8).

In this section type number management game ending process, as shown in FIG. 50, first, it is determined whether or not the section type number is 0 (step S361). Here, if the section type number is 0, the section type number management game end processing is terminated as it is, and the process returns. On the other hand, if the section type number is not 0, 1 is stored in the lever full stop flag (step S362), and the cumulative counter process is performed (step S363). In the cumulative counter process, as shown in FIG. 51, it is determined whether or not the replay operation symbol (symbol corresponding to the replay combination) is displayed (step S381). Exit and return. On the other hand, when the replay operation symbol is not displayed, the number of payout game medals (including 0) is added to the value of the accumulation counter (step S382), and the value of the accumulation counter is subtracted by 3. (Step S383), the accumulative counter process is terminated and the process returns.

Upon return from the cumulative counter process, the process proceeds to step S364 in FIG. 50 to discriminate the main game state number. Then, according to the main game state number, if the main game state number is 0, main game state number 0 full stop processing is performed (step S365), and if the main game state number is 1, main game state number 1 full stop processing is performed. Processing is performed (step S366), and when the main game state number is 2, main game state numbers 2 and 5 complete stop processing is performed (step S367). Further, when the main game state number is 3, main game state number 3 full stop processing is performed (step S368), and when the main game state number is 4, main game state number 4 full stop processing is performed (step S369), When the main game state number is 5, main game state numbers 2 and 5 are completely stopped (step S370). Further, when the main game state number is 6, main game state number 6 full stop processing is performed (step S371), and when the main game state number is 7, main game state number 7 full stop processing is performed (step S372).

In the main game state number 0 total stop processing, as shown in FIG. 52, first, it is determined whether or not the AT winning flag is 0 (step S391). Here, if the AT winning flag is 0, it is determined whether or not the condition device group A number is 1 (step S392), and if the condition device group A number is 1, BB is not established. It is determined whether or not (step S392). Then, if BB is not established, 6 is saved as the main game state number (step S394), the main game state number 0 total stop processing is terminated, and the process returns. On the other hand, if the condition device group A number is not 1 in the determination of step S392, and if BB is established in the determination of step S393, 0 is saved as the main game state number (step S396), and the main game state number 0 is stored. End all stop processing and return. Also, if the AT win flag is not 0 in the determination of step S391, the process proceeds to step S396, where it is determined whether or not the condition device group A number is 1. Here, if the condition device group A number is not 1, 2 is saved as the main game state number (step S398), the main game state number 0 full stop processing is terminated, and the process returns. On the other hand, if the conditional device group A number is 1, the process proceeds to step S397, and AT rushing game end processing is performed.

In this AT entry game end processing, as shown in FIG. 53, 0 is stored in the chance mode number (step S401), 0 is stored in the chance game number counter (step S402), and 0 is stored in the chance cycle counter. (step S403). After that, 0 is saved in the EX mode number (step S404), 0 is saved in the AT cycle counter (step S405), and 0 is saved in the lottery completed flag (step S406). Furthermore, 3 is saved as the main game state number (step S407), and the advantageous section lamp is turned on (step S408).

Next, as shown in FIG. 54, it is determined whether or not three symbols "red seven" are displayed side by side on the upper line in the display window W (step S409). The process proceeds to S410, and if the stop display is not performed, the process proceeds to step S412. In step S412, it is determined whether or not three symbols "red seven" are displayed side by side on the effective line 29 in the display window W. If so, the process proceeds to step S413. In step S413, it is determined whether or not three symbols "red seven" are lined up and stopped on the lower line in the display window W. If stopped, the process advances to step S410. goes to step S414. In step S414, it is determined whether or not three symbols "red seven" are displayed side by side on the lower right line in the display window W. If so, the process proceeds to step S415. In step S415, it is determined whether or not three symbols "red seven" are displayed side by side on the upper right line in the display window W. If so, the process proceeds to step S416.

When proceeding to the above step S410 (when three symbols "red seven" are lined up and displayed stop in the display window W), 1 is saved as the wait number at full stop, and 0 is saved as the standby effect number. (step S411), and proceeds to step S418 in FIG. On the other hand, if the process proceeds to step S416 (if three symbols "red seven" are not displayed side by side in the display window W), 0 is saved as the wait number for the full stop, and the standby effect number stores 1 in (step S417), and proceeds to step S418 in FIG. In this step S418, it is determined whether the seven number is 2 or not. Here, if the seven number is not 2, the game end processing at the time of AT rushing is terminated as it is and returns, and if the seven number is 2, after adding 2 to the standby effect number (step S419), AT End the game end processing at the time of rushing and return. At the return from the AT rush game end process, the main game state number 0 total stop process of FIG. 52 is also ended and returns.

In the main game state number 1 total stop processing, as shown in FIG. 55A, the chance game number counter is decremented by 1 (step S431), and the game is a BB operation end game (a game in which the operation of the BB game ends). (step S432). Here, if it is not a BB activation end game, the process proceeds directly to step S435, and if it is a BB activation end game, 0 is saved in the chance game number counter (step S433), and 1 is subtracted from the chance cycle counter (step S433). S434), and proceeds to step S435. In step S435, it is determined whether or not the AT winning flag is 0. Here, if the AT winning flag is 0, it is determined whether or not the value of the chance game number counter is 0 (step S436). It is determined whether or not the value of the counter is 0 (step S437). Here, when the value of the chance cycle counter is 0, a chance mode 3 lottery is performed (step S438), and further a chance mode number determination process is performed (step S439).

Next, it is determined whether or not the chance mode number is 4 (step S441). Here, if the chance mode number is not 4, 1 is stored in the advantageous interval counter (step S441), the main game state number 1 total stop processing is terminated, and the process returns. On the other hand, if the chance mode number is 4, the AT winning process is performed (step S445), 2 is saved as the main game state number (step S448), and the main game state number 1 total stop processing is performed. Exit and return. On the other hand, if the value of the chance game number counter is not 0 in the determination of step S436, and if the value of the chance cycle counter is not 0 in the determination of step S437, the process proceeds to step S442, and the 1st class BB winning flag is set to 0. It is determined whether or not. Here, if the 1 type BB winning flag is 0, the main game state number 1 total stop processing is terminated and the process returns. On the other hand, if the 1st kind BB win flag is not 0, it is determined whether or not the 1st kind BB operation pattern is hidden (step S443). After saving 6 in the game state number (step S444), if the type 1 BB operation pattern is not hidden, the main game state number 1 full stop processing is terminated and the process returns.

If the AT winning flag is not 0 in the determination in step S435, the process proceeds to step S446 to determine whether the 1 type BB winning flag is 0 or not. Here, when the 1 type BB winning flag is 0, 2 is stored in the main game state number (step S448), the main game state number 1 full stop processing is terminated, and the process returns. On the other hand, if the 1 type BB winning flag is not 0, the game end processing at the time of AT entry is performed (step S447), and then the main game state number 1 total stop processing is terminated and the process returns.

In the main game state numbers 2 and 5 full stop processing, as shown in FIG. If it is 0, it is left as it is, and if the flag is not 0, the game end processing at the time of AT entry is performed (step S422), the main game state numbers 2 and 5 stop processing is completed, and the process returns. .

In the main game state number 3 full stop processing, as shown in FIG. 46, first, it is determined whether or not the value of the bell number counter is 0 (step S451). Here, if the value of the bell number counter is not 0, the main game state number 3 full stop processing is terminated as it is, and the process returns. 1 or not. Here, if the seven number is 1, the process proceeds to step S452 to determine whether the value of the seven counter is 0 or not. is smaller than 2001. Here, if the value of the cumulative counter is smaller than 2001, it is determined whether or not the value of the reach flag is 0 (step S455). S456). Next, it is determined whether or not the lottery result is 0 (step S457), and if the lottery result is 0, the process proceeds directly to step S459, and if the lottery result is not 0, the lottery result is stored in the AT mode number. (step S458), the process proceeds to step S459.

At step S459, an AT period lottery is performed, and the result of the lottery is stored in the AT period counter (step S460). Further, seven table 1 lottery is performed (step S462), and the lottery result is stored in the seven table number (step S463). Next, an AT cycle preferential game number lottery process is performed (step S464), after which 0 is saved in the AT win flag (step S465), 0 is saved in the seven number (step S466), and 0 is saved in the seven counter. (step S467). Next, 0 is stored in the gold seven counter (step S468), 0 is stored in the seven set counter (step S469), and 0 is stored in the loop number (step S470). Subsequently, 0 is saved as the CU rank number (step S471), 0 is saved as the reach flag (step S472), and 0 is saved as the add mode number (step S473). Furthermore, 0 is stored in the number-of-bells counter (step S474), and 0 is stored in the total acquisition counter (step S475). Then, 7 is saved as the main game state number (step S476), and 2 is saved as the total stop wait number (step S477).

On the other hand, if the seven number is not 1 in the judgment of step S452, and if the seven counter is not 0 in the judgment of step S453, the process proceeds to step S481 in FIG. judge. Here, if the value of the seven-set counter is not 7, the process proceeds to step S484. is stored (step S483), and the process proceeds to step S484. In step S484, a loop CU rank set process is performed, and then it is determined whether or not the seven number is 1 (step S485). Here, if the seven number is not 1, it is determined whether or not the value of the gold seven counter is 0 (step S487), 1 is stored in the seven number (step S488), and the process proceeds to step S489. On the other hand, if the seven number is 1, 1 is subtracted from the value of the seven counter (step S488), and the process proceeds to step S489.

In step S489, it is determined whether or not the value of the seven counter is 0. If the value of the seven counter is 0, it is determined whether or not the arrival flag is 0 (step S490). Here, if the arrival flag is 0, seven-loop lottery processing (step S491) and arrival flag processing (step S492) are performed, and then the process proceeds to step S493. On the other hand, if the value of the seven counter is not 0 in the determination of step S489, and if the arrival flag is not 0 in the determination of step S490, the process proceeds to step S493. Also, if the value of the gold seven counter is not 0 in the determination of step S487, the process proceeds to step S495 to determine whether or not the value of the gold seven counter is three. Here, when the value of the gold seven counter is not 3, the process proceeds directly to step S497, and when the value of the gold seven counter is 3, after saving 3 as the standby effect number (step S496), the process proceeds to step S497. In step S497, 1 is subtracted from the value of the money seven counter, and money seven loop lottery processing is executed (step S498), after which the process proceeds to step S493.

In step S493, the additional mode lottery is performed, and the result of the lottery is stored in the additional mode number (step S494). Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S501 in FIG. 56 to perform correction counter processing. Next, a number-of-bells switching lottery is performed (step S502), and it is determined whether or not the lottery result is 0 (step S503). Here, if the result of the number-of-bells switching lottery is 0, a number-of-bells-2 lottery is performed (step S504), the result of the lottery is stored in the number-of-bells counter (step S505), and the process proceeds to step S508. If the result of the switching lottery is not 0, a 3-bell lottery is performed (step S506), the lottery result is stored in the bell counter (step S507), and the process proceeds to step S508.

In step S508, a bell number counter correction process is performed, and then an arrival flag process is performed (step S509). Next, 3 is saved as the lever weight number (step S510), and it is determined whether or not the standby effect number is 0 (step S511). Here, when the standby effect number is 0, 1 is saved as the standby effect number (step S512), and the process proceeds to step S477 in FIG. On the other hand, if the standby effect number is not 0, the process proceeds to step S477. Then, 2 is saved as the wait number for total stoppage, the main game state number 3 total stop processing is terminated, and the process returns.

In the main game state number 4 total stop processing, as shown in FIG. 59, the value of the number of AT period preferential treatment games count is subtracted by 1 (step S521), and it is determined whether or not the game is a BB operation end game ( step S522). Here, when the game is not a BB operation end game, the process proceeds to step S525 as it is, and when the game is a BB operation end game, 0 is stored in the AT cycle preferential game number counter (step S523), and further AT cycle After subtracting 1 from the counter value (step S524), the process proceeds to step S525. In step S525, it is determined whether or not the AT winning flag is 0. Here, if the AT winning flag is 0, it is determined whether or not the value of the AT cycle counter is 0 (step S526). step S527). Then, it is determined whether or not the result of the lottery is 0 (step S528), and when the result of the lottery is 0, 1 is stored in the advantageous zone clear counter (step S529), and the main game state number 4 complete stop processing is performed. Exit and return.

On the other hand, if the value of the AT cycle counter is not 0 in the determination of step S526, the process proceeds to step S534 to determine whether or not the 1 type BB win flag is 0. Here, when the 1 type BB winning flag is 0, the main game state No. 4 total stop processing is terminated and the process returns. On the other hand, when the 1-type BB winning flag is not 0, the process proceeds to step S535 to determine whether or not BB is not established. Then, when BB is not established, the main game state number 4 full stop processing is finished as it is and returns, and when BB is established, after saving 7 as the main game state number (step S536), 4 End the all-stop processing and return.

If the AT winning flag is not 0 in the determination in step S525, the process proceeds to step S531 to determine whether or not the 1 type BB winning flag is 0. Here, when the 1 type BB winning flag is not 0, the process proceeds to step S532, the game ending process at the time of AT entry is performed, the main game state No. 4 total stop process is finished, and the process returns. On the other hand, when the 1 type BB winning flag is 0, the process proceeds to step S533, stores 5 in the main game state number, completes the main game state number 4 total stop processing, and returns. Furthermore, if the result of the pull-back 2 lottery is not 0 in the determination of step S528, the process proceeds to step S530 to perform the AT winning process, and then save 5 as the main game state number (step S533). Game state number 4 complete stop processing is terminated and returns.

In the main game state number 6 full stop process, as shown in FIG. 60(A), it is determined whether or not BB is established (step S541). Then, if BB is not established, the main game state number 6 full stop processing is terminated as it is, and the process returns. 6 Terminate all stop processing and return.

In the main game state number 7 full stop process, as shown in FIG. 60(B), it is determined whether or not BB is established (step S551). Then, if BB is not established, the main game state number 7 full stop processing is terminated and returned, and if BB is established, after saving 4 as the main game state number (step S552), main game state number 6 End the all-stop processing and return.

After execution of all stop processing for main game state numbers 0 to 7, the process proceeds to step S373 in FIG. Here, 0 is saved as the instruction number, the section type number management game ending process is terminated, and the process returns. Upon return from the section type number management game end processing, the process proceeds to step S8 in FIG. 34(B) to perform advantageous section clear counter management processing.

In the advantageous section clear counter management process, as shown in FIG. 61, the value of the advantageous section clear counter is decremented by 1 (step S561), and it is determined whether or not the value of the advantageous section clear counter is 0 before the current subtraction. (step S562). Here, if the value of the advantageous section clear counter is not 0 before the current subtraction, the process advances to step S565 to determine whether or not the value of the advantageous section clear counter has become 0 as a result of the current subtraction. Here, if the value of the advantageous section clear counter is 0 as a result of this subtraction, the process proceeds to step S566. On the other hand, if the value of the advantageous section clear counter is not 0 even after the current subtraction, the process proceeds to step S567, and it is determined whether or not the replay operation symbol is displayed in the game. Then, when the replay operation symbol is displayed in the game, the process proceeds to step S569 as it is, and when it is not displayed, the value obtained by subtracting the number of bets from the payout number of game medals in the game is added to the net increase counter. (step S568), the process proceeds to step S569.

At step S569, it is determined whether or not the value of the net increase counter is 2401 or more. and return. In step S566, 0 is saved in all storage areas for storing data values that affect the performance of the instruction function, and the process proceeds to step S563. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S562 that the value of the advantageous section clear counter has been 0 since before the current subtraction, the process proceeds directly to step S563. In step S563, it is determined whether or not the section type number is 0. If the section type number is 0, the advantageous section clear counter management process is terminated and the process returns. On the other hand, if the section type number is not 0, 1500 is stored in the advantageous section clear counter (step S564), and then the advantageous section clear counter management process is terminated and the process returns.

<Timer interrupt processing>
Next, timer interrupt processing will be described. In the present embodiment, processing such as reading of each game operation signal output in response to a game operation such as a bet operation performed by the player, detection (confirmation) of the signal level, transmission of each control command, reel drive control, etc. is performed by a timer interrupt process that is performed every preset constant time (for example, 2.235 milliseconds). In this timer interrupt processing, as shown in FIG. 62, first, interrupt initial processing (saving of registers, prohibition of interrupts, etc.) is performed (step MT11), and then it is determined whether or not power failure has been detected. (step MT12). Here, if power interruption is detected, power interruption processing is performed (step MT25). In the power-off processing, save of registers, save of stack pointer, save of interrupt status, and the like are performed. In addition, processing such as holding of information on the winning combination determination result and information on the game state (including information on the AT) stored in a predetermined storage area, and calculation and storage of the checksum are also performed.

On the other hand, if power-off is not detected, the interrupt counter value is updated (subtracted by "1") (step MT13), and timer measurement is performed (step MT14). This timer measurement is to perform subtraction, addition processing, etc. of the timer value of an arbitrary timer set in the above-described game progress control processing. Next, the input port is read (step MT15). In reading the input port, the signal level of each game operation signal input to the input port is read and stored, and the signal level is determined.

Next, a reel drive control process for controlling the driving of the reels 3a to 3c (rotational acceleration, deceleration, constant speed maintenance, stop maintenance, etc.) is performed (step MT16). In this reel drive control process, reel drive pulse output indicating the timing of switching the output phase (excitation phase) of the stepping motor according to the reel drive state (stopped, waiting for reel rotation, accelerating, constant speed, decelerating, etc.) Processing such as updating the counter value and acquiring, updating, and outputting reel driving pulse data for driving the stepping motor is performed. At the next step MT17, it is determined whether or not the reel drive control process has been executed for all reels. If not executed, the process returns to step MT16 and the reel drive control process is executed again. On the other hand, when all the reels are executed, port output processing for exciting output of reels, hoppers, blockers, etc. is performed (step MT18), and furthermore, control is performed to transmit the control command stored in the control command buffer (CB). Command transmission processing is performed (step MT19).

Next, in step MT20, the outer end signal (external signal) data stored in the predetermined storage area is read out and the outer end signal is output. Next, an LED display is performed to cause the above display lamp to perform a predetermined display (step MT21). In this LED display, for example, the number-of-payout display lamp 46j is caused to perform the following display. In other words, when no error (except E type error) has occurred, the payout number "0 to 9" is displayed based on the payout number of game medals, or the numerical value "1 to 6" is displayed based on the setting value. display it. Furthermore, when the pressing order is to be notified, the display mode of the instruction number "=1" to "=6" is displayed. Also, when an error (except E system error) occurs, an error display is executed based on the value of the error number.

Next, the process proceeds to step MT22 to perform error management. In this error management, first, an error check is performed. In this error check, it is determined whether an H0 error has occurred, whether a CE error has occurred, whether a CP error has occurred, whether a CH error has occurred, and whether a C0 error has occurred. Determines whether an error has occurred, determines whether a C1 error has occurred, determines whether an E6 error has occurred, determines whether an E7 error has occurred, and further determines whether an E6 error or When the E7 error occurs, an error is displayed on the number-of-payout display lamp 46j, and processing such as stopping the execution of the game is performed. If an E-system error occurs, the error can be recovered by executing the above-described setting change process. After this error check, if an error occurs, the output request set upon error detection is processed to transmit error information to the sub-control means 200 . After executing this error management process, the process of updating the random numbers used for determining the hand etc. is performed (step MT23), the interrupt recovery process (restore of the register, interrupt permission, etc.) is performed (step MT24), and the interrupt return is performed. do.

<<Second embodiment>>
Hereinafter, a slot machine according to the second embodiment (hereinafter also referred to as "second embodiment slot machine") will be described with additional reference to FIGS. 63 to 67 of the second embodiment. Characteristic portions of the slot machine of the second mode will be mainly described below. The features described below are not limited to the application of the slot machine of the second embodiment, and can be similarly applied to other embodiments. It should be noted that the slot machine of the second embodiment has a basic configuration common to or similar to that of the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment described above, and a description thereof will be omitted. Further, each control process such as the winning combination determination process and the reel control process described in the slot machine 1 can be applied to the slot machine of the second mode in the same manner or by partially changing the processing contents.

<Stop switch unit>
The slot machine of the second form has a stop switch unit 500 as shown in FIG. The stop switch unit 500 comprises three stop switches 510 , 520 , 530 and a stop switch panel 540 . The stop switch 510 includes a stop switch cover 512 having a circular shape when viewed from the front, and a stop switch lamp 514 (illustration of the lamp itself is omitted) composed of an LED or the like incorporated in the stop switch 510 . The stop switch lamp 514 is configured to be lit up by changing the lighting mode or the lighting color (the color visually recognized through the stop switch cover 512) according to the game state, progress of the game, and the like. The stop switch cover 512 is configured to be pressable by the player. In addition, the stop switch cover 512 is made of a translucent material so that the lighting mode and lighting color of the stop switch lamp 514 can be visually recognized by a player, a game clerk, or the like.

Stop switches 520 and 530 are configured similarly to stop switch 510 . That is, the stop switch 520 has a stop switch cover 522 and a stop switch lamp 524 , and the stop switch 530 has a stop switch cover 532 and a stop switch lamp 534 . The stop switches 510, 520, 530 have the same functions as the stop switches 26a, 26b, 26c in the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment. That is, the stop switch 510 is operated to stop the left reel, the stop switch 520 is operated to stop the middle reel, and the stop switch 530 is operated to stop the right reel. Lighting of the stop switch lamps 514, 524, 534 is controlled by the sub control means (sub control board), but may be controlled by the main control means (main control board).

The stop switch panel 540 is composed of a plate-like member having circular openings in portions corresponding to the stop switches 510, 520, 530, and is provided on the front surface of the stop switch unit 500 (regions around the stop switches 510, 520, 530). ) is placed to cover the The stop switch panel 540 is made of, for example, a non-translucent or low-translucent material and is colored in a predetermined color (eg, purple, but may be another color). Note that the stop switch panel 540 may be made of a translucent material, and a lamp (also referred to as a “panel lamp”) that is visibly lit through the stop switch panel 540 may be arranged on the rear side thereof.

As described above, the stop switch lamps 514, 524, and 534 are configured to be lit by changing the lighting mode or the lighting color in accordance with the game state, progress of the game, or the like. In this embodiment, the stop switch lamps 514, 524, 534 are configured to have different lighting modes and lighting colors depending on whether the slot machine of the second embodiment is in a normal state or in an abnormal state. It should be noted that the abnormal state here is not an error state in which the game cannot be progressed as usual, but rather, for example, a predetermined state (for example, the optimum or most It refers to a state that is not set to an advantageous set value state, a state in which the probability of giving the game value is the highest by design, etc.). On the other hand, the normal state refers to a state in which a predetermined state is set and the game can proceed normally.

For example, in amusement arcades, set values and game states may be set to predetermined states, but there are cases where the predetermined states are not set due to forgetting to set them. Therefore, it is preferable to notify the game clerk whether or not there is an abnormal state such that the predetermined state is not set. On the other hand, since the game can be played normally even in such an abnormal state, there is little need to notify the player of the abnormal state. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the lighting mode of the stop switch lamps 514, 524, 534 is changed depending on whether the state is normal or abnormal. The notification is made in such a way that it is easy for the player to understand and is difficult for the player to notice (there is no sense of incongruity).

<Lighting mode and lighting color of the stop switch lamp>
64 to 67 show examples of changes in lighting patterns (lighting modes and lighting colors) of the stop switch lamps 514, 524 and 534, which will be described in order below. 64 to 67, left stop switch, middle stop switch, and right stop switch refer to stop switches 510, 520, and 530, respectively. 64 to 67, left stop switch lamp, middle stop switch lamp, and right stop switch lamp refer to stop switch lamps 514, 524, and 534, respectively.

FIG. 64 shows an example of transition of the lighting pattern in the normal state 1. FIG. The normal state 1 is a game state in which the machine is inside and not in the AT state, and refers to the state when the winning hand is won. The internal game state refers to a game state in which winning of a special combination is carried over like the game state inside the BB described in the first embodiment, and for example, the game mode 7 in the first embodiment corresponds to this. do. Since the normal state 1 is non-AT, the notification of the pushing order (push navigation) is not performed even if the pushing order wins. Here, it is assumed that each stop switch is operated in order of the left stop switch, the middle stop switch, and the right stop switch.

In the example of the transition of the lighting pattern in the normal state 1 in FIG. 64, the left stop switch lamp, middle Both the stop switch lamp and the right stop switch lamp light up in red. When all the reels rotate at a constant speed, the left stop switch lamp, the middle stop switch lamp, and the right stop switch lamp all switch from red lighting to blue lighting. After that, when the operation of the left stop switch is accepted (when the left stop switch is switched from OFF to ON), the left stop switch lamp is switched from blue lighting to red lighting.

Next, when the operation of the middle stop switch is accepted (when the middle stop switch is switched from OFF to ON), the middle stop switch lamp is switched from blue lighting to red lighting. Finally, when the operation of the right stop switch is accepted (when the right stop switch is switched from OFF to ON), the right stop switch lamp is switched from blue lighting to red lighting. In this example, the left stop switch, the middle stop switch, and the right stop switch are operated in this order, but the switching of the lighting pattern when operated in other order is also based on this example. Become.

FIG. 65 shows an example of transition of the lighting pattern in the normal state 2. FIG. The normal state 2 is a game state in the inside and during the AT, and refers to the state when the winning hand is won. Since normal state 1 is during AT, notification of the pushing order (push navigation) is performed when the pushing order wins. Here, it is assumed that the push order of "left, middle, right" is notified, and each stop switch is operated according to the notified push order.

In the example of the transition of the lighting pattern in the normal state 2 in FIG. 65, the left stop switch lamp, the middle stop switch lamp, the right stop switch lamp, the middle stop switch lamp, and the right Both stop switch lamps light up in red. When all the reels rotate at a constant speed, the left stop switch lamp switches from red lighting to white flashing, and both the middle stop switch lamp and the right stop switch lamp switch from red lighting to white lighting. By blinking the left stop switch lamp in white, the player can be urged to operate the left stop switch. Thereafter, when the operation of the left stop switch is accepted, the left stop switch lamp switches from blinking in white to extinguished, and the middle stop switch lamp switches from lighting in red to blinking in white. By blinking the middle stop switch lamp in white, the player can be urged to operate the middle stop switch.

Next, when the operation of the middle stop switch is accepted, the middle stop switch lamp switches from blinking in white to extinguished, and the right stop switch lamp switches from lighting in white to blinking in white. By blinking the right stop switch lamp in white, the player can be urged to operate the right stop switch. Finally, when the operation of the right stop switch is accepted, the right stop switch lamp switches from blinking white to lighting red, and both the left stop switch lamp and the middle stop switch lamp switch from off to red lighting. It should be noted that, here, the pushing order of "left, middle, right" is notified, and the respective stop switches are operated according to the notified pushing order. The manner in which the lighting pattern is switched when each stop switch is operated according to the pressing order also conforms to this example.

FIG. 66 shows an example of transition of the lighting pattern in abnormal state 1. FIG. Abnormal state 1 is a non-internal and non-AT gaming state, and refers to a state when a winning hand is won. The non-internal gaming state refers to a gaming state in which the winning of the special role is not carried over, a gaming state in which the special role has not been won, or a gaming state in which a bonus game is performed due to the establishment of the special role, for example, the gaming mode in the first embodiment 4 corresponds to this. The reason why the abnormal state 1 is set as an abnormal state is that, for example, the game state which should have been set to the internal game state is set to the non-internal game state. Since the abnormal state 1 is non-AT, the notification of the pushing order (push navigation) is not performed even if the pushing order wins. Here, it is assumed that the left stop switch lamp, the middle stop switch lamp, and the right stop switch lamp are operated in this order.

In the example of the lighting pattern transition in abnormal state 1 in FIG. 66, the left stop switch lamp, the middle stop switch lamp, and the right stop switch lamp are lit in red until the start lever is operated and all the reels rotate at a constant speed. Both lights are turned off. When all the reels rotate at a constant speed, the left stop switch lamp, the middle stop switch lamp, and the right stop switch lamp are all switched from off to blue lighting. After that, when the operation of the left stop switch is accepted, the left stop switch lamp switches from lighting in blue to turning off without lighting in red.

Next, when the operation of the middle stop switch is accepted, the middle stop switch lamp is switched from lighting in blue to being extinguished from that time. Finally, when the operation of the right stop switch is accepted, the right stop switch lamp switches from being lit in blue to being extinguished from that time. In this example, the left stop switch, the middle stop switch, and the right stop switch are operated in this order, but the switching of the lighting pattern when operated in other order is also based on this example. Become.

In the abnormal state 1, the lighting pattern is switched in this way. The manner in which the lighting patterns are switched is different from the manner in which the lighting patterns are switched in the normal state 1 and the normal state 2 . However, a game clerk who is familiar with how the lighting pattern is switched in the abnormal state 1 can easily recognize (identify) that such a switching method was performed, but a player who is not familiar with it can easily recognize (distinguish) that such switching has been performed. difficult to recognize. In addition, even when the lighting patterns are switched in the abnormal state 1, the driver is less likely to feel uncomfortable. This is because, for example, the lighting pattern (lighting color) of the stop switch when it is in a state in which it is possible to accept an operation is the same in normal state 1 and in abnormal state 1 (both are lit in blue). is a factor. By setting the manner in which the lighting pattern is switched in the abnormal state 1 as described above, it is possible to inform the game clerk of the abnormal state 1 in such a way that it is easy for the game clerk to understand and it is difficult for the player to notice it.

FIG. 67 shows an example of transition of the lighting pattern in abnormal state 2. FIG. Abnormal state 2 is a non-AT gaming state, and refers to a state in which a winning combination is won and a setting change is required. It does not matter whether it is in non-internal or in internal. The reason why the abnormal state 2 is set as an abnormal state is that, for example, a predetermined set value is set to a different set value. Since the abnormal state 2 is non-AT, the notification of the pushing order (push navigation) is not performed even if the pushing order wins. Here, it is assumed that the left stop switch lamp, the middle stop switch lamp, and the right stop switch lamp are operated in this order.

In the example of the lighting pattern transition in abnormal state 2 in FIG. 67, the left stop switch lamp, the middle stop switch lamp, and the right stop switch lamp are all light blue until the start lever is operated and all the reels rotate at a constant speed. Light. When all the reels rotate at a constant speed, the left stop switch lamp, the middle stop switch lamp, and the right stop switch lamp all switch from lighting in light blue to lighting in blue. After that, when the operation of the left stop switch is accepted, the left stop switch lamp switches from lighting in blue to lighting in light blue.

Next, when the operation of the middle stop switch is accepted, the middle stop switch lamp switches from lighting in blue to lighting in light blue from that time. Finally, when the operation of the right stop switch is accepted, the right stop switch lamp switches from lighting in blue to lighting in light blue. In this example, the left stop switch, the middle stop switch, and the right stop switch are operated in this order, but the switching of the lighting pattern when operated in other order is also based on this example. Become.

In the abnormal state 2, the lighting pattern is switched in this manner. The manner in which the lighting pattern is switched is different from the manner in which the lighting pattern is switched in the normal state 1 and the abnormal state 1 . However, a game clerk who is familiar with how the lighting pattern is switched in the abnormal state 2 can easily recognize (identify) that such a switching is performed, but a player who is not familiar with it can easily recognize (distinguish) the switching. difficult to recognize. In addition, even if the lighting patterns are switched in the abnormal state 2, it is difficult for the driver to feel uncomfortable. This is because, for example, the lighting pattern (lighting color) of the stop switch when it is ready to accept an operation is the same for normal state 1, abnormal state 1, and abnormal state 2. (Both are lit in blue). By setting the manner in which the lighting pattern is switched in the abnormal state 2 as described above, it is possible to inform the game clerk of the abnormal state 2 in such a way that it is easy for the game clerk to understand and it is difficult for the player to notice it.

As described above, the stop switch panel 540 is given a predetermined color. In this embodiment, the color applied to the stop switch panel 540 includes the lighting color used in the stop switch lamp (the color viewed through the stop switch cover 512 and the color when the stop switch lamp is viewed directly. In the above example, the color is a different color (for example, black) from the same or similar color as red, blue, white, light blue). This prevents the color of the stop switch panel 540 from obstructing the visibility of the lighting color of the stop switch lamp, and allows the lighting color of the stop switch lamp to be visually recognized well. In addition, when the stop switch panel 540 is made of a translucent material and the panel lamps are arranged on the back side thereof, the lighting color of the panel lamps (the color visually recognized through the stop switch panel 540) changes depending on each stop. It is preferable to use a color different from the same or similar color as the lighting color used in the switch lamp. This prevents the lighting color of the panel lamp from obstructing the visibility of the lighting color of the stop switch lamp, and allows the lighting color of the stop switch lamp to be visually recognized well.

In the present embodiment, the stop switch lamp is used to notify whether the state is normal or abnormal, but other lighting devices may be used for the notification. For example, decorative lighting devices arranged on the frame or panel of the front door may also be used as abnormal state notification lighting devices, or a separate abnormal state notification lighting device may be provided. may

<<Third Embodiment>>
A slot machine according to the third embodiment (hereinafter also referred to as "a slot machine of the third embodiment") will be described below with additional reference to FIGS. 68 to 71. FIG. Characteristic portions of the slot machine of the third embodiment will be mainly described below. The features described below are not limited to the application of the slot machine of the third embodiment, and can be similarly applied to other embodiments. It should be noted that the slot machine of the third embodiment has a basic configuration common to or similar to that of the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment described above, and a description thereof will be omitted. Further, each control process such as the winning combination determination process and the reel control process described in the slot machine 1 can be applied to the slot machine of the third embodiment in the same manner or by partially changing the processing contents. The characteristic structure of the slot machine of the second embodiment described above can also be applied to the slot machine of the third embodiment in the same manner or by partially changing the content.

<AT notification indicator>
The slot machine of the third form has an AT information display 600 as shown in FIG. The AT notification display 600 comprises three 7-segment displays 611, 612, 613 capable of displaying single-digit numbers, English letters, and the like. The 7-segment displays 611, 612, 613 are, as shown in FIG. A segment LED (here, referred to as an H segment LED, but may also be referred to as a DP segment LED) (a 7-segment display having such a configuration is also referred to as an 8-segment display). . As shown in FIG. 68(C), the A-segment LEDs to H-segment LEDs are in a lit state (shown in black in the drawing), a blinking state (shown in shaded lines in the drawing), and an off state (shown in white in the drawing). It is configured so that it can be switched between

The AT notification display 600 is arranged in a predetermined area (for example, an area corresponding to the symbol display area DA1 or the symbol display area DA2 in the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment) on the front surface of the slot machine of the third embodiment ( (Placement may be changed as appropriate). The AT notification display 600 displays the push navigation (push order) and the AT remaining payout number in the game state during AT (for example, corresponds to the game mode 3 described in the first embodiment). It is configured so that it can be performed while switching according to the progress of. The AT remaining payout number refers to the number of game values (game medals) that can be given during the remaining AT period (from the current time during AT to the end of one or a series of ATs. AT notification display) 600 is controlled by sub control means (sub control board), but may be controlled by main control means (main control board).

The notification of push navigation by the AT notification display 600 is displayed on the 7-segment displays 611, 612, 613, respectively, the numerical value of the pressing order corresponding to the left reel, the middle reel, and the right reel (any numerical value from 1 to 3) This is done by displaying For example, when informing the press order of "middle right left", "2" is displayed on the 7-segment display 611, "1" is displayed on the 7-segment display, "3" is displayed on the 7-segment display 613, and "right middle" is displayed. When informing the pressing order of "left", the 7-segment display 611 displays "3", the 7-segment display 612 displays "2", and the 7-segment display 613 displays "1".

On the other hand, the notification of the AT remaining payout number by the AT notification display 600 displays the 100s digit on the left 7 segment display 611, displays the tens digit on the central 7 segment display 612, This is done by displaying the ones digit on the seven segment display 613 on the right. For example, when notifying "258" as the AT remaining payout number, "2" is displayed on the 7-segment display 611, "5" is displayed on the 7-segment display, "8" is displayed on the 7-segment display 613, and "37" is displayed on the 7-segment display. , the 7-segment display 611 is turned off and nothing is displayed, and the 7-segment display 612 displays "3" and the 7-segment display 613 displays "7".

<Example of information display switching on the AT notification display>
FIG. 69 and FIG. 70 will be used to explain how the display of the pressing order and the display of the AT remaining payout number on the AT notification display 600 are switched according to the progress of the game during the AT gaming state. explain. FIG. 69 shows an example of the flow of progress of one game during the AT gaming state and the operation contents of the AT information display 600 according to the progress, and FIG. An example of the display content of the display 600 is shown. 〈Lever〉, 〈First stop〉, 〈Second stop〉, 〈Third stop〉 and 〈Payout〉 shown on the left side of these figures indicate each time point of progress in one game. there is <Lever> is the timing at which the operation of the start lever is accepted, and <First stop> is the timing at which the stop operation (first stop operation) for any one of the three spinning reels is accepted. showing. Similarly, <second stop> indicates the timing at which a stop operation (second stop operation) for one of the remaining two spinning reels is accepted, and <third stop> is during rotation. 3 shows the timing at which the stop operation (third stop operation) for the remaining one reel is accepted. Also, <payout> indicates the timing at which game value (game medals) is started to be awarded. Hereinafter, the 7-segment displays 611, 612, and 613 are also referred to as a left 7-segment display, a middle 7-segment display, and a right 7-segment display, respectively.

As shown in step SL1 of FIG. 69, when the operation of the start lever is accepted, the value of the AT remaining payout number (here, 400) is displayed on the AT notification display. Here, since the number of AT remaining payouts is 400, as shown in (A1) of FIG. , the right 7-segment display displays "0"). Next, at step SL2 in FIG. 69, push order navigation is generated by winning the push order role. As a result, in step SL3, the display on the AT notification display is switched from the AT remaining payout number "400" to the lever-triggered push-navigation (push-navigation from the first stop operation to the third stop operation) and displayed. . Here, it is assumed that the push-navigation of the lever trigger is "left-center-right". Since the push navigation is "left center right", as shown in (A2) of FIG. "3" is displayed on the right 7-segment display, except that the numerical value corresponding to the reel to be stopped first (here, "1" displayed on the left 7-segment display) is flashed to indicate that the reel should be stopped second. The numerical value corresponding to the reel ("2" displayed on the middle 7-segment display here) and the numerical value corresponding to the reel to be stopped (here "3" displayed on the right 7-segment display) are lit up. By blinking the numerical value corresponding to the reel to be stopped, the displayed numerical value is not the AT remaining payout number of "123" but the pressing order of "left, middle, right", and the first stop operation. It is possible for the player to easily recognize that the reel to be played is the left reel corresponding to the left 7-segment display device blinking "1".

Next, triggered by the reception of the first stop operation, it is determined in step SL4 of FIG. 69 whether or not the first stop operation has been performed according to push navigation. Here, if the first stop operation is performed according to the push navigation, the display on the AT notification display is changed from push navigation at the lever trigger to push navigation at the first stop trigger (from the second stop operation to the third stop) at step SL5. Switch to the display of push navigation until operation). That is, as shown in (A3) of FIG. 70, the left 7-segment display of the AT notification display is extinguished, "2" is displayed on the middle 7-segment display, and "3" is displayed on the right 7-segment display. However, the numerical value corresponding to the second reel to be stopped (here, "2" displayed on the middle 7-segment display) is flashed, and the numerical value corresponding to the third reel to be stopped (here, the right 7-segment display) "3" displayed in ) is illuminated. By blinking the numerical value corresponding to the reel to be stopped, the displayed numerical value is not the AT remaining payout number of "23" but the pressing order of "middle right", and the second stop operation is to be performed. It is possible for the player to easily recognize that the reel is the middle reel corresponding to the middle 7-segment display that blinks "2".

Next, triggered by acceptance of the second stop operation, it is determined in step SL6 of FIG. 69 whether or not the second stop operation has been performed according to push navigation. Here, when the second stop operation is performed according to the push navigation, the display on the AT notification display is changed from the push navigation of the first stop opportunity to the push navigation of the second stop opportunity (the push navigation of the third stop operation) in step SL7. navigation) display. That is, as shown in (A4) of FIG. 70, the 7-segment display in the AT information display is extinguished (the left segment display remains extinguished), and "3" is displayed on the right 7-segment display. However, the numerical value corresponding to the reel to be stopped (here, "3" displayed on the right 7-segment display) is flashed. By blinking the numerical value corresponding to the third reel to be stopped, the displayed numerical value is not the AT remaining payout number "3" but the pressing order of "right", and the third reel to be stopped. However, it is possible for the player to easily recognize that it is the right reel corresponding to the right 7-segment display device blinking "3".

Next, when the third stop operation is accepted, in step SL8 of FIG. 69, the AT remaining payout before subtraction (before payout) is displayed on the AT notification display from the push navigation of the third stop opportunity. Switch to number display and display. That is, as shown in (A5) of FIG. 70, "400" on the AT notification display ("4" on the left 7-segment display, "0" on the middle 7-segment display, and "0" on the right 7-segment display) ) is lit up. Then, when the game medals are paid out, in step SL9 of FIG. 69, the value after the subtraction (after the end of the payout) from the value before the subtraction of the AT remaining payout number is decremented on the AT notification display. That is, as shown in (A6) and (A7) of FIG. 70, "400" before subtraction displayed on the AT notification display is changed to "399", "398", "397", ... "391", "389" after subtraction ("3" on the left 7-segment display, "8" on the middle 7-segment display, and "9" on the right 7-segment display) ”) is displayed. However, in this example, the number of payouts is "11". By performing such a decrement display, it is possible to make the player feel that the game medals are paid out one by one and the AT remaining payout number is reduced by one as the game medals are paid out.

On the other hand, in step SL4 of FIG. 69, if it is determined that the first stop operation has not been performed according to the push navigation, the display on the AT notification display is switched to the display of the AT remaining payout number after subtraction from the push navigation triggered by the lever. display immediately (immediately display without decrementing). That is, as shown in (A8) of FIG. 70, immediately after the first stop is performed, "389" is displayed on the AT notification display ("3" is displayed on the left 7-segment display, and "8" is displayed on the middle 7-segment display). , to display "9" on the right seven-segment display. Similarly, in step SL6 of FIG. 69, if it is determined that the second stop operation has not been performed according to the push navigation, the display on the AT notification display is the AT remaining payout number after subtraction from the push navigation of the first stop opportunity. Switch to display and display immediately. That is, as shown in (A9) of FIG. 70, "389" is displayed on the AT notification display immediately after the first stop is made. In this way, when the stop operation is performed without following the push-navigation, the display of the push-navigation is stopped and the AT remaining payout number is displayed, and the AT remaining payout number after subtraction is immediately displayed. It is possible for the player to recognize that the stop operation has been performed without following the navigation and that the AT remaining payout amount has decreased. In addition, since the AT remaining payout number after subtraction is displayed before all the reels are stopped (before the stop symbol is determined), the payout is performed when the stop symbol is determined, and accordingly, the AT remaining payout number is subtracted. It is also possible to prevent the player from erroneously recognizing that the image has been displayed.

As a specific example, the contents of display control on the AT notification display when a combination lottery result corresponding to the winning-A1 condition device (see FIG. 8) in the first embodiment is obtained will be described. In the winning-A1 condition device, if the pressing order is correct, a small bell win is established and a predetermined number of game medals (15 in the first embodiment, but 11 in this embodiment) are paid out. On the other hand, even if the pushing order is incorrect, it corresponds to a pushing order role in which there is a possibility that one game medal will be paid out by establishing a one-card role. When such a push order is won, the display on the AT notification display is switched to the display of the AT remaining payout number after subtraction from the push navigation at the stage where the wrong push order is confirmed in the same manner as described above. Display ("400"→"389"). After that, even if a single hand is established and only one game medal is paid out, the display contents of the AT remaining payout number are not updated. That is, the display of the AT remaining payout number after subtraction "389" is the value "399" (=400-1) obtained by subtracting the actual payout number "1" from the AT remaining payout number "400" before subtraction. will not be updated to On the other hand, if the display of the AT remaining payout number after the subtraction is updated to "399" when the one-card hand is established due to the incorrect pressing order, the player dares to establish the one-card hand because the pushing order is incorrect. As a result, the AT gaming state can be continued for a long time by suppressing the decrease in the AT remaining payout number. Therefore, even if the push navigation is performed, if the pushing order is incorrect, the AT remaining payout number is uniformly subtracted by "11" regardless of whether or not the one-piece combination is established. It is possible to prevent the period of the AT game state from being extended.

<Information display on AT notification display when power is restored>
The information displayed on the AT notification display 600 in the progress of the game and its display mode are managed by the sub control means. When the power is cut off during the progress of the game, the sub control means stores the information displayed or to be displayed on the AT information display 600 at that time, and re-displays it when the power is restored. How to display the pressing order and the AT remaining payout number on the AT notification display 600 when power is restored will be described below with reference to FIG. FIG. 71 shows an example of the display contents of the AT notification display 600 according to the timing of power-off and power-off recovery. The content displayed on the AT notification display 600 according to the progress of the game when the power failure does not occur is the same as the content shown in FIG.

After the operation of the start lever is accepted and before the first stop operation is accepted, when the power is turned off and the power is restored, as shown in FIG. The above-mentioned lever-triggered push navigation is displayed on the display. After the first stop operation is accepted and before the second stop operation is accepted, if the power is turned off and the power is restored, whether or not the first stop operation coincides with the push-navigation. The displayed content differs depending on whether the That is, when the first stop operation coincides with push navigation, as shown in FIG. 71 (B1), the above-described first stop opportunity push navigation is displayed on the AT notification display. On the other hand, if the first stop operation does not coincide with the push navigation, the remaining AT payout number after subtraction is displayed on the AT notification display as shown in FIG. 71(B2).

After the second stop operation is accepted and before the third stop operation is accepted, if a power failure occurs and the power is restored, the order of the stop operations up to that point (first stop operation and The displayed content differs depending on whether or not the second stop operation) matches the push navigation. That is, when the order of the stop operations up to that point matches the push navigation, as shown in (C1) of FIG. On the other hand, if the order of stop operations up to that point does not match the push-navigation, as shown in (C2) of FIG.

After the third stop operation is accepted and before the payout of game medals occurs, if the power is turned off and the power is restored, the order of the stop operations up to that point (from the first stop operation The displayed content differs depending on whether or not the third stop operation) matches the push navigation. That is, when the order of the stop operation up to that point matches the push-navigation, as shown in (D1) of FIG. Then, the above-described decrement display is performed according to the subsequent payout of game medals. On the other hand, if the order of stop operations up to that point does not match the push-navigation, as shown in (C2) of FIG.

When the power supply is interrupted while the game medals are being paid out and the power supply is restored, the remaining AT number of payouts after subtraction is displayed on the AT notification display as shown in FIG. 71(E). is displayed immediately. In the case of power failure recovery, the recovery time on the main control means side and the recovery time on the sub control means side may differ. Therefore, if a power failure occurs while the game medals are being paid out, the main control means returns first in the situation that the return of the sub control means is not ready, and the payout is restarted and finished. Sometimes. In this case, if the above-described decrement display is performed after the return of the sub-control means is completed, there is a risk that the player who sees it may misunderstand that the payout is continuing at that time. Therefore, by using immediate display instead of decrement display, such misrecognition by the player is prevented.

As described above, the AT notification display 600 is capable of switching and displaying and notifying a plurality of different pieces of information such as information on the pressing order and information on the number of AT remaining payouts. Therefore, compared with the case where each information is displayed by separate displays, the space for arranging the displays can be reduced, and space can be saved. In addition, it is possible to reduce the manufacturing cost by also using the display device. Furthermore, in the AT notification display 600, the display mode of information is changed depending on whether the pressing order is notified or when the AT remaining payout number is notified. Therefore, it becomes clear to the player which information is displayed, and it is possible to prevent the player from misunderstanding the displayed information and causing trouble in the game. For example, even if the AT remaining payout number before or after the subtraction is "321", "213", "123", etc., even if the numerical value used in the display of the push navigation is displayed, the blinking display at the time of the push navigation is performed. By not having it, it is possible to prevent the player from erroneously recognizing it as push-navigation.

Although the AT notification display 600 can display two types of information with different contents even if the numerical information is the same, it may be configured to display three or more types of information. . Even in that case, when the information to be displayed includes a plurality of information that are likely to be confused, it is preferable to change the display mode of the information. Specifically, in addition to the above-described push-navigation and AT remaining payout amount, the information can also be used to display the AT add-on amount. Push-navigation used to blink some information, but when announcing the number of AT additions, you can change the color and brightness to be notified, change the lighting mode of the segment lamp that is different from the corresponding segment, or change the lighting mode of the segment lamp. You may make it change the aspect of alerting|reporting. This allows the player to specifically (clearly) specify the content of the current notification. Further, in the present embodiment, information is notified by the AT notification display 600 using a 7-segment display, but a plurality of different information can be displayed using other types of display such as dot matrix LEDs. may be configured to display Also, a plurality of different pieces of information may be displayed in the same display area within the display screen of the liquid crystal display device. Even in these cases, when the information to be displayed includes a plurality of pieces of information that are likely to be confused, it is preferable to change the display mode of the pieces of information. In addition, misidentification of information may be prevented by changing lighting colors, displayed characters, and the like for a plurality of pieces of information that are likely to be confused.

<<Fourth embodiment>>
A slot machine according to a fourth embodiment (hereinafter also referred to as a "fourth mode slot machine") will now be described with additional reference to FIGS. 72 to 75. FIG. Characteristic portions of the slot machine of the fourth mode will be mainly described below. The characterizing portions described below are not limited in application to the slot machine of the fourth embodiment, but can be similarly applied to other embodiments. It should be noted that the slot machine of the fourth embodiment has a basic configuration common to or similar to that of the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment described above, and a description thereof will be omitted. Further, each control process such as the winning combination determination process and the reel control process described in the slot machine 1 can be applied to the slot machine of the fourth mode in the same manner or by partially changing the processing contents. The features of the second and third slot machines described above can also be applied to the fourth slot machine in the same manner or with partial modifications.

<Transition of game state>
In the slot machine of the fourth mode, as shown in FIG. 72, the game state (main game state) mainly related to the setting state of the AT, which is controlled by the main control means, is normal in the advantageous section. It has four game states: a game state, an AT game state, and a pullback game state. The non-advantageous section game state is a game state belonging to a non-advantageous section (corresponding to the normal section described in the first embodiment), and corresponds to the game mode 0 described in the first embodiment. The normal game state within the advantageous section, the AT game state and the pullback game state are game states belonging to the advantageous section (same as the advantageous section described in the first embodiment). The normal game state within the advantageous section corresponds to, for example, the game modes 1, 2, and 6 described in the first embodiment, the AT game state corresponds to, for example, the same game mode 3, and the withdrawal game state corresponds to, for example, the same game modes 4 and 5. , 7.

When a predetermined transition condition is established while staying in the non-advantageous section game state, the game transitions to an advantageous section (basically, a normal game state within the advantageous section). In the normal game state within the advantageous interval, an AT lottery (details will be described later) and a charge lottery are performed on the main control means side based on the combination determination result and the like. When the AT lottery is won (AT winning), it is shifted to the AT gaming state with that as a trigger. If the charge lottery is won, the number of charges (also referred to as "AT stock number") is added. The number of charges is related to the number of games set in the AT game state, and the higher the number of charges, the higher the possibility that the number of resets of the AT game state will increase, which is advantageous for the player. In the AT game state, a predetermined number of games (for example, 20 games) is set as one set, and push-navigation is executed when a push-up win is won. In addition, in the AT gaming state, a charge cancellation lottery is performed on the main control means side based on the combination determination result and the like. When the charge cancellation lottery is won, after the number of remaining games in the currently set AT game state is consumed, the AT game state for a predetermined number of games is reset (the number of charges is subtracted by 1 when resetting). . In addition, as another aspect, if the charge cancellation lottery is won in the AT game state, regardless of the number of remaining games in the currently set AT game state, the AT game state is reset for a predetermined number of games from the next game. Alternatively, the AT gaming state may be continued by adding (adding) a predetermined number of games to the number of remaining games in the currently set AT gaming state. When the set number of games is consumed in the AT game state and the AT game state is not reset, the state is shifted to the withdrawal game state. A pull-back lottery is performed in the pull-back game state, and when the pull-back lottery is won, it is shifted to the AT game state. Further, when the number of charges is 1 or more, if a predetermined number of games (for example, 40 games) are completed in the pull-back game state without winning the pull-back lottery, the state may be shifted to the AT game state. In that case, the number of charges is subtracted by 1 when shifting to the AT gaming state.

In the present embodiment, as in the first embodiment, an advantageous section clear counter is provided to keep track of the number of games in which players have continuously stayed in the advantageous section. Set the value of the counter to "1500". Each time the game is completed in the advantageous interval, the value of the advantageous interval clear counter is decremented by 1, and when the counter value becomes "0", the game is forcibly shifted to the normal interval. In addition, if the advantageous section clear counter value changes to a normal section before the value of the advantageous section clear counter reaches "0", the value of the advantageous section clear counter is cleared (set to "0"), and the normal section is changed to the advantageous section. , the value of the advantageous section clear counter is reset to "1500".

It also has a MY counter for counting the number of game medals won (difference number) in the advantageous section. This MY counter sets its counter value to "0" at the start of the advantageous section (or may be set to "0" at the end of the advantageous section), and thereafter resets the counter value every game according to the game result. Update. In updating, if the difference number is less than 0, the counter value is corrected to be "0", and if the difference number becomes a positive value, the counter value is accumulated and updated (do not perform such correction). can also be used). Then, when the accumulated difference number exceeds 2400, the advantageous section is terminated and the transition is made to the non-advantageous section (non-advantageous section gaming state). Note that this MY counter is functionally similar to the net addition counter of the first embodiment.

Furthermore, an AT number counter is provided as a counter for counting related to the number of game medals acquired (difference number) in the advantageous section. This AT number counter is calculated by taking into account the value of the MY counter and the number of AT stock (number of charges), etc., and the number of game medals expected to be earned during one advantageous section. It is a counter that counts the number (expected acquisition number, expected acquisition possible number). Then, when the value of the AT number counter (expected number of acquisitions) exceeds a predetermined value (2100), it is triggered by a predetermined timing (for example, the ending timing of the ending game state described later). It is designed so that it may shift to an advantageous section. Note that this AT number counter is functionally the same as the correction counter of the first embodiment. These advantageous section clear counter, MY counter and AT number counter are controlled and managed by the main control means.

During the normal game state in the advantageous section, when the charge lottery is won and the charge number is updated, an effect that suggests that the charge number has been updated (added) (also referred to as a "charge suggestion effect") is performed by the sub-control. may be carried out by means of Whether or not to execute the charge suggestion effect is determined by a charge suggestion generation lottery. This charge suggestion generation lottery is performed by the sub-control means based on the combination determination result in the game in which the charge number has been updated, the charge number after the update, and the charge suggestion mode (details will be described later). The charge suggestion mode is a mode related to the degree of expectation (probability) that the charge suggestion effect is performed, and is set to one of 1, 2, and 3 (the higher the mode number, the higher the expectation). Which charge suggestion mode is set is determined by a charge suggestion mode lottery. This charge suggestion mode lottery is, for example, at a predetermined timing (for example, when the third stop operation is received or when the advantageous section flag This is performed by the sub control means at any timing from the management all stop processing to the advantageous section clear counter processing. Then, the charge suggestion mode selected by the charge suggestion mode lottery is the normal game state ((X+1)th advantage Affects the probability that the charge suggestion effect will occur in the normal game state within the section (details will be described later). Note that the charge suggestion mode set at the end of the X-th advantageous interval is held in the (X+1)-th advantageous interval. Then, at the end of the (X+1)th advantageous section, a new charge suggestion mode is set by a charge suggestion mode lottery.

As an effect similar to the charge suggesting effect, an effect suggesting the current set value of the gaming machine (also referred to as a "set value suggesting effect") may be performed. When performing such a set value suggestion effect, set the probability that the set value suggestion effect will be performed and the accuracy of the suggested content to change according to the charge suggestion mode (another suggestion mode may be set). may For example, the higher the charge suggestion mode number, the higher the probability that the set value suggestion effect will be performed, and the lower the charge suggestion mode number, the higher the set value suggestion. A high probability of performance may be set. In addition, the higher the number of the charge suggestion mode, the higher the probability that the set value suggestion effect will be performed, including those with low and high accuracy of the suggestion content. The lower the charge suggestion mode number, the higher the probability that the charge suggestion mode will be performed. Although it is set high, if it is limited to set value suggestion effects with high certainty of suggestion content, the probability that it will be performed may be set higher as the number of the charge suggestion mode is larger.

Hereinafter, the AT lottery performed by the main control means and the charge suggestion mode lottery and the charge suggestion generation lottery performed by the sub control means will be described with specific examples. In the charge suggestion mode lottery shown in FIG. 73(A), the probability of winning is different between when the target difference number is a predetermined number ("1000" in this example but can be changed as appropriate) and when it is less than the predetermined number. is set. The target difference number refers to the difference number obtained at a predetermined time point in the advantageous interval when one advantageous interval ends. The predetermined time is, for example, when the advantageous interval ends, when the AT gaming state is set only once in the advantageous interval, when the AT gaming state ends, multiple times AT gaming state in the advantageous interval is set, it can be set as appropriate, such as when the last AT game state ends, when the difference number in the advantageous interval becomes maximum, and the like.

In the charge suggestion mode lottery, either selection number 1 (set charge suggestion mode = 1), selection number 2 (set charge suggestion mode = 2), or selection number 3 (set charge suggestion mode = 3) is selected. be. The numbers assigned to each selection number are as shown in FIG. 73(A). In addition, in the charge suggestion mode lottery, the total value of the input numbers is set to "16384". In this way, in the charge suggestion mode lottery, if the target difference number in the current advantageous section is 1000 or more, the probability that the charge suggestion mode will be set to 1 is low, and the probability that the charge suggestion mode will be set to 3 is low. set to be higher. The charging suggesting mode (selection number) set by the result of the charge suggesting mode lottery is not cleared even after the end of the advantageous section, but is stored in the sub-control means and held in the next advantageous section. The target difference number of sheets is cleared at the end of the advantageous section in the main control means, but is not cleared in the sub-control means and is stored even after the end of the advantageous section and is held even in the next advantageous section. You may

In the AT lottery shown in FIG. 73(B), the odds of winning are set to differ according to the trigger hand and the number of charges selected according to the result of the hand determination. Trigger 1 and 2 in the drawing correspond to, for example, a so-called rare combination (small watermelon combination in the first embodiment), and can be arbitrarily set. Also, in the drawing, the number of charges=1 to 4 is described, but the number of charges=5 or more may also be set. In the AT lottery, either selection number 0 (AT non-winning) or selection number 1 (AT winning) is selected. The numbers assigned to each selection number are as shown in FIG. 73(B). Note that in the AT lottery, the total number of entries is set to "65536". In this way, in the AT lottery, basically, the higher the number of charges, the higher the probability of winning AT, but when the number of charges = 0, the probability of winning AT is set higher than when the number of charges = 1 or 2. ing. Also, when the number of charges is a specific number (the number of charges=3 in the figure), the probability of AT winning is set to be considerably high.

In the charging suggestion generation lottery shown in FIG. 74, the winning probability is set to differ according to the updated charging suggestion mode value, the combination selected based on the combination determination result, and the number of charges. In this example, it is divided into the trigger role 1 and other roles, but more trigger roles may be set. Also, the winning probability may be changed between the chance combination 1 and other combinations. Furthermore, although the number of charges=1 to 4 is described in the drawing, the number of charges=5 or more may be set. In the charging suggestion generation lottery, either selection number 0 (no suggestion) or selection number 1 (with suggestion) is selected. The numbers assigned to each selection number are as shown in FIGS. 74(A) to (C). In addition, in the charge suggestion generation lottery, the total value of the input numbers is set to "16384". In this way, in the charge suggestion occurrence lottery, basically, the value of the charge suggestion mode increases, and the probability of performing the charge suggestion effect increases as the number of charges increases. In particular, when the number of charges is a specific number (the number of charges=3 in this example), the probability of performing the charge suggestion effect is set to be considerably high.

By setting the lottery probability of each lottery as described above, the following effects can be obtained. First, in the charge suggestion mode lottery, when the target difference number is 1000 or more, the probability that the charge suggestion mode=3 is set is high. When the charge suggestion mode is set to 3, the probability of winning the charge suggestion occurrence lottery is increased, so the possibility of the charge suggestion effect being performed when the number of charges is updated is also increased. A player to whom the target difference number is 1000 or more, that is, to which a large game value is awarded, generally has a strong desire to continue playing the game. Therefore, when the charge suggesting effect is performed, it can be seen that the number of charges is 1 or more, so that it can be expected that the desire to continue the game will be further increased. It should be noted that even when the target difference number is 1000 or more, there are players who are satisfied with that and try to quit the game. Even such a player can be expected to be motivated to continue the game by performing the charge suggesting effect. On the other hand, if the charge suggesting effect is not performed even if the game is continued for a while after the end of the advantageous section, there is a high possibility that the number of charges=0. However, when the number of charges=0, the probability of AT winning is high, so it can be expected that the desire to continue the game in anticipation of AT winning will increase. Note that when the number of charges is updated to 3 where the probability of AT winning is very high, the probability of performing the charge suggesting effect also increases. Therefore, the effect mode of the charge suggesting effect that is performed when the number of charges is updated to 3 may be a special effect mode when the number of charges=3. By doing so, it is expected that the player who sees the charge suggesting effect of the unique effect mode will further increase the desire to continue the game, considering that there are multiple charges and that it is easy to win AT. can.

In each lottery, the winning probability may be set in consideration of other conditions. For example, the lottery probability of the AT lottery performed by the main control means and the charge suggestion generation lottery performed by the sub control means may be set according to the effect group number and the condition device group number managed on the main control means side. In addition, a flag (also referred to as a "charge winning probability flag") for managing the ease of winning the charge lottery is set in the main control means, and the state of this charge winning probability flag (for example, flag = 0: Low-probability state 1: high-probability state), the lottery probability of the AT lottery performed by the main control means and the charge suggestion generation lottery performed by the sub-control means may be set.

<Ending game state>
In the slot machine of the fourth form, when a predetermined condition (also referred to as "ending condition") is established in the AT game state, the game is shifted to a special game state (also referred to as "ending game state") triggered by this. An example of transition from such an AT game state to an ending game state is shown in FIG. In FIG. 75, when the AT game state set at 20G (“G” means a game) remains at 12G (when 8G is consumed after setting), the ending condition is established, and the ending is started from the next game. It shows an example that is set in the game state. The ending conditions are, for example, that the above-mentioned AT number counter exceeds a predetermined value (for example, "2100"), or that the number of games played after shifting to the advantageous section exceeds a specific value (for example, 1300). can do.

On the other hand, the sub-control means executes an effect (also referred to as "AT suggestion effect") corresponding to being in the AT game state during the AT game state. The state in which this AT suggesting effect is executed is hereinafter referred to as "AT suggesting effect state". When the AT game state in the main control means is completely consumed for the set number of games (20G), the period of the AT suggestive effect state in the sub control means coincides with the period of the AT game state. However, if the AT game state is shifted to the ending game state before the number of games set in the AT game state is completely consumed, the AT suggestive effect state is maintained and the AT suggestive effect is performed even during the ending game state (Fig. 75). Then, when a predetermined condition (also referred to as "AT suggestive effect end condition") is established, an effect corresponding to the ending game state (also referred to as "ending suggestive effect") is performed. The state in which this ending suggestive effect is executed is hereinafter referred to as "ending suggestive effect state". Note that the AT suggestive effect end condition can be, for example, that the number of games initially set as the set number of games in the AT gaming state is completed.

In addition, a predetermined timing of the game when one (one set) AT game state in the main control means and an AT suggestive effect state in the sub control means end (for example, a predetermined timing after receiving the third stop operation, for example, winning determination Later (after the stop symbol determination) or at the time of receiving the third stop operation, etc.), a freeze for suggesting that the AT gaming state ends (also referred to as "AT end suggestion freeze") is set by the main control means. On the other hand, when the main control means has shifted to the ending game state but the sub control means is in the AT suggestive effect state, the AT suggestive effect state in the sub control means ends at a predetermined timing (for example, the third stop At the time of receiving the operation), the AT termination suggestion freeze is set by the main control means. Therefore, depending on whether or not the AT end suggesting freeze is executed, whether the AT game state in the main control means and the AT suggestive effect state in the sub control means are ended at the same time, or whether the main control means has already transitioned to the ending game state. It is not possible to determine whether only the AT suggesting effect state in the sub control means has ended. When the main control means performs the AT end suggesting freeze, the sub control means may also perform an effect suggesting the end of the AT gaming state (also referred to as "AT end suggesting effect"). In addition, in the present embodiment, an AT suggestive effect, an AT end suggestive effect, an ending suggestive effect, and an ending transition suggestive effect are performed using an image display device (corresponding to the image display device 11 described in the first embodiment). These effects may be performed using a display device different from the image display device.

In this way, even if the main control means shifts to the ending game state in the middle of the AT game state, the sub control means maintains the AT suggestive effect state and performs the AT suggestive effect, so that the player is informed of the AT game state. It can give the impression of being continued. Therefore, even if the game state is shifted to the ending game state in the middle of the AT game state, the player does not know it, so it is possible to prevent the player from feeling that he or she has lost money. Further, when the continuous effect is performed by the sub control means as the AT suggestive effect, the main control means may shift from the AT game state to the ending game state. In such a case, if the sub-control means stops the continuous performance and executes the ending performance, the player cannot see the result of the continuous performance, and there is a possibility that the player feels as if he or she has lost money. By continuing the continuous effect, it is possible to prevent such a situation from occurring.

In the AT gaming state, the lottery (also referred to as "AT extra lottery") for determining whether or not to add the number of AT games may be performed by the main control means with the winning of a rare combination as a trigger. In addition, when winning the addition lottery during AT, the sub-control means performs a lottery (also called ``addition notification lottery during AT'') to decide whether or not to notify the fact, and when winning, the addition notification performance is executed. You may do so. On the other hand, even in the ending game state, the main control means may perform a lottery for determining whether or not to add the number of AT games (also referred to as "additional lottery in the limit") with the winning of a rare combination as a trigger. In addition, when winning the lottery to add to the limit, the sub-control means performs a lottery (also referred to as "additional notification lottery to add to the limit") to determine whether or not to inform the lottery, and if the lottery is won, the addition notification performance is executed. You may do so. By making it possible to add AT even in the ending game state, it is possible to enhance the game performance during the ending game state. On the other hand, in the ending game state, even if a rare role is won, etc., if the player does not receive an extra bonus, the player will feel that he or she has lost the game (winning a rare role, etc. will be wasted), leading to a decrease in the desire to play the game. There is fear. In addition, as a benefit other than adding the number of AT games, when a rare role is won in the ending game state, a specific character can be made to appear on the image display screen or a specific effect can be performed. You may provide a privilege to become like. Alternatively, it may be configured such that the charging suggestion mode=3 is likely to be set when a rare combination is won in the ending game state.

In addition, the main control means is in the ending game state, but the sub-control means is in the AT suggestive effect state (also referred to as "AT game state 1"). Winning probability x Winning probability in limit extra notification lottery) is in the state where the main control means is in the AT game state and the sub control means is in the AT suggestion production state (also referred to as "AT game state 2"). It is preferable to set the probability to be equal to the probability of execution (=probability of winning in additional lottery during AT×probability of winning in additional notification lottery during AT). By doing this, since there is no difference in the occurrence frequency of the additional notification performance between the AT game state 1 and the AT game state 2, it is not possible to determine that it is the AT game state 1 based on the occurrence frequency of the addition notification performance. can be made

In addition, in both AT gaming state 1 and AT gaming state 2, a production that suggests that there may be an increase in the number of AT games (also referred to as an “additional suggestion production”) is performed as a result of winning a rare role. It may be executed by control means. In that case, it is preferable to set the frequency at which the additional suggestive effect occurs in the AT game state 1 to be equal to the frequency at which the addable suggestive effect occurs in the AT game state 2 . Furthermore, when a plurality of types of additional suggestive performances with different performance modes (performance contents) are generated in the AT game state 2, all types of the additional suggestive performances are generated in the AT game state 1 as well. , It is preferable to set the frequency at which the addition suggesting effect for each type is generated to be the same in the AT game state 1 and the AT game state 2. By doing so, since there is no difference in the frequency of occurrence of the additional suggestion performance between the AT game state 1 and the AT game state 2, it is not possible to determine that the AT game state is 1 based on the frequency of occurrence of the additional suggestion performance. can be made

In addition, in the state where the main control means is in the ending game state and the sub control means is in the ending suggestive production state (also referred to as "AT game state 3"), a dedicated addition that is not performed in AT game state 1 or AT game state 2 The notification effect and the additional suggestive effect may be performed on the side of the sub-control means. By doing so, the main control means can change the mode of the addition notification performance and the addition suggestion performance in accordance with the state of the sub-control means when in the ending game state. In addition, it is possible to prevent the player from losing motivation in the AT game state 3 by providing the addition notification effect and the addition suggestion effect exclusively for the AT game state 3.例文帳に追加In addition, in this embodiment, the state in which the main control means is in the AT game state and the sub control means is in the ending suggestive presentation state does not occur. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from misunderstanding that the state has shifted to the ending game state when the game state is actually the AT game state.

<Game Progress Control Processing>
The game progress control process among the control processes performed by the main control means of the slot machine of the fourth mode will be described below with additional reference to FIGS. 76 to 82. FIG. In the following description, the main game state 0 corresponds to the non-advantageous section game state described above, the main game states 1 and 2 correspond to the normal game state within the advantageous section described above, and the main game state 3, Main game state 4 and main game state 5 correspond to the AT game state described above, and main game state 6 and main game state 7 correspond to the pullback game state described above. Also, the state in which the limit reaching number is set to 2 in the main game state 5 corresponds to the ending game state described above.

The game progress control process is a process that is repeatedly executed during the game as described in the first embodiment, and as shown in FIG. 76, first, the lever control process is performed (step SK1). The content of this lever control process is the same as part of the content of the game start standby process described in the first embodiment. After the end of the lever control process, the process proceeds to step SK2 and an internal lottery is performed. After the end of the internal lottery, effect group number setting processing is performed (step SK3). The contents of this effect group number setting process are the same as part of the contents of the group number setting process described in the first embodiment. Next, the process proceeds to step SK4 to perform advantageous section display LED lighting processing. In this advantageous section display LED lighting process, control is performed to light up a section indicator for notifying that the advantageous section is in progress. After the advantageous section display LED lighting process is completed, an advantageous section flag management lever process is performed (step SK5). In this advantageous section flag management lever process, lever processes for each game state, which will be described later, are performed as one process.

After the advantageous section flag management lever process is completed, the reel stop process is performed (step SK6). In this reel stopping process, a control process for stopping each reel is performed based on the order and position of pressing by the player as a result of the internal lottery. Next, advantageous section flag management all stop processing is performed (step SK7). This advantageous section flag management all stop processing will be described later. After completion of the advantageous section flag management all stop processing, payout processing (processing for paying out game medals) is performed (step SK8), and then count processing (processing for updating the values of various counters) is performed (step SK9). After the count process is finished, the process proceeds to step SK10 to perform the advantageous section clear counter process. The content of this advantageous section clear counter process is the same as the content of the advantageous section clear counter process described in the first embodiment.

In the lever processing for each game state performed in the advantageous section flag management lever processing of step SK5, as shown in FIG. 77, first, whether or not the advantageous section flag is greater than 0 presence) is determined (step SK21). Here, if the advantageous section flag is greater than 0 (step SK21; YES), the process proceeds to step SK22 to perform instruction generation processing. In this instruction generating process, a preparatory process for performing push navigation is performed. After completion of the instruction generation process, AT number counter update process, which will be described later, is performed, and then the process proceeds to step SK24. On the other hand, in step SK21, if the advantageous section flag is not greater than 0 (step SK21; NO), the process proceeds to step SK24 without performing steps SK22 and SK23.

At step SK24, the main game state number is discriminated. According to the main game state number, if the main game state number is 0, the main game state 0 lever processing is performed (step S64). Main game state 1 lever processing is performed (step SK25), and when the main game state number is 1 or 2, main game state 1 and 2 lever processing is performed (step SK26). Further, when the main game state number is 3 or 4, the main game state 3 and 4 lever processing is performed (step SK27), and when the main game state number is 5, the main game state 5 lever processing described later is performed (step SK28). ). Further, when the main game state number is 6, main game state 6 lever processing is performed (step SK29), and when the main game state number is 7, main game state 7 lever processing is performed (step SK30).

In the AT sheet number counter updating process at step SK23, as shown in FIG. 78, first, the value of the MY counter is stored in the AT sheet counter (step SK41). Next, it is determined whether or not the instruction number is greater than 0 (whether or not push navigation is performed) (step SK42). Here, if the instruction number is not greater than 0 (step SK42; NO), proceed to step SK43 to determine whether the performance group number is N (N is a predetermined number) or). Here, when the effect group number is N (step SK43; YES), the process proceeds to step SK44, and when the effect group number is not N (step SK43; NO), the process proceeds to step SK45. On the other hand, if the instruction number is greater than 0 at step SK42 (step SK42; YES), the process proceeds directly to step SK44.

At step SK44, F (the number of payouts at the time of establishment of a push-up win) is added to the AT number counter, and then the process proceeds to step SK45. At step SK45, it is determined whether or not the main game state number is greater than two. Here, if the main game state number is greater than 2 (step SK45; YES), the process proceeds to step SK46 to determine whether or not the limit reaching number is 0. Here, if the limit reaching number is 0 (step SK46; YES), the process advances to step SK47 to determine whether or not the advantageous section stay G number counter is 1 or not. The advantageous interval staying G number counter is a counter for managing the number of games continuously staying in the advantageous interval, like the advantageous interval clear counter.

At step SK47, if the AT stay G number counter is 1 (step SK47; YES), proceed to step SK49; is 2100 or more. Here, if the AT number counter is 2100 or more (step SK48; YES), the process proceeds to step SK49. At step SK49, 1 is stored in the limit reached number, after which the AT number counter updating process is terminated and the process returns. On the other hand, if the main game state number is not greater than 2 at step SK45 (step SK45; NO), and if the limit reaching number is not 0 at step SK46 (step SK46; NO), the AT number counter is reached at step SK48. is not equal to or greater than 2100 (step SK48; NO), no processing is performed thereafter, the AT number counter update processing is terminated, and the process returns.

In the main game state 5 lever processing performed in step SK28 of FIG. 77, as shown in FIG. 79, first, it is determined whether or not the limit reaching number is not 2 (step SK61). Here, if the limit reaching number is not 2 (step SK61; YES), proceed to step SK62, perform main game state 3 and 4 lever processing, then finish main game state 5 lever processing and return. On the other hand, if the lever processing limit reaching number is 2 (step SK61; NO), the process advances to step SK63 to determine whether or not the condition device group B number is m (m is a predetermined numerical value). Here, if the conditional device group B number is m (step SK63; YES), an additional lottery is performed during the limit, and it is determined whether or not the winning number is 0 (non-winning) (winning) (step SK65) . Here, if the winning number is not 0 (step SK65; NO), the process proceeds to step SK66, and 200 is added to the ending G number counter (counter for managing the set number of games in the ending game state). On the other hand, if the condition device group B number is not m at step SK63 (step SK63; NO), and if the winning number is 0 at step SK65 (step SK65; YES), the process proceeds directly to step SK67.

At step SK67, it is determined whether or not the AT number counter exceeds 2,400. Here, when the AT number counter exceeds 2400 (step SK67; YES), the process proceeds to step SK69, and when the AT number counter does not exceed 2400 (step SK67; NO), the process proceeds to step SK68. At step SK68, it is determined whether the advantageous section clear counter is 1 or not. Here, if the advantageous zone clear counter is not 1 (step SK68; NO), the main game state 5 lever processing is terminated and the process returns, and if the advantageous zone clear counter is 1 (step SK68; YES), the process proceeds to step SK69. move on. At step SK69, 1 is stored in the ending G number counter. After that, 1 is stored in the limit end flag ((step SK70), the main game state 5 lever processing is ended, and the process returns.

In the advantageous section flag management all-stop processing performed in step SK7 of FIG. 76, as shown in FIG. 80, all-stop processing for each game state is first performed (step SK81). In this game state-by-game state all-stop processing, the main game state 5 all-stop processing described later is performed as one processing. After completion of the all-stop processing for each game state, it is determined whether or not the limit reaching number is 1 (step SK82). Here, if the limit reaching number is 1 (step SK82; YES), the process proceeds to step SK83 to perform limit determination processing, which will be described later. After that, the all-stop processing for each game state is terminated and the process returns. On the other hand, if the limit reaching number is not 1 at step SK82 (step SK82; NO), the all-stop processing for each game state is terminated and the game returns.

In the main game state 5 full stop processing performed in the advantageous section flag management full stop processing of step SK81 in FIG. 80, as shown in FIG. counter) is decremented by 1 (step SK101). Next, it is determined whether or not the wait reservation counter after subtraction is 0 (step SK102). Here, if the wait reservation counter after subtraction is 0 (step SK102; YES), the process proceeds to step SK103 and 5 is saved as the main game state number. Then, p (predetermined numerical value) is stored in the standby performance number at game start (number for managing the type of standby performance at game start) (step SK104), and the process proceeds to step SK105. On the other hand, if the decremented wait reservation counter is not 0 at step SK102 (step SK102; NO), the process proceeds to step SK105 without performing steps SK103 and SK104.

At step SK105, 1 is subtracted from the ending G number counter. Then, it is determined whether or not the ending G number counter is 0 (step SK106). Here, if the ending G number counter is 0 (step SK106; YES), the process proceeds to step SK107 to determine whether the limit reaching number is 2 or not. Here, if the limit reaching number is 2 (step SK107; YES), proceed to step SK108, store 1 in the advantageous section clear counter, and then proceed to step SK110. On the other hand, if the limit reaching number is not 2 at step SK107 (step SK107; NO), the process proceeds to step SK109 to perform state transition processing (processing for transitioning the game state), and then proceeds to step SK110. If the ending G number counter is not 0 at step SK106 (step SK106; NO), the process proceeds directly to step SK110. In step SK110, clear processing (processing for clearing predetermined data used in AT) at the time of full stop during AT is performed, and the main game state 5 full stop processing is completed.

In the limit determination process performed at step SK83 in FIG. 80, as shown in FIG. 82, first, 1 is added to the limit reaching number (step SK121). Next, it is determined whether or not the main game state number is any one of 3 to 5 (step SK122). Here, if the main game state number is any one of 3 to 5 (step SK122; YES), proceed to step SK123 to store the value of the ATG number counter in the ending G number counter. The ATG number counter is a counter that manages the number of games played during the AT, and is set to, for example, "20" when the AT is set (including resetting). is decremented by one.

Next, the value of the remainder obtained by dividing the value of the ending G number counter by 20 is stored in the wait reservation counter (step SK124). Then, it is determined whether or not the wait reservation counter is 0 (step SK124). Here, if the wait reservation counter is 0 (step SK125; YES), the process proceeds to step SK126, and q (predetermined ) is stored (step SK104), and the process proceeds to step SK107. On the other hand, if the wait reservation counter is not 0 at step SK125 (step SK125; NO), the process proceeds to step SK128. If the main game state number is not one of 3 to 5 at step SK122 (step SK122; NO), the process proceeds directly to step SK127.

At step SK127, 5 is saved as the main game state number, and after saving, the process proceeds to step SK128. At step SK128, an ending G number lottery (a lottery for determining the number of games to be set for the ending game state) is performed. Next, the lottery result (the value of the number of games) corresponding to the winning number in the ending G number lottery is acquired (step SK129). Then, the lottery result is added to the value obtained by multiplying the value of the AT stock counter (counter for managing the number of charges described above) by 20 (step SK130). Subsequently, the addition result at step SK130 is added to the ending G number counter (step SK131), and 5 is saved as the main game state number (step SK132). Then, unnecessary variables and the like are cleared (step SK133), the limit determination process is terminated, and the process returns.

<<Fifth Embodiment>>
A slot machine according to the fifth embodiment (hereinafter also referred to as "slot machine of the fifth embodiment") will be described below with additional reference to FIGS. 83 to 95. FIG. Characteristic portions of the fifth embodiment of the slot machine will be mainly described below. The features described below are not limited to the application of the slot machine of the fifth embodiment, but can be similarly applied to other embodiments. It should be noted that the slot machine of the fifth embodiment has a basic configuration common to or similar to that of the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment described above, and a description thereof will be omitted. Further, each control process such as the winning combination determination process and the reel control process described in the slot machine 1 can be applied to the slot machine of the fifth mode in the same manner or by partially changing the processing contents. The characteristic configurations of the second to fourth slot machines described above can also be applied to the fifth slot machine in the same manner or with partial modifications.

<Basic configuration>
Before describing the characteristic portions, the basic construction of the fifth embodiment slot machine (the construction particularly relevant to the description of the characteristic portions) will be briefly described. Although illustration is omitted, the slot machine of the fifth form has three reels (corresponding to the reels 3a to 3c described above) and a start lever (start lever 25 described above) operated when all the reels are started to rotate. ), left, middle, and right three stop switches (corresponding to the above-described stop switches 26a to 26c) for receiving a stop operation for individually stopping the rotation of each reel, and a game for production It has sub-buttons that are operated when performing a game or when displaying gaming machine information. In addition, the slot machine of the fifth embodiment has three control boards as main control boards: a main control board, a sub-main control board, and a sub-sub control board (the above-described main control board 60, sub-main control board 70A, and sub-sub corresponding to the control board 70B). The main control board controls the acceptance of operations on the start lever and the stop switch, and the sub-main control board or the sub-sub control board controls the acceptance of operations on the sub-buttons.

Each stop switch has a button-like operation receiving portion that retracts when the player pushes it by hand and returns to its original state by spring force or the like when the player releases his hand. is pressed), the contacts of the electric circuit are closed to switch from the OFF state to the ON state, and when the pressing operation is released (the hand is released), the contacts are opened to switch from the ON state to the OFF state. It has become. When each stop switch effectively accepts a stop operation and switches from an off state to an on state, the main control board (main control means) receives a stop operation from the sub-main control board (sub-main control means) each time. A control command (first, second and third stop acceptance commands) including information indicating is transmitted. By receiving these stop acceptance commands, the sub-main control board can identify that each stop switch has effectively accepted the stop operation (first, second and third stop operations).

In addition, after each stop switch effectively accepts a stop operation, when the stop operation is canceled and each stop switch switches from an on state to an off state, the main control board sends the received stop operation to the sub-main control board each time. A control command (stop operation release command) including information indicating that the operation has been released is transmitted. Specifically, a control command including information indicating that the first stop operation has been canceled (referred to as a "first stop operation cancel command"), a control command including information indicating that the second stop operation has been canceled (referred to as a "second stop operation release command") and a control command including information indicating that the third stop operation has been released (referred to as a "third stop operation release command") are transmitted. By receiving these stop operation release commands, the sub-main control board can identify that the stop operation effectively accepted by each stop switch has been released (that the player's hand has been released from the stop switch). can. Note that the first and second stop operation cancel commands may not be transmitted, and only the third stop operation cancel command may be transmitted.

Also, when the operation of the start lever is effectively accepted, various control commands corresponding to the instruction number command and effect group number command in the slot machine 1 (generally referred to as "lever operation acceptance") are sent from the main control board to the sub-main control board. (also referred to as "hour command") is transmitted. By receiving the lever operation acceptance command, the sub-main control board can recognize that the operation of the start lever has been validly accepted (that the start lever has been operated effectively).

The sub-button has, for example, a button-shaped operation receiving portion that retracts when the player presses it with a hand and returns to its original state by spring force or the like when the player releases the hand, and a cross-shaped operation receiving portion with an arrow. When the operation reception unit is pressed (pressed by hand), the contacts of the electric circuit are closed and switched from the OFF state to the ON state, and when the pressing operation is released (hand is released), the contacts are opened and turned ON. to the off state. When the sub-button is effectively operated, there are cases where the sub-control board (sub-control means) executes a predetermined effect process corresponding to the operation. Also, an effect process may be performed to prompt the player to operate the sub-buttons. Furthermore, by operating the sub-buttons in a predetermined procedure, it is possible to display an adjustment screen for adjusting the brightness of the screen of the image display unit and adjusting the volume of the speaker. Several characterizing portions of the slot machine of the fifth embodiment will be sequentially described below.

<Display effect>
The slot machine of the fifth form includes an image display unit DP (see FIGS. 83 to 92, etc.) corresponding to the image display screen 11a of the image display device 11 in the slot machine 1. In this image display unit DP, Various display effects are executed. In addition, the slot machine of the fifth embodiment includes an audio output section (not shown) corresponding to the speakers 15a, 15b, 44a, and 44b in the slot machine 1. From this audio output section, an effect corresponding to each display effect is generated. It is designed to output audio for Display effects executed in the slot machine of the fifth mode include, for example, conversation effects (also referred to as "dialogue effects"), caption effects (also referred to as "telop effects"), and expectations effects (also referred to as "object effects"). , GET effects, scene switching effects, and blackout effects.

・ Conversation production Conversation production includes, for example, people, animals, plants, robots, and monsters (regardless of whether they are real or fictitious) set as image characters of the game machine (collectively referred to as “characters”). , which is a presentation of conversation, in which a predetermined line spoken by each character is displayed on an image display unit such as a liquid crystal panel, and a sound is output from a sound output unit such as a speaker. Conversation production provides the player with content that is not related to the game result, such as introducing the character to the player, explaining the game method, or explaining the model and specifications of the game machine. It may play a role of informing the player, or it may play a role of informing the player of the content related to the game result, such as suggesting the degree of expectation for providing an advantageous game. Advantageous games are games that are more advantageous than usual for the player (for example, games during AT (including during ART) in slot machines, bonus games, games during jackpots in pachinko machines, probability fluctuation games, or time saving It refers to games, etc., hereinafter also referred to as “advantageous games”). In addition, the degree of expectation for providing an advantageous game is a game result (for example, AT Winning, AT addition winning, AT addition winning with many additions, bonus winning, advantageous bonus winning, rare role winning, pachinko machine jackpot winning, variable jackpot (more advantageous jackpot than non-variable jackpot) winning, 16 round jackpot ( It refers to the degree of expectation (reliability, certainty) for obtaining a jackpot with a large number of jackpots (e.g., winning). In the conversation effect, a predetermined display for conversation effect (also referred to as "conversation effect display") is displayed on the image display section DP at a predetermined timing. Note that display is not limited to two-dimensional (planar) image display, and includes three-dimensional (stereoscopic) display such as a hologram. The conversation effect may be a mode in which two or more characters talk to each other, or a mode in which one character speaks to the player. In short, at least a character image and dialogue characters corresponding to the character image satisfy the requirements for the conversation production.

The conversation effect display is a display related to the utterances of each character in a conversation between a plurality of characters, and includes display of characters and display that can be identified as characters. The display of a character is, for example, the display of a picture (picture) showing the appearance (appearance, mainly face) of a speaking character (also referred to as "character picture display"). On the other hand, the display that can be identified as characters is specifically, for example, the display of characters (also referred to as "word display") indicating the contents of the character's statement (also referred to as "words" in the conversation rendering display). In addition to the character image display and the dialogue display, the conversation effect display usually includes a display that allows identification of the character's name. The display that allows the name of the character to be identified is, for example, the display of characters indicating the name of the speaking character (also referred to as "character name display"). The conversation effect display includes a character image display, a dialogue display, and a character name display. However, the conversation effect display composed of the character image display and the dialogue display may be provided without including the character name display. As specific examples of the conversation effect display, the first conversation effect display KD1 is shown in FIG. 83(A), and the second conversation effect display KD2 is shown in FIG. 83(B).

The first conversation effect display KD1 includes a character picture display KG1 that displays the appearance of the character CH1, a character name display KN1 that displays the name of the character CH1 ("Kenji"), and a dialogue of the character CH1 ("It's nice weather today."). and a dialogue display KS1 for displaying "Dane"). In the dialogue display KS1, a frame-shaped image indicating a certain range ("range KW1 is also displayed together with the words. Similarly, the second conversation effect display KD2 includes a character picture display KG2 that displays the appearance of a character CH2 different from the character CH1, a character name display KN2 that displays the name of the character CH2 ("Pamela"), and a character display KN2 that displays the character CH2. and a dialogue display KS2 for displaying a dialogue by CH2 (“It’s okay to take it easy”). In the dialogue display KS2, the range image KW2 is also displayed.

In the first conversation effect display KD1, a character image display KG1, a character name display KN1, a dialogue display KS1, and a range image KW1 are displayed as display components constituting the first conversation effect display KD1, and are displayed in a predetermined manner during one game. They are displayed in a predetermined area of the image display section DP at the same timing. Similarly, in the second conversation effect display KD2, the character image display KG2, the character name display KN2, the dialogue display KS2, and the range image KW2 are displayed during one game as display components constituting the second conversation effect display KD2. is displayed in another predetermined area of the image display unit DP (for example, an area that does not overlap with the area where the first conversation image KG1 is displayed) at another predetermined same timing. As a modification example, for example, in the first conversation effect display KD1, the character image display KG1 and the character name display KN1 are displayed first, and then (for example, after 0.2 seconds), the range image KW1 and the dialogue display KS1 are displayed. The display timing may be slightly different between the display components, such as This point also applies to the second conversation rendering display KD2.

Regarding the timing at which the conversation effect display is displayed, a predetermined switch controlled by the main control means (for example, a bed switch, a start lever, a stop switch, etc., collectively referred to as "main side switch") is operated. An arbitrary timing triggered by the event (display timing) can be appropriately set as the display timing (display start timing) of the conversation effect display. For example, during one game, when the operation of the start lever is validly accepted, a predetermined timing (at the time of lever operation acceptance) after the start lever accepts the operation (also referred to as "when lever operation is accepted") The first conversation effect display KD1 may be displayed on the image display unit DP at the same timing as or at the timing when a predetermined time has passed since the receipt of the lever operation. Also, during the same one game, when any of the three stop switches effectively accepts the first stop operation, the time point when the first stop operation is validly accepted (when the first stop operation is accepted) At a predetermined timing thereafter (at the same timing as when the first stop operation is accepted or when a predetermined time has passed since the first stop operation is accepted), the second conversation effect display KD2 is displayed on the image display section DP. You may do so. Further, when the first conversation effect display KD1 to the second conversation effect display KD2 are displayed at the timing when the third stop operation is accepted, the operation of the bet switch for starting the next game is accepted or the start lever is operated. When the reception is performed, the first conversation effect display KD1 to the second conversation effect display KD2 displayed on the image display section DP are erased, and the bet switch for starting the next game is turned off. When the operation is accepted or the operation of the start lever is accepted and the first conversation effect display KD1 to the second conversation effect display KD2 are erased, all the voices of the lines output from the audio output unit are still output. If not, the first conversation effect display KD1 to the second conversation effect display KD2 on the image display section DP are erased, but the voice of the dialogue may be output to the end. However, if an effect that you want the player to pay attention to, such as a rare role announcement or freeze, or a new conversation effect is selected by accepting the operation of the start lever in the next game, the voice of the dialogue will be output at the timing after the start lever operation is accepted. discontinued. With such a configuration, even a player who wants to advance the game quickly can understand the content of the presentation. Needless to say, the voice of the lines may be erased together with the erasing of the first conversation effect display KD1 to the second conversation effect display KD2 on the image display section DP.

As the timing of displaying the conversation effect display, any timing triggered by the operation of the sub-button controlled by the sub control means (display trigger) can be set as the display timing of the conversation effect display. For example, during one game, an image prompting the player to operate the sub-button (for example, an image combining the image of the sub-button and the characters "PUSH") is displayed on the image display section DP. Triggered by valid operation of the sub-button according to the display (including the case where the sub-button is validated by being operated once, and the case where it is validated by being operated a predetermined number of times in a row). As a result, at a predetermined timing after the sub button is operated (also referred to as "when the sub button is operated") (the same timing as when the sub button is operated or when a predetermined time has elapsed since the sub button was operated) The first conversation effect display KD1 and the second conversation effect display KD2 may be displayed on the image display section DP. In addition, as the timing at which the conversation effect display is displayed, in the case of a pachinko machine, for example, the timing at which a predetermined time has passed since the game ball entered the starting hole (also referred to as "starting hole winning time"). It can be set as the display timing of the effect display.

During one game, there are cases where no conversation effect display is displayed, only one display is displayed, and a plurality of displays are displayed. The difference in the number of conversation effect displays displayed during one game may be irrelevant to the game result, or the game result may differ depending on the difference in the number. For example, the degree of expectation for providing an advantageous game may be higher when two or more conversation effects are displayed than when only one conversation effect display is displayed during one game. Whether or not the conversation effect display can be displayed, the type of conversation effect display to be displayed (for example, the type of dialogue in the dialogue display), the number, the display timing, etc. , Determined based on the results of internal lottery (for example, whether or not a rare role is won), other lottery results such as AT lottery and AT extra lottery (based on meeting any other predetermined conditions may be determined by When a plurality of conversation effect displays are displayed, only one conversation effect display is displayed at most per one display trigger.

For example, in a case where the first conversation effect display KD1 and the second conversation effect display KD2 are displayed during one game, when the first conversation effect display KD1 is displayed with the start lever being operated, the first conversation effect display KD1 is displayed. 2 conversation effect display KD2 is displayed after any one of the three stop switches has effectively accepted the first stop operation. That is, the second conversation effect display KD2 is not displayed before the first stop operation is effectively accepted (it may be displayed). As a result, it is possible to increase the interest in the game by making the degree of expectation for providing an advantageous game different depending on, for example, when the conversation effect display is displayed. In addition, by making it possible to display up to one per one display opportunity, it is possible to prevent the player from misunderstanding the opportunity when the conversation effect display is displayed or to confuse a plurality of displayed conversation effect displays. It becomes possible to

Three or more conversation effect displays may be displayed on the image display section DP during one game. For example, the first conversation effect display KD1 is displayed when the start lever operation is accepted, and the second conversation effect display KD2 is displayed when the first stop operation is accepted. When one of the stop switches effectively accepts the second stop operation, a predetermined timing after the second stop operation is accepted (the same timing as when the second stop operation is accepted or the second stop operation A third conversation effect display (not shown) is displayed at a timing when a predetermined time has elapsed from the reception time), and when the remaining one stop switch effectively receives the third stop operation, the third stop switch is displayed. At a predetermined timing after receiving the third stop operation (the same timing as when receiving the third stopping operation or timing when a predetermined time has passed since receiving the third stopping operation), the fourth conversation effect display (not shown) is displayed. may be displayed. The character in the third conversation effect display and the character in the fourth conversation effect display may be characters different from the character CH1 and the character CH2, or may be the same character.

When a plurality of conversation effect displays are displayed on the image display portion DP during one game, the previously displayed conversation effect display is erased from the image display portion DP even if the later displayed conversation effect display is displayed. It will continue to be displayed without being hidden (hidden). For example, in the above example, the first conversation effect display KD1 that was displayed earlier is not hidden even if the second conversation effect display KD2 is displayed, and continues to be displayed. is displayed, the first and second conversation effect displays KD1 and KD2 are not hidden and are continuously displayed. Furthermore, after that, even if the fourth conversation effect display is displayed, the first to third conversation effect displays are displayed without being hidden at that time. In this way, the previously displayed conversation effect display is continuously displayed even if the later displayed conversation effect display is displayed, thereby simultaneously displaying a plurality of conversation effect displays during one game. It is possible to display them on the image display unit DP so that the display periods of the conversation effect displays partially overlap each other. As a result, it is possible to obtain an effect such that the image display section DP looks lively with a plurality of conversation effect displays. In addition, when the player is likely to feel tired due to the low possibility of obtaining an advantageous game result for the player (for example, during a non-advantageous section), the plurality of conversation effect displays are reduced to one. By displaying them throughout the game, it is possible to direct the player's attention to the conversation effect display and reduce the player's fatigue. Also, the degree of expectation for imparting an advantageous game may differ depending on which trigger the conversation effect display is displayed, and in this case, the player can be interested in the display timing of the conversation effect. , it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In the conversation effect display, what is the content of the dialogue of the character (for example, the contents of the dialogue display KS1 in the first conversation effect display KD1 and the contents of the dialogue display KS2 in the second conversation effect display KD2)? However, the game result may differ depending on the contents of the lines. For example, in the case where the content of the dialogue display KS2 is "It's okay to be carefree" (see FIG. 83(B)) and the case where it is "Really true" (see FIG. 84), in either case It may be set so that it does not affect the game result at all, or it may be set so that the degree of expectation for providing an advantageous game is higher in the latter case than in the former case. Also, the contents of the lines may be changed when the sub-button is operated. In addition, as cases where the dialogue content changes due to the operation of the sub button, there are cases where the dialogue is displayed due to the operation of the sub button (the dialogue display is started), and after the dialogue is displayed, the sub button is displayed. There may be a case where the content of the dialogue changes when the button is operated. If the content of the dialogue changes when the sub-button is operated after the dialogue is displayed (output of the dialogue voice at the same time), the sub-button operation (operation acceptance) must be enabled before the dialogue has ended. Alternatively, the operation of the sub-button may be enabled after the voice of the dialogue ends. If sub-button operation is enabled while the dialogue has not ended, if the sub-button is operated during the dialogue, the dialogue being output will be interrupted and a new dialogue will be output. This specification is preferred by players who want to know quickly. Also, when the operation of the sub-button is enabled after the voice of the dialogue ends, the dialogue is not interrupted.

In addition, the characters of the dialogue display in the conversation effect display may always have the same font (font and style), the same size (size), and the same color. The colors and the like may be different. Further, the degree of expectation for providing an advantageous game may differ depending on the difference in font, size, color, and the like. For example, as serif display, either one or both of the outline (outline) of the character and the area inside the outline are displayed in blue, in addition to the mode in which the color is normal (for example, black or white). (also referred to as "blue serif display") and a red display mode (also referred to as "red serif display"), in which case red serif display is better than blue serif display. It is also possible to increase the degree of expectation for awarding an advantageous game.

As an example, in FIG. 85A, the character Kenji's line "It's nice weather today, isn't it?" , shows an example of red serif display in which the outline of the character is red (the area inside the outline is white). In this example, the size of characters displayed in red serifs is made larger than the size of characters displayed in blue serifs. suggesting to those In the red serif display, not only the character size of the serif display but also the character size of the character image display and the character size of the character name display may be increased. That is, in the red serif display, one or two or all of the character size of the serif display, the character size of the character name display, and the character size may be larger than those of the blue serif display (characters, etc.). It is also possible to change only the color of , and keep the font size, etc. the same). When a plurality of conversation effect displays are displayed during one game, one type of size and font is used for the dialogue display characters in the conversation effect display that is displayed first (for example, the first conversation effect display KD1). As for the dialogue display characters in the second and subsequent conversation effect displays (eg, the first conversation effect display KD1), there may be a plurality of modes of different sizes and fonts.

When multiple conversation effect displays with different expectations for imparting an advantageous game are displayed during one game, such as blue dialogue display and red dialogue display, the conversation effect display with the higher expectation is displayed later. is displayed from (it is also possible to provide a case where it is displayed first). Therefore, when a plurality of conversation effect displays are displayed during one game, the conversation effect display that is displayed first (for example, the first conversation effect display KD1) may be displayed in normal colors or in colors with a low degree of expectation. Dialogue display is easy to display, and in the second and subsequent conversation effect displays (for example, the second conversation effect display KD2), the dialogue display is likely to be displayed in highly anticipated colors. In the case of the blue serif display and the red serif display, for example, the blue serif display is displayed when the operation of the start lever is accepted, and the red serif display is displayed when the first stop operation is accepted. It should be noted that a case may be provided in which the red serif display with a relatively high degree of expectation is displayed so as to be superimposed on the blue serif display with a relatively low degree of expectation. In the case of superimposed display, part or all of the characters displayed in blue serifs may be hidden by red serifs (see FIG. 84(B)), or the characters displayed in blue serifs should not be hidden. Red serif display may be superimposed (see FIG. 85(A)). Note that when the second conversation effect display KD2 is displayed after the first conversation effect display KD1, the color indicating the degree of expectation of the second conversation effect display KD2 corresponds to the degree of expectation of the first conversation effect display KD1. Never display a color that is less expected than the color shown. This is also applied when the third conversation effect display and the fourth conversation effect display are displayed. never fall below. This is because, after first displaying the high-expectation red serif display in the first conversation effect display KD1, and then displaying the low-expectation blue serif display in the second conversation effect display KD2, how much do you expect? It prevents it from becoming difficult to understand whether there is a degree. It should be noted that there is no problem in displaying the normal mode dialogue display in the second conversation effect display KD2 after displaying the red dialogue display in the first conversation effect display KD1 because it does not cause confusion for the player. In addition, when conversation effects occur before and after the ready-to-win effect in a pachinko machine, the expectation level of the conversation effect display displayed after the ready-to-win effect is lower than the expectation level of the conversation effect display displayed before the ready-to-win effect. good too. This is because expectations are raised step by step due to the presence of reach effects. For example, before the ready-to-win effect, the player is interested in whether or not the game will be ready-to-win. Therefore, when the red lines of the conversation effect are displayed at this stage, the player expects whether or not the game will be ready-to-win. On the other hand, since players are interested in whether or not they will win a big win after the ready-to-win effect, if the blue dialogue display of the conversation effect appears at this stage, the player expects whether or not they will win a big win. Since the targets to be expected are different in this way, it is possible to provide an effect configuration that is easy to understand even if the degree of expectation drops before and after the ready-to-win effect. The characters displayed in the conversation production before and after the reach production may be the same character, or the same character may be displayed in a different manner (for example, different costumes and facial expressions). , or another character.

Note that the colors (colors other than the normal colors) of characters and the like in the serif display are not limited to blue and red. For example, in addition to blue serif display and red serif display, green serif display in which characters and the like are green, pattern serif display in which characters and the like are in a specific pattern (for example, a pattern that symbolizes a game machine maker), A rainbow serif display may be provided in which characters and the like are colored in rainbow colors. Then, the degree of expectation for providing an advantageous game may be increased in the order of blue dialogue display<green dialogue display<red dialogue display<pattern dialogue display<rainbow dialogue display. At that time, in the case of the dialogue display with the highest degree of expectation (in this example, the rainbow dialogue display), it may be a fixed effect (for example, showing AT fixed, bonus fixed, jackpot fixed, etc.) with 100% expected level.

Dialogue display in the conversation effect display is usually composed of words and sentences in characters that the player can understand. However, it may be composed of characters whose meaning cannot be understood, for example, characters in an ancient language, garbled characters, figures, symbols (▽, ●, *), and the like. When dialogue display including characters whose meaning is incomprehensible is displayed, the degree of expectation for providing an advantageous game increases compared to the case where dialogue display composed of characters whose meaning is understandable is displayed. You may do so. In addition, a character string (sentence) in dialogue display may be displayed in one line (see FIG. 83), or may be displayed over two or more lines with line breaks (consisting of two or more sentences). including) (see Figure 84).

Both the range image KW1 in the first conversation effect display KD1 and the range image KW2 in the second conversation effect display KD2 have the shape of a so-called balloon, but the shape of the range image is not limited to such a shape and is arbitrary. can be in the shape of The shape of the range image may be always the same, or may be different depending on the game situation or the display timing of the conversation effect display. Then, depending on the difference in the shape of the range image, the degree of expectation for the game result or the like may differ. For example, there are cases where the range image is displayed in the shape of a balloon, and there are cases where the range image is displayed in the shape of an arrow, and the latter case is more advantageous than the former case. You may make it increase. Instead of displaying such a range image, the characters of the serif display may be displayed in an uncovered state (not surrounded by a frame or the like).

In addition, the color, pattern, etc. of the area inside the outline of the range image may always be the same, or may be different depending on the game situation or the display timing of the conversation effect display. Then, depending on the difference in color, pattern, etc. of the area inside the outline, the degree of expectation for providing an advantageous game may differ. For example, in addition to the aspect in which the area inside the outline of the range image is displayed in normal color, the aspect in which it is displayed in blue (this is also included in the blue serif display) and the aspect in which it is displayed in red (this is also included in the red serif display) (included in the display), the degree of expectation for providing a more advantageous game may be increased in the mode displayed in red rather than in the mode displayed in blue.

As an example, in FIG. 84(A), for the character Kenji's dialog display, the area inside the outline of the range drawing is displayed in blue, and for the character Pamela's dialog display, the area inside the range drawing is shown shows an example of red serif display with . Note that the colors of the area inside the outline of the range image are not limited to blue and red. For example, the area inside the outline of the range image is green (this is also included in the green serif display), a specific pattern pattern (also included in the pattern serif display), and a rainbow color (this are also included in the rainbow serif display) may be provided. Further, in the example of FIG. 84(A), a case may be provided in which the red serif display is displayed so as to overlap the blue serif display.

The character image display in the conversation effect display may always be the same for the same character, or may be different even for the same character depending on the game situation or the display timing of the conversation effect display. Further, the degree of expectation for providing an advantageous game may differ depending on the mode of character image display. For example, in the case where the character image KG1 in the first conversation effect display KD1 is displayed with the hat on and without the hat, the character image KG1 is displayed with the hat on. The degree of expectation for providing an advantageous game may be higher in the mode in which the game is played than in the mode in which the game is not played.

When the conversation effect display is displayed on the image display portion DP, a different type of effect display (different image) from the conversation effect display may be displayed on the same image display portion DP. In such a case, the layer function installed in the graphic software used for image creation can be used to render the conversation effect display and another effect display on separate layers. For example, when an image composed of moving images or still images (also referred to as a “background image”) is displayed so as to occupy substantially the entire area within the screen of the image display unit DP, a partial area of the background image is displayed. When it is desired to display the conversation effect display so as to overlap with the background image, the conversation effect display can be drawn on a layer on the front side (front side closer to the player) than the layer on which the background image is drawn. By doing so, even if the conversation effect display is displayed over the background image, it is possible to sufficiently ensure the visibility of the conversation effect display. When displaying a plurality of conversation effect displays, each conversation effect display may be rendered on separate layers.

If an error occurs while the conversation effect display is being displayed on the image display section DP, an error notification display for notifying the occurrence of the error may be displayed on the image display section DP. In this case, the error notification display is drawn on a layer closer to the viewer than the layer on which the conversation effect display is drawn, and is displayed so as to overlap the conversation effect display. As an example, FIG. 85(B) shows an example in which an HP error notification display for notifying the occurrence of an HP error is displayed so as to overlap the conversation effect display. In this example, the HP error notification display hides the dialogue display of the conversation effect display, making it impossible to visually recognize the content. In this way, when the conversation effect display and the error notification display are simultaneously displayed on the image display unit DP, the error notification display is displayed so as to overlap the dialog display of the conversation effect display, and the content of the dialog display becomes invisible (the dialog It is also possible to provide a case where an error notification display is displayed so that the contents of the display can be visually recognized). In addition to the occurrence of various errors described in the description of the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment, the error notification display may be performed when a communication error or door opening error occurs. There are times such as when a warning or lower tray full error occurs. Also, although it is not an error, there is a reel rotation stop suggestion image as a notification effect for the player in the slot machine. This is an effect in which "Please stop the reels" is displayed on the image display unit when the reels have been rotated for a predetermined time (for example, one minute). Even when the reel rotation stop suggestion image is displayed, it is displayed in front of the conversation effect display (the layer on the front side), so the conversation effect display is difficult to see (it may not be visible at all or only part of it may be visible). ). Therefore, since the characters "Please stop the reels" are displayed in an easy-to-understand manner, the player's attention is effectively drawn. The reel rotation stop suggesting image may be erased when a stop operation is accepted for one of a plurality of reels being rotated, or erased when a stop operation is accepted for all reels. You may In addition, even if a button related to volume change is accepted during the game (while the reels are spinning in the case of a slot machine, or fluctuating in the case of a pachinko machine), the volume change image is displayed in front of the conversation effect display. A modified image is displayed. The volume change image is a meter display that indicates the level of the volume, and the display ends when the decision operation or time elapses after the volume change, and the conversation effect display becomes visible again.

A conversation effect display may be displayed on the image display portion DP while an assist effect is displayed on the image display portion DP. As an example, FIG. 86 shows a state in which a conversation effect display is displayed while a push-order navigation effect display (particularly, a push-order navigation effect display for notifying the pressing order) is displayed on the image display section DP. . In the case of this example, as shown in FIG. 86(A), a push-navigation effect display for notifying the pressing order of "middle left and right" from the first stop operation to the third stop operation is displayed in the lower area of the image display section DP. When it is displayed, the character Kenji's conversation effect display is displayed. At this time, Kenji's conversation effect display is displayed in an area above the display area of the push-navigation effect display so as not to overlap the push-navigation effect display. Further, as shown in FIG. 86(B), after the reception of the first stop operation, a push-navigation effect display for informing the pressing order of the "right and left" from the second stop operation to the third stop operation is displayed at the bottom of the image display section DP. When displayed in the area of , a conversation effect display of the character Pamela is displayed. At this time, Pamela's conversation effect display is displayed in an area above the display area of the push-navigation effect display so as not to overlap the push-navigation effect display.

Thus, when the conversation effect display is displayed on the image display part DP while the assist effect is displayed on the image display part DP, the conversation effect display is displayed so as not to overlap the push navigation effect display. More specifically, while the dialogue display and character name display in the conversation effect display are displayed without overlapping the push navigation effect display, part of the character image display (for example, the body and hands of the character) It may be displayed overlapping with the push navigation effect display. In that case, for example, the conversation effect display is drawn on the back layer (rear side away from the player), and the push-navigation effect display is drawn on the front layer, thereby ensuring the visibility of the push-navigation effect display. It is designed to be It should be noted that a case may be provided in which a part of the dialogue display and the character name display in the conversation effect display is displayed so as to overlap with the push navigation effect display. Even in that case, for example, the conversation effect display is drawn on the back layer and the push navigation effect display is drawn on the front layer, so that the visibility of the push navigation effect display is ensured. preferably. 86(A) and (B), the lines of the conversation effect display ("It seems to be good to press according to the navigation in the pressing order", "Follow the navigation") are the contents of the lines in the conversation effect display. The case where the content is related to is exemplified. In addition to this, the contents of the game method include, "It seems to be hot when you draw a watermelon in the special zone", "Push from the left when normal", "Follow the navigation during AT", "Normal" Various contents can be used, such as "If a UFO appears somewhere in the background image, chance".

When the conversation effect display is displayed on the image display unit DP, the conversation effect sound is output from the sound output unit in synchronization with the display timing (display start timing). The conversation effect sound is basically the same as the contents of the character's lines in the conversation effect display. For example, if the content of the dialogue display KS1 in the first conversation presentation display KD1 is "It's nice weather today, isn't it?" On the other hand, a case may be provided in which a voice having contents different from the content of the character's lines in the conversation effect display is output as the conversation effect sound. For example, if the content of the dialogue display KS1 is unclear, such as "*↓●//tsuwog◇#", an intelligible conversation production voice of "Today is a good day" is output. You may make it Then, when the contents of the lines in the conversation effect display and the contents of the conversation effect voice are different, the degree of expectation for providing an advantageous game may be increased compared to the case where both contents match.

・ Subtitle effect Subtitle effect (also called “telop effect”) is, for example, a character that appears in a background image (moving image) speaks (it can be a statement during a conversation with another character or a soliloquy), and the contents of the statement are displayed. It is a production that makes the characters that indicate are displayed like telops that appear on the screen during television broadcasting or subtitles in movies. The subtitle effect mainly plays a role of informing the player of the content related to the game, such as suggesting the progress of the game, etc., but it also plays the role of informing the player of the content unrelated to the game. good too. In the subtitle effect, a subtitle effect display for subtitle effect is displayed on the image display section DP at a predetermined timing. Also, the subtitle effect may play a role of informing the player of the content related to the game result, such as suggesting the degree of expectation for providing an advantageous game. Advantageous games are games that are more advantageous than usual for the player (for example, games during AT (including during ART) in slot machines, bonus games, games during jackpots in pachinko machines, probability fluctuation games, or time saving Games, etc. (collectively referred to as “advantageous games”) In addition, the degree of expectation for providing an advantageous game means that the probability of executing an advantageous game or permitting the execution of an advantageous game increases. (Including the case of 100%) game results (e.g., AT wins in slot machines, AT add-on wins, add-on wins with a large AT add-on, bonus wins, advantageous bonus wins, rare role wins, pachinko machine jackpot wins, The degree of expectation (reliability, accuracy) for obtaining a variable probability jackpot (a jackpot that is more advantageous than a non-variable jackpot) winning, a 16-round jackpot (a jackpot with many jackpots) winning, etc. In the subtitle production, A subtitle effect display for subtitle effect is displayed on the image display section DP at a predetermined timing.

The subtitle effect display is a display related to the utterances of characters appearing in the background image, and includes a display that can be identified as characters. Specifically, the display that can be identified as characters is, for example, the display of characters (also referred to as “telop display”) indicating the contents of the character's statement (corresponding to the dialogue in the conversation effect display). Note that characters do not necessarily have to be displayed in the background image when the subtitle effect display is displayed. The subtitle effect display is drawn on a layer on the front side (front side closer to the player) than the layer on which the background image is drawn. Therefore, even if the subtitle effect display is displayed superimposed on the background image, the visibility of the subtitle effect display (especially the telop display) is sufficiently ensured. As an example of subtitle effect display, a first subtitle effect display JD1 is shown in FIG. 87(A), and a second subtitle effect display JD2 is shown in FIG. 87(B).

The first subtitle effect display JD1 shows the content of the statement (“It looks like a good weather and a chance!”) of the character CH1 appearing in one scene in the background image HG1 displayed on the image display section DP during one game. It includes a telop display JT1. As described above, the first subtitle effect display JD1 includes a telop display JT1, and the display indicating the name ("Kenji") of the character CH1 (referred to as "character name display" as in the conversation effect display) is Not included. The second subtitle effect display JD2 is another utterance content of the character CH1 appearing in a different scene in the background image HG1 displayed on the image display section DP during the same game ("The weather is getting bad. !”) is included. Thus, the second subtitle effect display JD2 includes the telop display JT2 and does not include the character name display (a subtitle effect display including the character name display may be provided). In addition, in the telop display, the name of the character may be displayed as part of the content of the statement. The name display in that case is considered to be different from the character name display.

Regarding the timing at which the subtitle effect display is displayed, any timing triggered by the operation (display trigger) of a predetermined switch controlled by the main control means such as a bed switch, start lever, stop switch, etc. The display timing (display start timing) of the effect display can be appropriately set. For example, during one game, when the operation of the start lever is effectively accepted, a predetermined timing after the time when the operation of the start lever is accepted effectively (at the time of accepting the lever operation) Alternatively, the first subtitle effect display JD1 may be displayed on the image display section DP at a point in time when a predetermined time has passed since the receipt of the lever operation. Also, during the same one game, when any of the three stop switches has effectively accepted the first stop operation, the time point when the first stop operation is validly accepted (when the first stop operation is accepted) The second subtitle effect display JD2 may appear on the image display section DP at a predetermined timing thereafter (simultaneously with the reception of the first stop operation or when a predetermined time has passed since the reception of the first stop operation). . In addition, in the case of a pachinko machine, the timing at which the subtitle effect display is displayed is, for example, when a predetermined time has passed since the game ball entered the starting hole (also referred to as "starting hole winning time" or "variation start time"). From the timing of the point in time, the situation where the SP reach effect is displayed after the reach is established, or the time when the big prize opening is opened (also referred to as "at the time of opening the big prize opening" or "at the start of the jackpot") The timing at which a predetermined period of time has passed, or the timing at which a predetermined period of time has passed after the game ball has won a prize (also referred to as ``at the time of winning a prize'') is set as the display timing of the subtitle effect display. can do.

During one game, there are cases where none of the subtitle effects are displayed, only one is displayed, and a plurality of subtitles are displayed. Whether or not to display the subtitle effect display, the type of subtitle effect display to be displayed (for example, the type of content of the telop display), the number, the display timing, etc. , Determined based on the results of internal lottery (for example, whether or not a rare role is won), other lottery results such as AT lottery and AT extra lottery (based on meeting any other predetermined conditions may be determined by Note that even if the results of the internal lottery are the same, it is easier to display the subtitle effect display during the advantageous section than during the non-advantageous section. When a plurality of subtitle effect displays are displayed, a plurality of subtitle effect displays may be displayed per display trigger. For example, in a case where the first subtitle effect display JD1 and the second subtitle effect display JD2 are displayed during one game, the first subtitle effect display JD1 is displayed when the operation of the start lever is accepted. Before any one of the stop switches effectively accepts the first stop operation, the second caption effect display JD2 may be displayed (up to one can be displayed per one display trigger). also possible).

Three or more subtitle effect displays may be displayed on the image display section DP during one game. For example, the first subtitle effect display JD1 is displayed when the start lever operation is accepted, and the second subtitle effect display JD2 is displayed when the first stop operation is accepted. Triggered by the valid acceptance of the second stop operation by one of the stop switches, a predetermined timing (the second A third subtitle effect display (not shown) is displayed at a predetermined timing (simultaneously with the reception of the stop operation or after a predetermined time has passed since the reception of the second stop operation), and the remaining one stop switch is turned on. Triggered by the valid acceptance of the third stop operation, a predetermined timing after the valid acceptance of the third stop operation (when the third stop operation is accepted) (simultaneously with the acceptance of the third stop operation or A fourth subtitle effect display (not shown) may be displayed at a predetermined timing after a predetermined time has passed since the operation was accepted.

In addition, the ratio of the case where the subtitle effect display is displayed triggered by the reception of the operation of the start lever (including the case of 0% and 100%, the same applies hereinafter), and the ratio of the subtitle effect display triggered by the reception of the third stop operation Comparing the ratio of the case where it is displayed, the ratio of the case where the subtitle effect display is displayed with the reception of the third stop operation as a trigger is relatively higher. This takes into consideration the player's psychology that he wants to concentrate on operating the stop switch after operating the start lever. It becomes easy to pay attention to the performance display. In addition, when the background image is a one-shot effect (a effect that starts and ends during one game), the subtitle effect display is rarely displayed when the first stop operation reception or the second stop operation reception is received. When the image is a continuous effect (a effect that continues over a plurality of games), the display of the caption effect display increases when the first stop operation reception or the second stop operation reception is received. For example, comparing the case where the subtitle effect display is displayed when the background image is a single effect (case H1) and the case where the subtitle effect display is displayed when the background image is a continuous effect (case H2) In the case H2, the rate at which the subtitle effect display is displayed triggered by the reception of the first stop operation is relatively higher than in the case H1. This is because the continuous effect plays a role of notifying the player of a predetermined game result (such as winning an AT) that is of great interest to the player, and in order to draw attention to the content of the effect, the content of the effect is often progressed each time the stop operation is received. Therefore, it is easy to provide an opportunity to display the subtitle effect display according to the progress of the continuous effect with the reception of the first stop operation and the reception of the second stop operation as a trigger. By displaying the subtitle effect display, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the content of the continuous effect (the progress of the effect).

When a plurality of subtitle effect displays are displayed on the image display part DP during one game, the previously displayed subtitle effect display is erased from the image display part DP when the subsequent subtitle effect display is displayed. is (hidden). That is, the previously displayed subtitle effect display is erased from the image display section DP before the subsequent subtitle effect display is displayed (including substantially the same timing). For example, in the above example, the previously displayed first subtitle effect display JD1 is hidden before the second subtitle effect display JD2 is displayed, and the second subtitle effect display JD2 is displayed after the third subtitle effect display JD2 is displayed. The subtitle effect display is hidden before the subtitle effect display is displayed, and the third subtitle effect display is hidden before the fourth subtitle effect display is displayed. In this way, the previously displayed subtitle effect display is hidden before the subsequently displayed subtitle effect display is displayed, so that the subtitles can be displayed appropriately in accordance with the progress of the game or the background image. Subtitle production can be performed while switching the production display. Therefore, it is possible to execute subtitle effects with a good tempo that are consistent with the progress of the game and the background image.

The subtitle effect display may be hidden after a predetermined time has elapsed after being displayed, or may be hidden when a predetermined switch is operated. , may be hidden when the next subtitle effect display is displayed. For example, the subtitle effect display that is displayed when the operation of the start lever is accepted can be hidden when one of the stop operations from the first stop operation to the third stop operation is accepted, or when the stop operation is accepted. Regardless, when a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed from the start of display, it is hidden, or if the next subtitle effect display is displayed even before the first stop operation is accepted, that subtitle display effect is displayed. It may be hidden immediately before it is displayed. As a specific example, in a case where the first subtitle effect display JD1 is displayed when the operation of the start lever is received, and the second subtitle effect display JD2 is displayed when the third stop operation is received, the third After receiving the stop operation, the first subtitle effect display JD1 may be hidden first, and then the second subtitle effect display may be displayed.

The subtitle effect display may be displayed in accordance with the movement of characters appearing in the background image (for example, movements of the mouth, eyes, and hands). For example, the background image HG1 (moving image) starts to be displayed at the same time as the lever is operated, and when a predetermined time (for example, 1 second) has passed since the start, the character CH1 in the background image HG1 moves his mouth (scene A). ), the first subtitle effect display JD1 may be displayed in accordance with the scene A. In order to match the timing of the scene A with the display timing of the first subtitle effect display JD1, the following method may be employed. As a premise, the sub-main control means receives the results of internal lottery, etc. performed on the main control means side when lever operation is received, and selects whether or not to execute the background image and subtitle effect display and the display content, and as a result, the background It is assumed that the display of the image HG1 and the display of the first subtitle effect display JD1 have been decided.

In that case, first, the sub-main control means transmits a command (referred to as command A) for transmitting the determination result to the sub-sub-control means. Upon receiving the command A, the sub-sub control means reads out the image file of the background image HG1 and starts displaying the background image HG1 on the image display unit DP, and also reads out the image file of the first subtitle effect display JD1, The first subtitle effect display JD1 is displayed on the image display section DP in accordance with the timing of the scene A (for example, determined by the number of frames up to the scene A, the frame rate, etc.). Incidentally, a counter for timing may be set and the timing of the scene A may be measured by this counter. The counter may be set by sub-main control means or by sub-sub control means. When the counter is set by the sub-main control means, it may be set when the command A is transmitted, or when the sub-sub control means reads out the image file of the background image HG1, the command (referred to as command B) is sub-mainly controlled. This command B may be set at the timing when it is received by the sub-main control means. When a predetermined time has elapsed after the counter has been set, a command (referred to as command C) for transmitting the arrival of the time is transmitted to the sub-sub control means. The subtitle effect display JD1 is displayed on the image display section DP. It should be noted that the subtitle effect display is drawn on a layer on the front side (the front side closer to the player) than the layer on which the background image is drawn. By doing so, even if the subtitle effect display is displayed superimposed on the background image, it is possible to sufficiently ensure the visibility of the subtitle effect display (especially the telop display).

In the subtitle effect display, what kind of content is the content of the telop display (for example, the content of the telop display JT1 in the first subtitle effect display JD1 and the content of the telop display JT2 in the second subtitle effect display JD2)? However, the degree of expectation for providing an advantageous game may differ depending on the content of the telop display. For example, when the content of the telop display JT2 is "The weather is getting cloudy!" In certain cases, it may be set so that the degree of expectation for providing an advantageous game is not affected in either case, or the expectation for providing an advantageous game is higher in the latter case than in the former case. You can set it to be higher. Also, the content of the telop display may be changed when the sub button is operated. In addition, there are dialogue effects and subtitle effects as effects in which the display contents change by accepting the operation of the sub-button, but it is relatively more likely that the display contents will change by accepting the operation of the sub-button in the conversation effect than in the subtitle effect. There are many. Further, in a pachinko machine, there are cases where conversation effects and subtitle effects are displayed during one variation, and in such a configuration, expectations of conversation effects and subtitle effects do not have to be related. For example, a dialogue effect is displayed in red lines, while a subtitle effect is displayed in blue characters. In particular, it is more preferable to display the conversation effect before the ready-to-win effect and display the subtitle effect after the ready-to-win effect, because the expected targets are different. In addition, it is also conceivable that the first subtitle effect display JD1 is white characters, and the second subtitle effect display JD2 is red characters, so that the degree of expectation increases. Furthermore, it is also conceivable that the second subtitle effect display JD2 is in red characters, while the third subtitle effect display is in white characters, thereby lowering expectations. This aspect is preferably used as a subtitle effect when the background image becomes a failure display aspect. For example, when directing whether or not to grant advantageous benefits (for slot machines, such as bonus winning or AT winning, etc., for pachinko machines, directing whether or not it will be a reach or whether it will be a big hit) ), in order to increase the sense of anticipation, the subtitle effect (for example, the letters “Let’s go!”) are displayed in red letters, but after that, the effect of whether or not to grant this advantageous privilege is wrong. If the subtitle effect (for example, the character "lost") in the scene showing is still displayed in red, it will be difficult to understand whether it is lost or revived, so this character "lost" is displayed in white. .

In addition, the characters of the telop display in the subtitle effect display may always have the same font (font and style), the same size (size), and the same color. The colors and the like may be different. Further, the degree of expectation for providing an advantageous game may differ depending on the difference in font, size, color, and the like. For example, as a telop display, the color of either or both of the outline (outline) of the character and the area inside the outline is displayed in blue in addition to the normal color (black or white). A mode (also referred to as "blue telop display") and a mode of displaying in red (also referred to as "red telop display") may be provided, in which case red telop display is more advantageous than blue telop display. It is also possible to increase the degree of expectation for giving a game.

As an example, in FIGS. 88(A) and (B), the telop display JT1 "Looks like a chance in fine weather!" As for "It's a perfect sunny day in Japan!!", an example of a red telop display in which the area inside the outline of the characters is red is shown. In this example, the size of the characters displayed in red telop is made larger than the size of the characters displayed in blue telop, and the style of the characters displayed in red telop is changed. This suggests to the player that there is a high degree of expectation for giving the game. In addition, when multiple subtitle effects are displayed during one game, the characters of the telop display in the first subtitle effect display shall be of one size and font type, and the subtitle effect displayed after the second. Regarding the characters of the telop display in the display, there may be a plurality of modes with different sizes and fonts. When displaying multiple subtitle effect displays with different expectations for imparting an advantageous game, such as blue telop display and red telop display, during one game, the subtitle effect display with the higher expectation is displayed later. may be displayed from

The colors of characters and the like (colors other than normal colors) in the telop display are not limited to blue and red. For example, in addition to the blue telop display and the red telop display, a green telop display in which characters and the like are green and a rainbow telop display in which the characters and the like are colored in rainbow may be provided. Then, the degree of expectation for providing an advantageous game may increase in the order of blue telop display<green telop display<red telop display<rainbow telop display. At that time, in the case of the telop display (in this example, the rainbow telop display) with the highest degree of anticipation, it is possible to provide a confirmation effect with 100% expectation (for example, suggesting AT confirmation, bonus confirmation, jackpot confirmation, etc.). In the case of a telop display that is displayed in a specific scene of the background image, it may be arranged such that characters and the like are not displayed in a specific color. For example, when a telop display of content related to lyrics is displayed in a scene in which a character sings on the background screen, the rainbow telop display may not be displayed. In addition, the telop display (rainbow telop display), which is a fixed effect, is set to disappear when the player operates a predetermined switch or the like after the display starts, and is set to disappear from the display start. It is not hidden due to the passage of time. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused by disappearance of the fixed effect due to the passage of time. Note that when the demonstration screen is displayed on the image display unit DP, the rainbow telop display that has been displayed until then may be hidden. Telop display of other colors (for example, blue telop display) may be hidden for the reason that a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of display.

The telop display in the subtitle effect display is usually composed of words and sentences in characters that the player can understand. However, it may be composed of characters whose meaning cannot be understood, for example, characters in an ancient language, garbled characters, figures, symbols (▽, ●, *), and the like. When a telop display including characters whose meaning cannot be understood is displayed, the degree of expectation for providing an advantageous game increases compared to the case where a telop display composed of characters whose meaning is understandable is displayed. You may do so. In addition, the character string (sentence) in the telop display is basically displayed in one line without a line break, but if it is displayed over two or more lines with a line break (when it is composed of two or more sentences including) may be provided.

Characters of telop display in subtitle effect display are often displayed in a bare state (a state not surrounded by a frame or the like), but may be displayed in a state surrounded by a frame or the like. As an example, FIG. 89(A) shows a mode in which characters of the telop display JT2 "The weather is getting worse!" are surrounded by a frame (referred to as a "background frame") JW1. The exemplified background frame JW1 has a rectangular outline, and the area inside the outline is decorated with a predetermined pattern. The form of the background frame (the shape of the outline and the color and pattern of the area inside the outline) is not limited to this form, and can be any form (including the form without the outline). The form of the background frame may always be the same, or may be different depending on the game situation or the display timing of the conversation effect display. Then, depending on the difference in the mode of the background frame, the degree of expectation for providing an advantageous game may differ. For example, the area inside the outline of the background frame is displayed in normal color, blue (this is also included in blue telop display), and red (also red telop display). (included in the display) may be provided so that the degree of expectation for providing an advantageous game may be increased when the red color is displayed rather than when the blue color is displayed.

If an error occurs while the subtitle effect display is being displayed on the image display section DP, an error notification display for notifying the occurrence of the error may be displayed on the image display section DP. In this case, the error notification display is drawn on a layer closer to the viewer than the layer on which the subtitle effect display is drawn, but is displayed so as not to overlap the subtitle effect display. As an example, in FIG. 89B, the HP error notification display for notifying the occurrence of the HP error is displayed in the image display section DP so that it does not overlap the subtitle effect display JD2. An example displayed in the upper area is shown. In this way, when the subtitle effect display and the error notification display are simultaneously displayed on the image display unit DP, the error notification display is displayed without overlapping the subtitle effect display (however, the background image (which may include characters) ) overlaps the error notification display and at least part of it may not be clearly visible), ensuring the visibility of the contents of the telop display (at least part of the telop display may be hidden by the error notification display) possible). The type of error when performing error notification display is the same as the content described in the explanation of the conversation effect. Depending on the type of error, there are cases where an error is reported on the full screen (PAM error, error on the sub-control side, etc.), so in this case the telop display may not be visible. Also, even if the above-mentioned reel rotation stop suggestion image is displayed, it does not overlap with the subtitle effect, so the visibility of the subtitle effect is guaranteed (however, the background image (which may include a character) overlaps the error notification display and at least (Some parts may not be clearly visible). Since the reel rotation stop suggestion image is not an error, the moving image related to the subtitle effect is continuously executed. For this reason, it is difficult to grasp the progress of the rendering unless the character portion of the subtitle rendering is visible. With such a configuration, it is possible to make the player grasp the contents of the presentation while calling attention to the player. Also, even if the volume change image is displayed due to the volume change button being accepted during the game (during reel rotation for slot machines, or fluctuating for pachinko machines), the text portion of the subtitle effect is still visible. It is possible.

There is a case where the subtitle effect display is displayed on the image display portion DP while the assist effect is displayed on the image display portion DP. As an example, FIG. 90A shows a mode in which a caption effect display is displayed while a push navigation effect display (push order navigation effect display) is displayed on the image display portion DP. In the case of this example, when the push-navigation effect display for informing the pressing order of "middle left and right" from the first stop operation to the third stop operation is displayed in the lower area of the screen of the image display unit DP, the second stop operation is displayed. 1 subtitle effect display JD1 is displayed. The first subtitle effect display JD1 is displayed so as to overlap the push-navigation effect display in the lower region of the screen, which is the same position as the region where the push-navigation effect display is displayed. At this time, the first subtitle effect display JD1 is drawn and displayed on a layer on the back side (rear side away from the player) from the layer on which the push navigation effect display is drawn. Therefore, while part of the characters of the telop display JT1 is hidden by the push-navigation effect display and cannot be seen, the visibility of the push-navigation effect display, which is of great interest to the player, is ensured. Note that the subtitle effect display may be displayed in an area different from the display area of the push navigation effect display so that it does not overlap with the push navigation effect display (however, the background image (which may include characters) is the same as the push navigation effect display. overlap, at least part of which may not be clearly visible). Further, when the push-navigation effect display is displayed, the subtitle effect display may not be displayed. In particular, when the subtitle display effect is displayed with the reception of the third stop operation as a trigger, it is preferable to display the subtitle effect display after the push-navigation effect display is hidden. By doing so, the player can concentrate on the operation of the stop switch while paying attention to the navigation contents while the push-navigation effect display is being displayed, and after the operation is completed and the push-navigation effect display is hidden, the subtitles are displayed. It is possible to pay attention to the performance display. In addition to the mode of notifying the pressing order of "middle left and right", the pressing navigation effect display includes a mode of notifying the pressing order of "left center right", a mode of notifying the pressing order of "right center left", etc. There are multiple types of modes.

When the subtitle effect display is displayed on the image display unit DP, the subtitle effect sound is output from the sound output unit in synchronization with the display timing (display start timing). The subtitle effect sound is basically the same as the content of the telop display in the subtitle effect display. For example, if the content of the telop display JT2 in the second subtitle effect display JD2 is "It's a perfect sunny day in Japan!!", the corresponding subtitle effect sound will be the sound content of "It's perfect!". On the other hand, a case may be provided in which a sound having contents different from the contents of the telop display in the subtitle effect display is output as the subtitle effect sound. For example, as shown in FIG. 90(B), if the contents of the telop display JT2 are garbled characters such as "▲/%*p·n↑→?a>>!" Alternatively, another comprehensible subtitle effect sound such as "It's a perfect nihonbare desu" may be output. When the content of the telop display and the content of the subtitle effect sound in the subtitle effect display are different, the degree of expectation for providing an advantageous game may be increased compared to the case where both contents match. Also, if the telop display is meaningless, such as garbled characters, the degree of expectation may be increased compared to the case where the telop display is understandable. If the telop display is garbled or meaningless, the character size, font, color, etc. of the telop display are displayed in a manner in which the expectation of providing an advantageous game is low. In this way, the subtitle effect display is configured such that although the characters are garbled, the degree of expectation for the characters is low, making it unclear whether the degree of expectation is high or low. can be made Then, it is possible to surprise a player who has the impression that the degree of expectation for such subtitle effect display is low by the gap between the actual degree of expectation and the high degree of expectation. In addition, when a telop display with meaningless content is displayed, operating a sub-button may eliminate garbled characters and change the display content to an understandable display content. In addition, a typographical effect such as a garbled telop display may be installed. For example, normally, when the content of the telop display JT2 in the second subtitle effect display JD2 is "It's a perfect sunny day in Japan!!" "It's a perfect sunny day in Japan!!" In this case as well, the size, font, color, etc. of the characters in the telop display are displayed in such a manner that the degree of expectation is higher than that of the normal telop display, and the degree of expectation that gives an advantageous game is low. It is possible to give a surprise by the gap between the degree and the height.

As described above, the dialogue effect display and the caption effect display are similar in that they both include the display of characters related to the character's utterances. As an effect display in which characters are displayed, when a predetermined effect such as a continuous effect is started, the title characters of the effect are displayed, or an image that is not related to the flow up to that time is inserted in the background image. Some characters are displayed in the production (cut-in production). However, these effects are different from conversation effects and caption effects in that the contents of the displayed characters are not directly related to the characters' utterances. Comparing the conversation effect display and the subtitle effect display, there are more kinds of modes (colors and sizes of characters, etc.) suggesting the difference in the degree of expectation for imparting an advantageous game in the conversation effect display than in the subtitle effect display. Also, the dialogue effect display is displayed in the upper area of the screen of the image display section DP rather than the subtitle effect display. As a general trend, the conversation effect display is relatively often displayed when the start lever operation is accepted, and the caption effect display is relatively often displayed when the third stop operation is accepted. For example, if there are a total of 80 types of conversation effect displays and a total of 70 types of subtitle effect displays, approximately 75% of the 80 types of conversation effect displays are displayed when the start lever operation is accepted, and 70 types are displayed. Approximately 80% of the subtitle effect display is displayed with the reception of the third stop operation as a trigger. In addition, the number of characters of the telop display in the subtitle effect display is relatively larger than the number of characters of the dialog display in the conversation effect display. For example, if the average value of the number of characters in each dialogue display of 80 types of dialogue effect display is N, the average value of the number of characters in each telop display of 70 types of caption effect display is about 1.5×N. be. Conversation effect display is relatively often displayed during normal (normal game state) such as during non-AT, and caption effect display is relatively often displayed during continuous effect execution or freeze. . For example, approximately 70% of the 80 types of dialogue effect displays are displayed during normal operation, and approximately 75% of the 70 types of subtitle effect displays are displayed during continuous effect execution or freeze.

- Expectation Level Effect The expectation level effect is a performance that suggests to the player the degree of expectation, etc. that gives an advantageous game. In the expectation level effect, an expectation level effect display for the expectation level effect is displayed on the image display section DP at a predetermined timing. The expectation level effect display is, for example, a display whose display mode can be changed according to the level of expectation for imparting an advantageous game, and includes a display object (also referred to as "object") having a predetermined form. FIG. 91 shows an expectation effect display OD1 as an example of the expectation effect display.

The degree-of-expectation effect display OD1 includes a heart-shaped object OJ1 displayed in a predetermined area of the image display section DP. The display mode of the object OJ1 differs according to the degree of expectation for providing an advantageous game. Specifically, the color of the area inside the outline of the object OJ1 changes according to the degree of expectation. In this example, the color of the area inside the outline of the object OJ1 is displayed in blue (also referred to as “blue object display”), in addition to the normal color (for example, white), and yellow. (also referred to as "yellow object display"), a mode displayed in green (also referred to as "green object display"), a mode displayed in red (also referred to as "red object display"), a mode displayed in blue (" (also referred to as "blue object display"), a mode in which a specific pattern is displayed (also referred to as "pattern object display"), and a mode in which rainbow colors are displayed (also referred to as "rainbow object display"). The order of blue object display<yellow object display<green object display<red object display<pattern object display<rainbow object display is set so that the degree of expectation for providing an advantageous game increases. In addition, in the case of the expectation effect display with the highest degree of expectation (in this example, the rainbow object display), it is set as a fixed effect with 100% expectation (for example, AT fixed, bonus fixed, jackpot fixed, etc.) there is

Regarding the timing at which the expectation effect display is displayed, any timing triggered by the operation of a predetermined switch controlled by the main control means such as a bed switch, start lever, stop switch, etc. (display trigger) The display timing (display start timing) of the expectation effect display can be set as appropriate. For example, a predetermined timing after receiving the lever operation, a predetermined timing after receiving the first stopping operation, a predetermined timing after receiving the second stopping operation, or a predetermined timing after receiving the third stopping operation. The predetermined timing can be used as the display timing of the expectation effect display. In the case of a pachinko machine, the timing at which the expectation effect display is displayed is, for example, the timing at which a predetermined time has passed since the starting opening was won, the timing at which a predetermined time has passed since the opening of the main winning opening, Alternatively, it is possible to set the timing when a predetermined time has passed since the winning of the big prize opening as the display timing of the expectation effect display.

FIG. 91 illustrates a mode in which the degree-of-expectation effect display OD1 and the second caption effect display JD2 are simultaneously displayed on the image display section DP. In this way, the expectation effect display and the caption effect display may be displayed on the image display unit DP at the same time, or may be displayed separately so that the display times do not overlap. Comparing the expectation degree effect display and the caption effect display, the number of stages (for example, the number of colors) indicating the difference in the degree of expectation is larger in the expectation degree effect display than in the subtitle effect display. This is because the subtitle effect display also has the function of increasing the degree of understanding of the progress of the game, etc. by the contents of the telop display, so the expectation effect display is mainly intended to notify the difference in expectations. This is because the number of stages showing the difference in expectations may be small compared to . In addition, the rainbow object display of the expectation effect display and the rainbow telop display of the subtitle effect display are common in that they both represent a fixed effect, but in the case of other colors, the same color does not always have the same level of expectation. do not have. For example, when comparing the blue object display of the expectation effect display and the blue telop display of the caption effect display, the blue telop display is set to suggest a higher degree of expectation than the blue object display. Note that the expectation effect display and the telop display may be superimposed, in which case the telop display is displayed in the front (the layer on the front side). Also, when the expectation effect display and the telop display are superimposed, it is difficult to understand if the colors are the same, so the same color may be avoided in the display.

Also, as an overall trend, the difference in the color of the expectation effect display is related to the difference in the internal lottery result (winning role) (for example, the red object display corresponds to winning a rare role). ), and the difference in color between the subtitle effect display and the conversation effect display is often related to the degree of expectation of winning in a lottery other than the internal lottery, such as an AT win or a jackpot. The form of the object in the subtitle effect display is not limited to the illustrated heart shape, and various forms are possible. For example, a balloon-shaped object may be provided in addition to the heart-shaped object. Alternatively, a chair-shaped object and a desk-shaped object may be provided, or a bottle-shaped object and a cup-shaped object may be provided. It should be noted that there are more types of telop display (types based on different telop contents) in subtitle effect display than types of objects (types based on difference in shape) in expectation level effect display. This is because, as described above, the subtitle effect display also has a function of increasing the degree of understanding of the progress of the game, etc., depending on the contents of the telop display. By increasing the types of telop display, it is possible to explain various game situations. In the case of FIG. 91, there is no aspect in which a particular pattern is used as the color of the characters, etc., in the subtitle effect display, but such an aspect may be provided. However, even if the characters of the telop are patterned, the player may not be able to visually recognize the pattern because the size of the characters is small. Therefore, when a pattern is used for characters or the like in the subtitle effect display, the expectation level effect display with the same pattern may be displayed on the image display section DP together with the subtitle effect display.

・ GET effect The GET effect is, for example, a game value (game medal) that is given when a push order role such as a small bell win is established in an information game (a game in which push navigation is performed) during AT. to the player. In the GET effect, a GET effect display for the GET effect is displayed on the image display section DP at a predetermined timing. The GET effect display is a display for appealing to the player to give the game value. As an example of the GET effect display, a GET effect display GD1 is shown in FIGS. 92(D) and 92(E).

The GET effect display GD1 is composed of strokes of characters "GET!" When the GET effect display is displayed on the image display unit DP, the GET effect sound is output from the sound output unit in synchronization with the display timing (display start timing). The GET effect sound is a sound for appealing to the player that the game value is given. The content may differ from the character content).

The execution timing of the GET effects (GET effect display GD1 and GET effect sound) will be described with reference to FIGS. 92 and 93. FIG. As shown in FIG. 92A, when the push-navigation effect display ND1 for notifying the pressing order of "middle left and right" is displayed on the image display unit DP, the first stop operation is accepted according to the push-navigation effect display ND1. Then, as shown in FIG. 92(B), the push navigation effect display ND1 is displayed on the image display section DP while changing to a mode informing of the pressing order of "left and right". Here, when the second stop operation is accepted according to the push-navigation effect display ND1, as shown in FIG. Displayed in Part DP. Furthermore, when the third stop operation is accepted (the operation part of the stop switch (the right stop switch in this example) that has accepted the third stop operation is pressed, and the stop switch is switched from the off state to the on state) ) The push navigation effect display ND1 is hidden.

After the push-navigation effect display ND1 is hidden, a game value is given (payout of game medals by a hopper or addition of credits) and a GET effect is executed. Specifically, when the third stop operation is canceled (the operation unit of the stop switch that receives the third stop operation is released, and the stop switch switches from the on state to the off state), the game Giving a value, outputting a GET effect sound, and displaying a GET effect display are started. In FIG. 93, these start timings are set substantially at the same time, but the start timings may be slightly shifted. The GET effect sound that has started to be output ends at a point before the point at which the giving of the game value ends. After the end of the output of the GET effect sound, the giving of the game value is finished, and the GET effect display is hidden after the time when the giving of the game value is finished. In this way, by delaying the display end timing of the GET effect display later than the output end timing of the GET effect sound and the end timing of the game value provision, the player is given the game value by listening to the GET effect sound. In addition, by watching the GET effect display after listening to the GET effect sound and after the game value is given, it is possible to reconfirm that the game value has been given, resulting in an exhilarating feeling. can be obtained.

In a game in which a GET effect is performed, a caption effect display may be displayed on the image display section DP upon receipt of the third stop operation. In FIG. 92(E), a second subtitle effect display JD2 (telop) is displayed in an area below the screen where the GET effect display GD1 is displayed in the image display section DP without overlapping the GET effect display GD1. It shows an example in which display JT2) is displayed. The subtitle effect display to be displayed when the third stop operation is received is displayed at the time when the GET effect display is hidden, that is, the subtitle effect is displayed before the time when the GET effect display is hidden. Preferably, the display of the display is started. By doing so, it is possible to direct the player's attention to the caption effect display immediately when the GET effect display is hidden. In the example of FIG. 93, the display start timing of the subtitle effect display is set to be positioned between the time when the game value addition ends and the time when the GET effect display disappears, but it is not limited to this. not something. For example, at an arbitrary timing within the period from the reception of the third stop operation to the time when the GET effect display is hidden (also referred to as a "suitable period for starting display of the subtitle effect"), or before the reception of the third stop operation The subtitle effect display may be started at a predetermined timing. As described above, when the third stop operation is accepted, the push navigation effect display disappears, the GET effect display is not displayed yet when the third stop operation is received, and the subtitle effect display is displayed when the third stop operation is received. or before that, or after the display of the GET effect display is started. The subtitle effect display that started to be displayed when the third stop operation was received or before it continues to be displayed even after the third stop operation is received, but the push navigation effect display is triggered by the reception of the third stop operation. disappears, the subtitle effect display can be clearly seen without being hidden by the push navigation effect display. Further, the GET effect display is displayed with the cancellation of the third stop operation as a trigger, but this GET effect display is originally displayed at a position not overlapping the subtitle effect display and disappears with the lapse of time. are also easier to see. Therefore, even if the push-navigation effect display is displayed or the congratulatory effect display (including the GET effect display) for improving the player's satisfaction is displayed, the player cannot understand the content of the telop display of the subtitle effect display. can be grasped.

・ Scene switching effect Scene switching effect is a display effect composed of multiple scenes that may be switched when the start lever or stop switch is operated (for example, the image display section DP Is displayed). Each scene is composed of a progress effect in which display contents change with the lapse of time, and a cyclic effect in which the same display contents are repeated after the progress effect is completed. The progress effect is mainly composed of moving images, and the circulation image is composed of moving images or still images. The scene switching effect may be configured as a one-shot effect, or may be configured as a continuous effect. As examples of scene switching effects, a first scene switching effect is shown in FIG. 94(A), and a second scene switching effect is shown in FIG. 94(B).

The first scene switching effect consists of four scenes from the first scene to the fourth scene, as shown in FIG. 94(A). A first scene is composed of a progress performance P1 and a cyclic performance L1, a second scene is composed of a progress performance P2 and a cyclic performance L2, a third scene is composed of a progress performance P3 and a cyclic performance L3, and a fourth scene is composed of a progress performance P3 and a cyclic performance L3. A scene is composed of a progress presentation P4 and a cyclic presentation L4. In the first scene switching effect, the progress effect P1 of the first scene starts to be displayed when the operation of the start lever is accepted. When a predetermined time (time T1) elapses without receiving the first stop operation after the display of the progress effect P1 is started, the display of the progress effect P1 is ended and the circulation effect L1 is started to be displayed. This cyclic effect L1 is continuously displayed until the first stop operation is accepted.

After that, when the first stop operation is validly accepted, the first scene is switched to the second scene with the acceptance as a trigger, and the progress effect P2 of the second scene starts to be displayed. Note that if the first stop operation is effectively accepted before the time T1 elapses after the progress effect P1 of the first scene has started to be displayed, the cyclic effect L1 is not displayed, and The scene is switched to the second scene, and the progress effect P2 of the second scene is started to be displayed. When a predetermined time (time T2) elapses after the display of the progress effect P2 is started without receiving the second stop operation, the display of the progress effect P2 is finished and the circulation effect L2 is started to be displayed. This cyclic effect L2 is continuously displayed until the second stop operation is accepted.

After that, when the second stop operation is effectively accepted, the second scene is switched to the third scene with the acceptance as a trigger, and the progress effect P3 of the third scene starts to be displayed. Note that if the second stop operation is effectively accepted before the time T2 elapses after the progress effect P2 of the second scene has started to be displayed, the cyclic effect L2 is not displayed and The screen is switched to the third scene, and the display of the progress effect P3 of the third scene is started. When a predetermined time (time T3) elapses without accepting the third stop operation after the display of the progress effect P3 is started, the display of the progress effect P3 is ended and the circulation effect L3 is started to be displayed. This cyclic effect L3 is continuously displayed until the third stop operation is accepted.

After that, when the third stop operation is effectively accepted, the third scene is switched to the fourth scene with the acceptance as a trigger, and the progress effect P4 of the fourth scene starts to be displayed. Note that if the third stop operation is effectively accepted before the time T3 elapses after the progress effect P3 of the third scene has started to be displayed, the cyclic effect L3 is not displayed, and the The screen is switched to the 4th scene, and the progress effect P4 of the 4th scene is started to be displayed. When a predetermined time (time T4) elapses without acceptance of a betting operation, a lever operation, a settlement operation, etc. (collectively referred to as "next game operation") for the next game after the display of the progress effect P4 is started, the time point at which the progress effect P4 has elapsed. , the display of the progress effect P4 ends and the circulation effect L4 starts to be displayed. This cyclic effect L4 is continuously displayed until the next game operation is received (after the start of display, it may be ended when a predetermined time elapses).

In the first scene switching effect, the display continuable time (time T2) of the progress effect P2 of the second scene that switches at the reception of the first stop operation, and the display continuation of the progress effect P3 of the third scene that switches at the reception of the second stop operation. Comparing the allowable time (time T3) and the allowable display continuation time (time T4) of the progress effect P4 of the fourth scene that is switched at the reception of the third stop operation, the time T4 is relatively longer than the times T2 and T3. set long. This is because after the first stop operation or after the second stop operation, the player concentrates on performing the next stop operation, making it difficult for the player to pay attention to the details of the progress effect. After the operation, since the stop operation is completed, the player can relax and easily pay attention to the content of the progress presentation. That is, by setting the time of the progress effect after the third stop operation to be relatively long, it is possible to increase the player's interest in the content of the progress effect after the third stop operation and improve the interest in the game. Become. Further, by relatively lengthening the time of the progress effect after the third stop operation, it becomes easier to suggest the game result or the like in the progress effect after the third stop operation. Such a tendency is not limited to a specific scene switching effect, but tends to extend to all of a plurality of types of scene switching effects. For example, if there are a total of 50 types of scene switching effects that are executed during the continuous production and 10 types of scene switching effects that are executed during the single-shot production, the total of 60 types of scene switching effects is determined. As a tendency (average value), the time T4 is set relatively longer than the times T2 and T3.

Also, in the first scene switching effect, the first scene is switched from the first scene to the second scene regardless of which one of the three stop switches on the left, middle and right receives the first stop operation. . Similarly, regardless of which stop switch receives the second stop operation, the second scene is switched to the third scene, and regardless of which stop switch receives the third stop operation, the third scene is switched to. Switch to the fourth scene. By doing so, the control processing in the sub-control means can be simplified. That is, every time each stop operation is accepted, the main control means transmits the first, second, and third stop acceptance commands to the sub-control means, and the sub-control means receives the first, second, and third stop commands according to these commands. You can know that the operation has been accepted. The first, second and third stop acceptance commands also contain information about which stop switch has been operated. However, in the first scene switching effect, the scene can be switched as long as the number of the stop reception command in one game is known without referring to the information. Therefore, it is possible to omit referring to information about which stop switch has been operated, thereby simplifying the processing for scene switching. In addition, regardless of the order in which the player operates the three stop switches during the game, the scene can be switched at an appropriate timing, so that the progress of the game and the content of the presentation can be matched. Consistency can be easily ensured. In addition, as long as it is known that it is a stop acceptance command, the sub control means can determine what number of the stop acceptance command it is based on the number of received stop commands. No information is required to indicate whether Therefore, as information to be included in each stop command, it is possible to omit the information indicating which stop operation is accepted. It is also possible to reduce the storage capacity.

The second scene switching effect is composed of two scenes from the first scene to the second scene, as shown in FIG. 94(B). The first scene is composed of a progress performance P11 and a cyclic performance L11, and the second scene is composed of a progress performance P12 and a cyclic performance L12. In the second scene switching effect, the progress effect P11 of the first scene starts to be displayed when the operation of the start lever is accepted. When a predetermined time (time T11) elapses after the display of the progress effect P11 is started until the third stop operation is accepted, the display of the progress effect P11 ends and the circulation effect L11 starts to be displayed. . This cyclic effect L11 is continuously displayed until the third stop operation is accepted. In addition, in the second scene switching effect, even if the first stop operation is accepted or the second stop operation is accepted, the scene is not switched with that as a trigger.

After the display of the circulation effect L11 is started, when the first stop operation and the second stop operation are accepted and then the third stop operation is effectively accepted, the first scene is switched to the second scene, and the second scene is switched to the second scene. The scene progress effect P12 is started to be displayed. Note that if the third stop operation is effectively accepted before the time T11 elapses after the progress effect P11 of the first scene has started to be displayed, the cyclic effect L11 is not displayed, and The scene is switched to the second scene, and the progress effect P12 of the second scene is started to be displayed. When a predetermined time (time T12) elapses after the display of the progress effect P12 is started without accepting the next game operation, the display of the progress effect P12 ends and the circulation effect L12 starts to be displayed. This cyclic effect L12 is continuously displayed until the next game operation is received (after the start of display, it may be ended when a predetermined time elapses).

In the second scene switching effect, switching from the first scene to the second scene does not occur regardless of which of the three stop switches on the left, middle and right receives the first stop operation. do not have. Similarly, the first scene is not switched to the second scene regardless of which stop switch receives the second stop operation. On the other hand, when the third stop operation is accepted, the scene is switched from the first scene to the second scene regardless of which stop switch has accepted the third stop operation. For example, when the middle stop switch receives the first stop operation or the second stop operation, the scene cannot be switched to the second scene, but when the middle stop switch receives the third stop operation, the scene is switched to the second scene. Also, when the middle stop switch receives the third stop operation, the scene is switched to the second scene, and when the left stop switch or the right stop switch receives the third stop operation, the scene is switched to the second scene. By doing so, the control processing in the sub-control means can be simplified. That is, it is possible to omit referring to the information about which stop switch has been operated, which is included in the first, second and third stop acceptance commands transmitted from the main control means to the sub-control means each time each stop operation is accepted. Since the scene can be switched by pressing, the processing for scene switching can be simplified. In addition, regardless of the order in which the player operates the three stop switches during the game, the scene can be switched at an appropriate timing, so that the progress of the game and the content of the presentation can be matched. Consistency can be easily ensured.

As described above, in the second scene switching effect, the scene is not switched when the first stop operation is accepted or the second stop operation is accepted. In this embodiment, there are other scene switching effects other than the first or second scene switching effects, but as a general trend, in the scene switching effect, the scene is switched when the third stop operation is received. When the scene is switched when the first stop operation or the second stop operation is accepted, the case where the scene is switched when the third stop operation is accepted is more likely to be the first stop operation or the second stop operation The rate of scene switching is relatively higher than that of scene switching triggered by reception (0% in the former case and 100% in the latter case). This is because after the first stop operation or after the second stop operation, the player concentrates on performing the next stop operation, making it difficult for the player to pay attention to the details of the progress effect. After the operation, since the stop operation is completed, the player can relax and can easily pay attention to the content of the progress presentation. That is, by setting a relatively high rate of scene switching triggered by the third stop operation, the player's interest in the content of the progress effect after the third stop operation is increased, and the interest in the game is improved. becomes possible. In addition, by setting a relatively high rate of scene switching triggered by the third stop operation, it becomes easier to suggest the game result in the progress effect after the third stop operation.

• Darkening effect The darkening effect is a display effect that makes the visibility of the display look lower. The darkening effect is executed, for example, when a predetermined effect display suggests a game result unfavorable to the player (for example, AT non-winning, bonus non-winning, AT additional non-winning, pachinko machine jackpot non-winning, etc.). . Further, the dark transition effect is often executed when the final scene of the continuous effect is displayed, but it can also be executed in a single effect. FIG. 95 shows an example of a dark effect.

FIG. 95(A) shows the display state of the image display section DP immediately before the dark effect is executed. In this example, in the image display section DP, the final scene display RD1 indicating the final scene of the continuous effect, the subtitle effect display JD3 having the telop display JT3 with the content "Will it be a storm tomorrow?" A first area RY1 indicating "Remaining 23G") and a second area RY2 indicating the name of the game state ("Decisive Battle Stage") are displayed. In the continuous effect, for example, moving images showing the content of the character CH1 challenging something are displayed over a plurality of games. In addition, the final scene display RD1 expresses that the character CH1, who failed the challenge, is bowing down, suggesting that the player has obtained a disadvantageous game result. Further, the audio output may be output at the start of the final scene display RD1, but the output of the audio may be terminated when the dark effect for the final scene display RD1 is performed. In such a configuration, it is possible to clearly indicate to the player that the game is over due to the lack of sound. Needless to say, an error sound is output when an error occurs in this state.

FIG. 95B shows the display state of the image display section DP when the dark effect is executed. In the darkening effect of this example, the final scene display RD1 is displayed so as to be darkened as a whole and the visibility is lowered. In addition, the visibility of the subtitle effect display JD3 is also lowered. On the other hand, in the first region RY1 and the second region RY2, the original brightness is maintained and the visibility is not lowered. By doing this, it is possible to impress the player that a game result that is disadvantageous to the player has been obtained, and at the same time, by ensuring the visibility of the information on the subsequent game, the contents of the information can be conveyed to the player. Clear notification is possible. A region (also referred to as a “non-darkening region”) in the image display section DP in which the visibility is not lowered even during the darkening effect is not limited to the first region RY1 or the second region RY2. In the case of a slot machine, the area for displaying the number of credits, the area for displaying the number of bets, the area for displaying the number of games played, the area for displaying the number of earned game values, the area for displaying sub effects such as mini games, etc. It can be a darkening area, and in the case of a pachinko machine, an area for holding display, an area for displaying variable patterns (so-called mini patterns) different from decorative patterns, an area for displaying the number of holds, and the variable hold It is possible to set an area indicating an icon or the like as a non-darkened area. It should be noted that the mini design is also referred to as the second design, and is a design that is always displayed even when the first design disappears due to a reach effect, etc., and represents the progress of the game. It is a pattern that allows the player to always understand the progress of the game.

Further, if a predetermined time has passed without the next game operation or the like being performed after the execution of the dark effect, the visibility of the final scene display RD1 may be further reduced (for example, it may become darker). good. By doing so, it is possible for the player to distinguish and recognize the darkening as a result of the continuous effect and the darkening due to the game not progressing so as not to misunderstand. Instead of reducing the visibility in two stages, the visibility may gradually decrease over time.

A layer structure may be used in order to reduce the visibility of the display in the dark effect. For example, the first layer for depicting the final scene display RD1 is arranged on the far side, the second layer for depicting the subtitle effect display JD3 is arranged on the front side, and the first region RY1 is arranged further on the front side. and a third layer for rendering the second region RY2 (the layer for rendering the first region RY and the layer for rendering the second region RY2 may be separated). During the dark effect, the fourth layer is arranged between the second layer and the third layer, and the process of reducing the brightness of the entire area of the fourth layer is performed, so that the final scene display RD1 and the subtitle effect display JD3 are displayed. It is possible to maintain the visibility of the first region RY1 and the second region RY2 while reducing the visibility.

Instead of reducing the brightness of the 4th layer, you can reduce the visibility by increasing the opacity of the 4th layer or by drawing many thin lines and fine patterns on the 4th layer. good. Instead of using layers, the visibility may be reduced by blurring the image of the final scene display RD1 using mosaic or the like. Further, the visibility may be lowered by lowering the brightness of the backlight of the image display section DP. In this case, power consumption can be reduced by lowering the luminance of the backlight. Also, in the example of FIG. 95B, the subtitle effect display JD3 with reduced visibility is displayed as it is, but it may be hidden during the dark effect.

If a game result advantageous to the player is obtained in the game during continuous production (for example, AT winning, bonus winning, AT additional winning, pachinko machine jackpot, etc.), advantageous game result in the final scene of continuous production In many cases, a display (also referred to as a “success display”) is displayed that suggests that a is obtained, and in that case, a dark transition effect is not performed. On the other hand, although an advantageous game result was obtained, a display (also referred to as a "failure display") suggesting that an unfavorable game result was obtained was once displayed, and then an advantageous game result was actually obtained. In some cases, a display (also referred to as a “resurrection display”) that suggests that it has been obtained is performed. In this case, a black effect may be executed while the failure display is being displayed. When a darkening effect is executed while the failure display is being displayed and then the resurrection display is displayed, the darkening effect is ended before the resurrection display is displayed. By doing so, the resurrection display can be displayed while ensuring visibility, so that the player can clearly recognize that an advantageous game result has been obtained.

In addition, an advantageous game result that is given when a failure display, a blackout effect, and a resurrection display (even if there is no blackout effect), and an advantageous game result that is given when a success display is performed without a resurrection display. In comparison, when there is a resurrection display, the game results are more advantageous (for example, winning in a special zone where AT is likely to be added, AT winning with a large number of initial games, jackpot with a large number of rounds on a pachinko machine, etc.) , probability variation jackpot where the jackpot probability becomes high probability) may be relatively increased. By doing so, even when a failure display or a dark effect is performed, it is possible for the player to continue to have a sense of expectation without being disappointed.

When the visibility is lowered due to the dark effect, for example, a sub button may be operated to display an adjustment screen for adjusting the amount of light (brightness) of the screen or the volume of the speaker. In that case, the visibility of the adjustment screen for the amount of light and volume is ensured even during the darkening effect. Further, when some error occurs during execution of the darkening effect, an error notification display may be performed to notify the occurrence of the error. In this case, the visibility of the error notification display is ensured even during the darkening effect. It should be noted that the dark transition effect can be executed in situations other than the continuous effect. For example, the stop operation of the stop switch may be performed in a pressing order different from the pressing order notified by the push-navigation effect (also referred to as "push order failure"). In this case, even when the pressing order fails in the first stop operation and when the pressing order fails in the second stop operation, it is possible to perform a blackening effect at the time when the pressing order fails. At that time, it is possible to set a non-darkening area in which the visibility does not deteriorate, as in the case of the darkening effect in the continuous effect.

<<Sixth embodiment>>
A slot machine according to the sixth embodiment (hereinafter also referred to as "slot machine of the sixth embodiment") will be described below with additional reference to FIGS. 96 to 109. FIG. Characteristic portions of the slot machine of the sixth embodiment will be mainly described below. The features described below are not limited to the slot machine of the sixth embodiment, but can be similarly applied to other embodiments. It should be noted that the slot machine of the sixth embodiment shares or resembles the basic configuration of the slot machine 1 of the above-described first embodiment, and the description thereof will be omitted. Further, each control process such as the winning combination determination process and the reel control process described in the slot machine 1 can be applied to the slot machine of the sixth embodiment in the same manner or by partially changing the processing contents. The characteristic configurations of the second to fifth slot machines described above can also be applied to the sixth slot machine in the same manner or with partial changes.

<Basic configuration>
Before describing the characteristic portions, the basic construction of the sixth embodiment of the slot machine (the construction particularly related to the description of the characteristic portions) will be briefly described. Although illustration is omitted, the slot machine of the sixth form has three reels (corresponding to the reels 3a to 3c described above) and a start lever (start lever 25 described above) operated when starting rotation of all the reels. ), and left, middle, and right three stop switches (corresponding to the above-described stop switches 26a to 26c) for receiving a stop operation for individually stopping the rotation of each reel. In addition, a max bet switch (corresponding to the above-mentioned MAX-BET switch 23) that is operated when betting game medals, and a settlement switch (the above-mentioned settlement switch) that is operated when settlement of bet or credited game medals (corresponding to the switch 27), and sub-switches that are operated when a game for effect is played or when game machine information is displayed. Furthermore, the slot machine of the sixth embodiment has three control boards as main control boards: a main control board, a sub-main control board, and a sub-sub control board (main control board 60, sub-main control board 70A, and sub-sub control board described above). corresponding to the control board 70B). Further, the slot machine of the sixth embodiment has an image display section corresponding to the image display screen 11a of the image display device 11 in the slot machine 1, and various display effects are executed in this image display section. ing.

Each stop switch has a button-like operation receiving portion that retracts when the player presses it by hand and returns to the original state by spring force or the like when the player releases the hand, similarly to the stop switch of the fifth embodiment. When the part is pressed (pressed by hand), the contacts of the electric circuit are closed and switched from the off (OFF) state to the on (ON) state, and when the pressing operation is released (hand is released), the contacts are closed. It is designed to open and switch from an on state to an off state. Each stop switch is provided with a stop switch lamp (corresponding to the stop switch lamps 514, 524, 525 described above) whose lighting mode, etc., changes according to the progress of the game, like the stop switch lamp of the second embodiment. (Also called "stop button lamp") is built in.

The max bet switch has a button-shaped operation receiving portion that retracts when the player presses it by hand and returns to its original state by spring force or the like when the player releases his hand. is pressed), the contacts of the electric circuit are closed to switch from the OFF state to the ON state, and when the pressing operation is released (the hand is released), the contacts are opened to switch from the ON state to the OFF state. It has become. In addition, the max bet switch incorporates a max bet switch lamp (corresponding to the above-mentioned MAX-BET switch display lamp 46a) whose lighting mode changes according to the progress of the game.

The settlement switch has a button-shaped operation reception part that retracts when the player pushes it by hand and returns to its original position by spring force or the like when the player releases his hand. ), the contacts of the electric circuit are closed to switch from the OFF state to the ON state, and when the pressing operation is released (the hand is released), the contacts are opened to switch from the ON state to the OFF state. It's becoming

The sub-switches have the same configuration and functions as the sub-buttons of the fifth embodiment. This sub-switch has a button-like operation receiving portion that retracts when the player presses it by hand and returns to its original state by spring force or the like when the player releases his hand, and a cross-shaped operation receiving portion with an arrow. When the receiving part is pressed (pressed by hand), the contacts of the electric circuit are closed and switched from the OFF state to the ON state, and when the pressing operation is released (hand is released), the contacts are opened and the ON state is changed. It is switched to OFF state.

The main control board controls the reception of operations for the start lever, stop switch, max bet switch, and settlement switch, while the sub-control board (sub-main control board or sub-sub control board). A start lever, a stop switch, and the like controlled by a main control board (main control means) are also collectively referred to as a "main switch." The max bed switch lamp is controlled by the main control board, and the stop switch lamp is controlled by the sub control board (sub control means). The lamp may be controlled by the main control board. Several characterizing portions of the slot machine of the sixth embodiment will be sequentially described below.

<Processing when the settlement switch or other switches are operated>
Details of processing when the settlement switch or other switches are operated will be described with reference to FIGS. 96 to 102. FIG. In this embodiment, the on/off state of each main switch operated by a player or the like is read by the main control board every predetermined time (for example, 2.235 milliseconds). processing. Also, the ON/OFF state of the sub-switch is read in the same interrupt processing executed by the sub-control board. In FIGS. 96 to 99, the timing of timer interrupt processing by the main control board is indicated by short arrows aligned on the time axis.

・When the settlement switch is operated alone FIG. 96 shows the timing at which the ON/OFF state of the settlement switch is switched and the timing at which the execution of settlement processing is started when the settlement switch is operated alone. In this example, as a result of reading the on/off state of the settlement switch in each timer interrupt process, the timer is set at the time when the settlement switch is switched from the off state to the on state (also referred to as "on operation time point"). Measurement of the elapsed time from the point in time is started. Then, when the ON state of the settlement switch continues for a preset predetermined time ("T01") or longer from the start of measurement, a predetermined flag (" is set. Next, a process for determining whether the settlement switch ON reception flag has been set is performed, and with this determination as a trigger, the settlement switch ON reception flag is cleared and the settlement processing is started. If the determination process is not performed, the settlement switch ON acceptance flag is cleared after a predetermined time (for example, in the next timer interrupt process).

The contents of the settlement process include settlement (refund) of bet game medals, and settlement (refund) of credited game medals. In addition, the 1-BET lamp, 2-BET lamp and 3-BET lamp (corresponding to the above-mentioned 1-BET display lamp 46bC, 2-BET display lamp 46bB and MAX-BET display lamp 46bA) for displaying the number of bets are turned off. , updates (subtracts) the number displayed in the credit amount display section (corresponding to the above-described accumulated number display lamp 46h) for displaying the credit amount. Furthermore, a control command including information indicating that the operation of the settlement switch has been validly accepted is transmitted to the sub control board. In response to this command, the sub-control board performs an effect corresponding to the settlement process. Specifically, for example, a predetermined sound (also referred to as “settlement sound”) corresponding to the settlement is output from the speaker, and a predetermined image (also referred to as “settlement image”) indicating that the settlement is being performed is displayed on the image display unit. display. Also, when the number of bets and the number of credits are displayed on the image display section, the displayed number of bets and the number of credits are updated (subtracted). In FIG. 96, the time from when the settlement switch is turned on until the settlement switch ON reception flag is set (also referred to as "clearance switch valid operation time") is indicated as T11. Strictly speaking, this clearing switch valid operation time T11 is different from the time from when the clearing switch is turned on until the start of the clearing process, but the difference is such a small amount of time that humans cannot perceive it ( several milliseconds). Therefore, hereinafter, the time from when the settlement switch is turned on until the settlement process is started is considered to be the same length as the settlement switch valid operation time T11.

Note that the settlement process is performed in response to the operation of the settlement switch when the settlement switch is operated during the period during which the settlement switch operation can be accepted effectively (also referred to as the "clearance operation acceptable period"). The settlement operation acceptable period is, for example, the time when one game ends (for example, when all reels stop and game medal payout processing ends) to the time when the next game starts (for example, when the start lever is operated). until the reel starts rotating). If the settlement switch is operated during a period other than the settlement operation acceptable period, the settlement process is not performed. For example, the settlement switch ON flag may not be set, or the determination of the flag may not be performed. In this example, the bet and credited game medals are settled by turning on the settlement switch once, but when the settlement switch is turned on once, the betted game medals are settled. is performed, and when the settlement switch is turned on again, settlement of the credited game medals may be performed. Further, when the settlement switch is turned on, the bet game medals are settled, and when the ON state is continued for a predetermined time (long-pressed), the credited game medals are settled.

When the Max Bet Switch Is Operated Alone FIG. 97 shows the timing at which the on/off state of the max bet switch is switched and the timing at which the bet process is started when the max bet switch is operated alone. In this example, as a result of reading the on/off state of the max bet switch in each timer interrupt process, the timer is set when the max bet switch switches from the off state to the on state (when the on operation is performed). Elapsed time measurement starts. Then, a predetermined flag indicating that the operation of the max bet switch has been effectively accepted when the on state of the max bet switch has continued for a preset predetermined time ("T02") or longer from the start of measurement. (also referred to as "max bet switch ON reception flag") is set. After that, a process of determining whether the max bet switch ON reception flag is set is performed, and with the determination as a trigger, the max bet switch ON reception flag is cleared and the bet process is started. It should be noted that if the determination process is not performed, the max bet switch ON reception flag is cleared after a predetermined time (for example, in the next timer interrupt process).

The contents of the betting process are as follows: from the credited game medals, the number corresponding to the number of bets immediately before operating the max bet switch (for example, if the number of bets immediately before is 0, 3, If the number of bets immediately before is 2, 1 game medal is betted. Also, the 1-bed lamp, the 2-bed lamp, and the 3-bed lamp are turned on, and the number displayed on the credit amount display section is updated (decremented). Further, it transmits a control command including information indicating that the operation of the max bet switch has been validly accepted to the sub-control board. In response to this command, the sub-control board performs an effect corresponding to the bet processing. Specifically, for example, a predetermined sound (also referred to as "bet sound") corresponding to the bet is output from a speaker. Further, when the number of bets and the number of credits are displayed on the image display section, the displayed number of bets (addition) and the number of credits (subtraction) are updated (subtracted). In FIG. 97, the time from when the max bet switch is turned on until the settlement switch ON reception flag is set (also referred to as "max bet switch valid operation time") is indicated as T12. For the same reason as the settlement switch valid operation time T11, the time from when the max bet switch is turned on until the bet process is started will be the same length as the max bet switch valid operation time T12. Consider.

In this example, when the operation of the max bed switch is effectively accepted, the 1st to 3rd bed lamps are turned on substantially simultaneously (including cases where there is a time difference of about several milliseconds that cannot be perceived by humans). On the other hand, the bet number displayed on the image display unit is updated one by one so that the update process can be visually recognized, and the bet sound is also output one by one so that the bet number can be identified by the sound. For example, when three game medals are bet according to the operation of the max bet switch, the 1 bet lamp, the 2 bet lamp and the 3 bet lamp, which have been turned off immediately before, are turned on substantially simultaneously. On the other hand, the number of displayed bets on the image display unit is incremented by one in the order of "BET: 0" → "BET: 1" → "BET: 2" → "BET: 3", and the bet sound is displayed. Three different audible sounds are output one by one, such as "pong" -> "pong" -> "pong". By lighting the 1st to 3rd bet lamps substantially at the same time in this manner, the player can be quickly notified that a bet has been made, so that the game can be progressed quickly. On the other hand, since the number of bets displayed on the image display unit is updated by one and the output of bet sound is performed one by one, the number of game medals that have been betted can be notified in an easy-to-understand manner even to a player who is unfamiliar with the game, for example. becomes possible.

The timing of updating the number of bets displayed on the image display unit and the timing of outputting the bet sound may be appropriately set according to the time required for updating the image and outputting the sound. Alternatively, the main control board sends a command indicating the timing of updating to the sub control board at predetermined time intervals according to the number of bets (for example, three commands in the case of three bets). Images may be updated and audio may be output accordingly. In addition, when a demo image (an image displayed when the slot machine is idle for a predetermined time or longer after all reels have stopped; also referred to as a "demo screen") is displayed on the image display unit, the max bet switch When game medals are bet according to the operation of , the demo image is switched to a predetermined image displayed during the game (also referred to as "game progress image") to display the number of bets. In this case, the display bet number is configured such that "BET: 3" is already displayed when the demo image is switched to the game-in-progress image. This is to prevent the player from feeling a sense of incongruity when the display bet number is updated one by one after the image is switched, resulting in a large lag between the actual bet timing and the update timing of the display bet number. On the other hand, the bet sounds are output one by one without waiting for the image switching to be completed, even during the display of the demonstration image or in the process of switching from the demonstration image to the game progress image. Therefore, even while the demo image is being displayed, the player can confirm that a bet has been placed by the betting sound.

In addition, the bet processing is performed according to the operation of the max bet switch when the max bet switch is operated during the period in which the operation of the max bet switch is validly accepted (also referred to as the "max bet operation acceptable period"). is the case. The maximum bet operation acceptable period is, for example, the period from the end of one game until the number of bets reaches 3 in the next game. During the max bet operation acceptable period, the max bet lamp is lit in a predetermined manner (for example, a predetermined lighting color) to indicate that betting is possible. If the max bet switch is operated during a period other than the maximum bet operation acceptable period, bet processing is not performed. For example, the max bet switch ON flag may not be set, or the determination of the flag may not be performed. When the 1-bet switch is operated, the contents of the settlement process and the start timing of the process are the same as when the max-bet switch is operated.

・ When the max bet switch is operated while the settlement switch is being operated Fig. 98 shows the timing of execution of the settlement process when the max bet switch is operated while the settlement switch is being operated (during the settlement switch valid operation time T11). is shown. It should be noted that the settlement switch was turned on during the settlement operation acceptable period, and the max bet switch was turned on during the maximum bet operation acceptable period. Further, the time when the operation of the max bet switch is stopped and the max bet switch is switched from the ON state to the OFF state (also referred to as "the time when the OFF operation is performed") is outside the range of the settlement switch valid operation time T11. In this example, operation of the max bet switch is disabled, while operation of the settlement switch is enabled. Specifically, even if the settlement switch valid operation time T11 elapses with the settlement switch turned on after the settlement switch is turned on, the settlement switch ON reception flag is not set and the execution of settlement processing is not started. The settlement switch ON acceptance flag is set after the max bet switch is turned off. After that, processing is performed to determine whether the settlement switch ON reception flag has been set, and with this determination as a trigger, the settlement switch ON reception flag is cleared and the settlement processing is started. Therefore, the execution start timing of the settlement process may be later than when the settlement switch is operated alone. The settlement switch ON reception flag is set when the settlement switch effective operation time T11 has passed since the settlement switch was turned ON (the set timing is indicated by a dashed line in FIG. 98), and the max bet switch is turned OFF. After the point in time, the process of determining whether the settlement switch ON reception flag has been set may be performed to start the settlement process. Further, when the max bet switch is turned off during the settlement switch valid operation time T11, the settlement process may be started at the same timing as when the settlement switch is operated alone.

On the other hand, even if the max bet switch valid operation time T12 elapses while the max bet switch is turned on from the time when the max bet switch is turned on, the max bet switch ON acceptance flag is not set and the bet processing is not executed. As described above, in this example, if the player erroneously operates the max bet switch during the settlement switch valid operation time T11, the settlement process is executed but the bet process is not executed. By doing so, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the player is confused because the settlement process performed when the player wants to finish the game and the betting process performed when the player wants to continue the game are executed at the same time. be able to. Further, if the betting process is executed in accordance with the operation of the max bet switch even during the operation of the settlement switch, it will be troublesome to operate the settlement switch again in order to settle the bet game medals. In this example, it is possible to prevent such troubles from occurring.

Further, in this example, the max bet lamp, which is lit in a predetermined manner when the maximum bet operation acceptable period begins, is maintained in a lighting state even after the settlement switch is turned on, and the settlement process is started. The light is turned off when the When the max bet lamp is lit when the inside of the game hall is dark, the position of the max bet switch can be easily visually recognized, and the player's willingness to play can be heightened upon seeing the lighting. Therefore, by keeping the max bet lamp lit until the execution of the settlement process is started, the player can spend a longer time compared to the case where the max bet lamp is turned off when the settlement switch is turned on. It is possible to show the lighting of the max bet lamp, and it is possible to increase the willingness of the player to finish the game. Further, by keeping the max bet lamp lit until the execution of the settlement process is started, it becomes easier for the player to understand that the settlement of the game medals will be carried out in a state in which no bets have been placed. Therefore, by checking the number of displayed credits before the start of settlement, the player can grasp the number of game medals to be settled in advance before the start of settlement.

Further, in this example, when the game medals are cleaned from the slot (corresponding to the above-mentioned medal slot 21) at a predetermined timing (also referred to as "cleaning valid timing"), the cleaned game medals are cleared. A bet can be made during the period from when the switch is turned on until the settlement process is started. Specifically, for example, even if the settlement switch is turned on, the blocker is not turned off, and it is possible to accept the paid game medals. The effective timing of maintenance is any of the following points: before the settlement switch is turned on, at approximately the same time as the settlement switch is turned on, or before the settlement switch is turned on. There may be. In contrast to this example, if, for example, the blocker is turned off when the settlement switch is turned on, and the game tokens that have been cleaned up are not accepted inadvertently, then the game tokens that have been cleaned up are not actually accepted. There is a possibility that a state (also referred to as "game medal swallowing state") may occur in which the fact is not recognized even though the game medal is housed in the slot machine. According to this example, it is possible to prevent such a game medal swallowing state from occurring.

・ If the sub-switch is operated while the settlement switch is being operated Fig. 99 shows the timing at which the settlement process is executed when the sub-switch is operated while the settlement switch is being operated (during the settlement switch valid operation time T11). ing. The settlement switch was turned on during the settlement operation acceptable period, and the sub switch was turned on during the period during which the operation of the sub switch of the sub switch is validly accepted ("Sub switch operation acceptable period ”). The sub-switch operation acceptable period is, for example, an image for prompting the player to operate the sub-switch (for example, an image displaying the characters "PUSH" and the arrow "↓" pointing to the position of the sub-switch. (also referred to as a "sub-switch operation prompting image") is displayed on the image display unit. In this example, the operation of the settlement switch is also valid, and the operation of the sub-switch is also valid. Specifically, the settlement process is started at the same timing as when the settlement switch is operated alone. A predetermined flag (“sub-switch ON acceptance flag”) indicating that the operation of the sub-switch has been validly accepted when the on-state of the sub-switch continues for a predetermined time or longer from the time when the sub-switch is operated to be ON. (not shown) is set. After that, a process for determining whether the sub-switch ON reception flag has been set is performed, and the sub-switch ON reception flag is cleared with this determination as a trigger, and a predetermined effect corresponding to the operation of the sub-switch ("sub-switch operation trigger") is performed. (also referred to as “performance”) is started. In FIG. 99, the time from when the sub-switch is turned on to when the sub-switch operation trigger effect is started is indicated as T13. These effects and processes related to the operation of the sub-switch are executed by the sub-control board. The sub-switch operation trigger effect is, for example, an image display or sound output that suggests that there is a high possibility (expectation) of progressing to a situation that is advantageous to the player (for example, AT addition or continuation, etc.). (Also referred to as "sub-switch operation success effect"), and an effect in which an image display or audio output is performed that suggests that the possibility of progressing to a situation advantageous to the player is low or eliminated (also known as "sub-switch operation failure effect") ) are mentioned.

The content of the sub-switch operation trigger effect includes, for example, outputting a predetermined sound (also referred to as a "sub-switch operation trigger sound") from a speaker, or outputting a predetermined image (also referred to as a "sub-switch operation trigger image") on the image display unit. ). Thus, in this example, when the sub-switch is operated during the settlement switch valid operation time T11, the sub-switch operation trigger effect is executed. Therefore, even if the player who has operated the checkout switch to finish the game unintentionally operates the sub-switch after seeing the sub-switch operation promotion image, the sub-switch operation opportunity effect can be smoothly executed. can. When the settlement process is started after the sub-switch operation trigger effect is started, the output of the settlement sound and the display of the settlement image accompanying the start of the settlement process may be configured not to be executed, or the sub-switch operation may be performed. It may be executed after the end of the opportunity production. When the output of the settlement sound and the display of the settlement image are not executed, the processing load can be reduced compared to the case where they are executed. When the output of the settlement sound or the display of the settlement image is executed after the completion of the sub-switch operation trigger effect, it becomes easy for the player to understand that the settlement has been made. Also, the settlement sound may be output even during execution of the sub-switch operation trigger effect. The output of the settlement sound makes it easier for the player to understand that the settlement has been made. When the settlement sound is output, the output timing may be adjusted so as not to overlap the output timing of the sub-switch operation trigger sound, or the settlement sound and the sub-switch operation trigger sound may be combined without such output timing adjustment. A case where the sounds are output substantially simultaneously may be allowed. When such output timing adjustment is performed, it becomes easier for the player to hear the settlement sound, so that it becomes easier for the player to understand that the settlement has been made. On the other hand, when such output timing adjustment is not performed, the processing load can be reduced compared to when adjustment is performed.

Also, during the period in which the demonstration image is displayed on the image display section (also referred to as "demonstration display period"), the sub-switch operation prompting image is not displayed, so basically it is not a sub-switch operation acceptable period. Therefore, even if the sub-switch is operated during the demonstration display period, it will be invalid. good too. In the case of disabling the operation of the sub-switch, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused by the start of the sub-switch operation trigger effect when the player mistakenly operates the sub-switch while operating the settlement switch. can be prevented. If the operation of the sub-switch is enabled, it is possible to increase the chances of executing the sub-switch operation opportunity effect. In addition, when the settlement process is started during the demonstration display period, the settlement image may be displayed as it is, and only the settlement sound may be output, or the demonstration image may be switched to the settlement image and displayed. You may make it output also a settlement sound together. When only the settlement sound is output, processing for displaying the settlement image is not required, so the processing load can be reduced. When the demonstration image is switched to the settlement image and displayed and the settlement sound is also output, it becomes easy for the player to understand that the settlement is being made.

・When the settlement switch is operated and another main switch is operated at the same time , stop switch) is operated, and FIG. 100B shows the operation timing when the settlement switch is operated while the stop switch is being operated. there is During a period during which the operation of the stop switch is not accepted effectively (also referred to as a "stop operation unacceptable period"). The stop operation unacceptable period is, for example, a period during which all reels are stopped. Although not shown in FIG. 100, the ON/OFF states of the settlement switch and the stop switch are read for each timer interrupt process.

When the stop switch is operated during the settlement switch valid operation time T11, as shown in FIG. 100(A), the operation of the settlement switch becomes valid and the settlement process is started according to the operation. The timing at which the settlement process is started differs depending on the timing at which the stop switch is turned off, but in any case, the settlement process is started after the stop switch is turned off. Specifically, if the time when the stop switch is turned off is outside the range of the settlement switch valid operation time T11, the settlement switch is kept on for the settlement switch valid operation time from the time when the settlement switch is turned on. Even after T11 has passed, the execution of the settlement process is not started. A settlement switch ON reception flag (not shown) is set after the stop switch is turned off, and the settlement process is started after the stop switch is turned off. Therefore, the execution start timing of the settlement process is later than when the settlement switch is operated alone. On the other hand, when the stop switch is turned off within the settlement switch effective operation time T11, the settlement process is started at the same timing as when the settlement switch is operated alone. In this way, when the stop switch is operated during the settlement switch valid operation time T11, the operation of the settlement switch is validated, thereby preventing the player from accidentally operating the stop switch while operating the settlement switch. , it is possible to smoothly execute the settlement process without re-operating the settlement switch.

If the settlement switch is operated while the stop switch is being operated, as shown in FIG. 100(B), the operation of the settlement switch is invalidated and the settlement processing corresponding to the operation is not started. Specifically, when the settlement switch is operated while the stop switch is being operated, even if the stop switch is turned off during the settlement switch effective operation time T11, the settlement switch effective operation time T11 Even if it is outside the range (the timing indicated by the dashed line in FIG. 100B), the operation of the settlement switch is invalidated and the settlement process corresponding to the operation is not started. The checkout switch must be re-operated to initiate the checkout process. In this way, if the settlement switch is operated while the stop switch is being operated, no settlement processing is performed. processing to determine that the stop switch has been set, etc.) can be uniformly prevented from being performed during the operation of the stop switch, thereby reducing the processing load.

Even if the settlement switch is operated while the stop switch is being operated, if the stop switch is turned off during the settlement switch effective operation time T11, the settlement switch operation is effectively accepted and the settlement process is started. may be executed. By doing this, in the case where a player who has operated the settlement switch while operating the stop switch by mistake realizes that the stop switch is being operated and turns off the stop switch early, the settlement switch can be operated. It becomes possible to settle smoothly without re-operating. In this example, the predetermined main switch is the stop switch, but if another main switch is operated during the settlement switch valid operation time T11, the same processing as in this example may be performed. For example, there is a case where the start lever is operated during the settlement switch valid operation time T11 in a state in which no bet is placed (a period in which the operation of the start lever is not accepted effectively).

・ When an error occurs during operation of the settlement switch Fig. 101 shows that a predetermined error (for example, an error in which the auxiliary storage for game medals is full) has occurred during the operation of the settlement switch (during the settlement switch valid operation time T11). The start timing and end timing of the error notification are shown. It should be noted that the settlement switch was turned on during the settlement operation acceptable period. Although not shown in FIG. 101, the on/off state of the settlement switch is read for each timer interrupt process. In this example, the on/off state of a predetermined error signal for detecting the presence or absence of an error (for example, a signal from a full sensor (corresponding to the above-described full detector 86) for detecting the storage state of game medals in the auxiliary storage). , the ON/OFF state of the reset switch (corresponding to the reset switch 82 described above) is read for each timer interrupt process (the same applies to FIG. 102 described later).

In this example, as shown in the figure, when the error signal switches from an OFF state (error non-detected state) to an ON state (error detected state) during the settlement switch effective operation time T11, and the ON state continues for a predetermined time, at that point It determines that an error has occurred, executes predetermined error processing, and starts error notification. In this error notification, for example, information indicating the type of error that has occurred is displayed on an error indicator (corresponding to the payout number display lamp 46j described above) provided on the front door, and the occurrence of the error is displayed on the image display unit. An image (also referred to as an "error notification image") is displayed, and a sound (also referred to as an "error notification sound") is output from a speaker to notify the occurrence of an error. The error notification by the error indicator is controlled by the main control board, and the error notification image and the error notification sound are controlled by the sub control board.

In this example, as shown in the figure, after the error notification is started, the cause of the error is removed and the error is resolved, so that the error signal switches from the ON state to the OFF state, and then the reset switch is turned ON. The main control board determines that the reset switch has been switched from the OFF state to the ON state, and with this as a trigger, a predetermined error canceling process is executed to end the error notification. The time when the reset switch is turned on is outside the range of the settlement switch effective operation time T11. In the case of this example, the operation of the settlement switch is invalidated and the settlement process corresponding to the operation is not started. In order to start the settlement process, it is necessary to re-operate the settlement switch after the error is resolved. If the settlement process is executed even when an error occurs, the player may have a sense of suspicion that the settlement was not properly performed. In this example, if an error occurs during operation of the settlement switch, the settlement process is not performed, so that such a situation can be prevented.

Further, as described above, in this example, when an error occurs during the settlement switch valid operation time T11, the occurrence of the error is detected and an error notification is given. Therefore, even when the player is operating the settlement switch to finish the game, it is possible to inform early that an error that may seriously affect the progress of the game has occurred. In addition, when an error occurs during the settlement switch valid operation time T11, it is possible to reduce the period during which the occurrence of the error cannot be notified, compared with the case where the detection and notification of the error are not performed.

・ When the reset switch is operated while the settlement switch is being operated It shows the end timing of the error notification when the reset switch is turned on during T11). As shown in the figure, when the reset switch is turned on during the settlement switch valid operation time T11, the main control board determines that the reset switch has been switched from the off state to the on state. finish. In the case of this example as well, the operation of the settlement switch is invalidated and the settlement processing corresponding to the operation is not started. The checkout switch must be re-operated to initiate the checkout process. In this example, the time when the reset switch is turned on is during the settlement switch effective operation time T11. ), similar processing is performed.

In this way, in this example, when the reset switch is turned on while the settlement switch is being operated (during the settlement switch valid operation time T11) while an error is occurring, the error notification is terminated and the normal state (the state where the game can be played) ). Therefore, it is possible to increase the period during which the game can be returned to the state in which the game can be performed, as compared with the case where the normal state cannot be restored even if the reset switch is turned on during the settlement switch valid operation time T11. It is possible to increase the operating rate of the machine. In this example, the operation of the settlement switch is disabled and the settlement process is not performed, but the settlement process may be performed. In that case, it is possible to smoothly execute the settlement process without re-operating the settlement switch.

<Press order navigation effect and GET effect>
In the slot machine of the sixth mode, for example, when a pushing order is selected during AT, a pushing order navigation effect is executed to inform the player of the pushing order (correct pushing order) that is advantageous to the player. In addition, when the player operates the stop switch in accordance with the notified correct order of pressing and the pressing order is established, a GET effect (also referred to as "acquisition effect") is executed to indicate to the player that game medals will be awarded. be done. The push order navigation effect and the GET effect will be described below with reference to FIGS. 103 to 106. FIG. Note that the push order navigation effect and the GET effect are controlled by the sub control board. When the push order navigation effect is performed, the push order navigation by the push order indicator (corresponding to the payout number display lamp 46j described above) controlled by the main control board is also executed.

・ Push order navigation effect when the pressing order is correct and push order navigation effect when the pressing order is incorrect In the pressing order navigation effect, a predetermined image (also referred to as a “press order navigation effect image”) related to the pressing order notification is displayed on the image display unit. to be displayed. The display mode of this push order navigation effect image changes according to the stop operation (operation of the stop switch) by the player. FIG. 103 shows an example of the mode of the push order navigation effect image together with the left stop switch SS1, the middle stop switch SS2 and the right stop switch SS3. FIG. 103(A) shows an example of transition of the pressing order navigation effect image when the pressing order is correct (when the first stop operation is performed according to the correct pressing order), and FIG. 10 shows an example of transition of the push order navigation effect image when the first stop operation is performed in a different order than the order.

In this example, as shown in FIGS. 103A and 103B, when a winning combination such as a small bell combination is selected in a game during AT, a navigation image NV1 mainly for showing the correct pressing order is displayed. , the navigation background image NH1 is displayed mainly for improving the game interest at the time of the stop operation. The navigation background image NH1 is drawn on a layer (second layer) that is lower (backward) than the layer (first layer) on which the navigation image NV1 is drawn, and when displayed at a position overlapping the navigation image NV1, the navigation image. Sometimes hidden behind NV1 and partially invisible. The navigation image NV1 in this example shows the correct pressing order of "left, middle, right", and until the first stop operation is performed, a figure displaying the number 1 in a circular frame ("first stop (also referred to as "operation display"), a diagram displaying the number 2 in a circular frame (also referred to as "second stop operation display"), and a diagram displaying the number 3 in a circular frame ("third stop operation display") ”) are displayed in this order from the left side in the lower portion of the image display section. The first stop operation display is displayed larger than the second and third stop operation displays. In the navigation background image NH1 in this example, three large, medium, and small star-shaped figures are displayed corresponding to each of the first to third stop operation displays until the first stop operation is performed.

After the push order navigation effect image (navi image NV1 and navigation background image NH1) is displayed, as shown in FIG. The display modes of the navigation image NV1 and the navigation background image NH1 change as follows. First, at the timing when the left stop switch SS1 is operated, the shape of the frame surrounding the number 1 in the first stop operation display of the navigation image NV1 changes from a circle to a jagged star shape. Also, at the same timing, the color of the leftmost star-shaped diagram in the navigation background image NH1 changes, becomes smaller, and is displayed obliquely. After that, the first stop operation display of the navigation image NV1 gradually becomes smaller and fades out from the image display portion, and the leftmost star-shaped figure in the navigation background image NH1 gradually becomes smaller and flies away. It disappears from the image display section as if leaving. At this time, the sound may be appropriately output from the speaker according to the change in the aspect of the navigation image NV1 and the navigation background image NH1. For example, when the shape of the frame of the first stop operation display of the navigation image NV1 changes from a circle to a star shape, a sound "bang" is output, or the first stop operation display becomes smaller and a portion of the navigation background image NH1 is displayed. For example, when the star-shaped figure on the far left flies away, it outputs a sound "whoosh". Such a sound is also called "push order navigation effect sound".

On the other hand, after the push order navigation effect image (navi image NV1 and navigation background image NH1) is displayed, the first stop operation (operation of the middle stop switch SS2 in this example) is performed in an order different from the correct push order. In this case, the navigation image NV1 and the navigation background image NH1 change as shown in FIG. 103(B). First, at the timing when the middle stop switch SS2 is operated, the first stop operation display, the second stop operation display and the third stop operation display of the navigation image NV1 disappear from the image display section substantially simultaneously. The time until these disappear is shorter than the time from when the first stop operation is performed until the first stop operation display disappears when the pressing order is correct. On the other hand, the navigation background image NH1 changes in the same manner as when the pressing order is correct. That is, at the timing of the first stop operation, the color of the leftmost star-shaped figure in the navigation background image NH1 changes, becomes smaller, and is displayed obliquely. After that, the leftmost star-shaped figure in the navigation background image NH1 gradually becomes smaller and disappears from the image display portion as if it were flying far away. At this time, the same pressing order navigation effect sound as when the pressing order is correct may be output, a pressing order navigation effect sound different from that when the pressing order is correct may be output, or the pressing order navigation effect sound may not be output. You may do so.

As described above, in this example, when the pressing order is correct, part of the navigation image NV1 (only the stop switch corresponding to the stop switch operated to stop and the corresponding stop operation display) disappears, whereas when the pressing order is incorrect, the entire navigation image NV1 disappears. disappear at the same time. In this way, the manner in which the navigation image NV1 disappears (the effect when the navigation image NV1 disappears) changes between when the pressing order is correct and when the pressing order is not correct, so that the player can intuitively recognize whether the pressing order is correct or not. It becomes possible. In addition, if the navigation image NV1 is kept displayed even when the pressing order fails by erasing all of the navigation image NV1 at the same time when the pressing order fails, there is a concern about a situation such as a stop operation after the pressing order failure. It is possible to prevent the player from erroneously recognizing the order and feeling embarrassed when the navigation image NV1 after the failure of the pressing order is seen by surrounding people. Also, in this example, the time from when the stop operation is performed until the navigation image NV1 disappears is set shorter when the pressing order is incorrect than when the pressing order is correct. In this way, the difference in the time until the navigation image NV1 disappears between when the pressing order is correct and when the pressing order is not correct makes it easier for the player to recognize whether the pressing order is correct or not. In the case of the above-mentioned sub-switch operation prompting image (an image displaying the characters “PUSH”), it disappears from the image display section at a predetermined timing after the sub-switch is operated. The time is longer when the sub-switch operation failure effect is performed (also referred to as "sub-switch operation failure") than when the sub-switch operation success effect is performed (also referred to as "sub-switch operation success"). is set to This is to prevent it from becoming difficult for the player to know whether or not the sub-switch has been operated if the sub-switch operation prompting image is quickly erased when the sub-switch operation fails.

On the other hand, in this example, as described above, the display of the navigation background image NH1 changes in the same manner regardless of whether the pressing order is correct or the pressing order is incorrect, and the display is switched at the same timing. Therefore, since the same image data can be used when the pressing order is correct and when the pressing order is incorrect, it is possible to reduce the amount of image data as the navigation background image NH1, which can lead to a reduction in storage capacity. In addition, by displaying the same navigation background image NH1 at the same timing as when the pressing order is correct even when the pressing order is incorrect, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling exhilarated due to the failure of the pressing order during AT. It becomes possible to In addition, if the navigation image NV1 is completely erased when the pressing order fails, and if the navigation background image NH1 is displayed differently from when the pressing order is correct, the player may misunderstand the game situation (for example, during AT). However, according to this example, it is possible to prevent such a situation from occurring.

·Push-order navigation effect and GET effect Fig. 104 shows an example of the form of the push-order navigation effect image from the first stop operation to the third stop operation. FIG. 104(A) shows an example of transition of the pressing order navigation effect image when the pressing order is correct (when the first stop operation to the third stop operation are performed according to the correct pressing order), and FIG. It shows an example of transition of the pressing order navigation effect image when the pressing order fails (when the first stop operation to the third stop operation are performed in an order different from the correct pressing order).

After the push order navigation effect image (navi image NV1 and navigation background image NH1) is displayed, as shown in FIG. As described above, the first stop operation display of the navigation image NV1 and the leftmost star-shaped figure of the navigation background image NH1 disappear from the image display unit, and the second stop operation display of the navigation image NV1 and the navigation A large star-shaped figure in the center of the background image NH1 is displayed. After that, when the middle stop switch SS2 is operated as the second stop operation according to the correct pressing order, the second stop operation display of the navigation image NV1 and the star-shaped figure in the center of the navigation background image NH1 disappear from the image display portion (disappear). is similar to the first stop operation display and the leftmost star-shaped diagram), and the third stop operation display of the navigation image NV1 and the rightmost star-shaped diagram of the navigation background image NH1 are enlarged. Is displayed. Further, when the right stop switch SS3 is operated as the third stop operation according to the correct pressing order, the third stop operation display of the navigation image NV1 and the rightmost star-shaped figure of the navigation background image NH1 disappear from the image display unit. (The manner of disappearing is the same as in the case of the first stop operation display and the leftmost star-shaped diagram), and then the GET effect is executed. In this GET effect, for example, an image GT1 displaying the characters "GET!!" ) is output from the speaker.

On the other hand, after the push order navigation effect image (navi image NV1 and navigation background image NH1) is displayed, the first stop operation (operation of the middle stop switch SS2 in this example) is performed in an order different from the correct push order. In this case, as shown in FIG. 104(B), the navigation image NV1 disappears entirely, and the star-shaped figure in the center of the navigation background image NH1 is also displayed in a large size. After that, when the left stop switch SS1 is operated as the second stop operation, the star-shaped figure in the center of the navigation background image NH1 of the navigation image NV1 disappears from the image display (the manner of disappearing is the same as when the pressing order is correct). ), along with which, the rightmost star-shaped figure of the navigation background image NH1 is displayed in a large size. Further, when the right stop switch SS3 is operated as the third stop operation, the rightmost star-shaped figure of the navigation background image NH1 disappears from the image display (the manner of disappearing is the same as in the case of correct pressing order). When the pressing order fails, the GET effect (GET effect image GT1 and GET effect sound) is not executed.

・ GET effect and back lamp effect when the pressing order is correct When the pressing order is correct, in addition to the GET effect, a back using the back lamps (corresponding to the above-mentioned back lamps 38a, 38b, 38c) arranged inside the reels. A lamp effect is also executed. FIG. 105 shows a schematic diagram of the left reel RE1, the middle reel RE2 and the right reel RE3, and shows an example of the execution timing of the GET effect and the back lamp effect when the pressing order is correct.

After the push order navigation effect image (navi image NV1 and navigation background image NH1) is displayed, as shown in FIG. stops rotating, and a push-starting symbol (indicated as a hexagonal symbol in this example) is stop-displayed in the middle stage of the left reel RE1. Also, the first stop operation display of the navigation image NV1 and the leftmost star-shaped figure of the navigation background image NH1 disappear from the image display portion as described above. After that, when the middle stop switch SS2 is operated as the second stop operation according to the correct pressing order, the rotation of the middle reel RE2 is stopped by the second stop operation to the middle stop switch SS2, and the middle reel RE2 is pushed to the middle stage, and the second stop switch SS2 is pressed. The pattern is stopped and displayed. Also, the second stop operation display of the navigation image NV1 and the central star-shaped figure of the navigation background image NH1 disappear from the image display portion. Further, when the right stop switch SS3 is operated as the third stop operation in accordance with the correct pressing order, the rotation of the right reel RE3 is stopped, and the symbols forming the pressing order are stop-displayed in the middle stage of the right reel RE3. Also, the third stop operation display of the navigation image NV1 and the rightmost star-shaped figure of the navigation background image NH1 disappear from the image display portion.

At the timing when the navigation image NV1 and the navigation background image NH1 have all disappeared, the execution of the back lamp effect is started. In the illustrated example, the back lamps for illuminating the middle area are turned on, and the back lamps for illuminating the upper and lower areas are turned off so that the three push-up constituent symbols arranged in a horizontal row stand out. After starting the execution of the back lamp effect, the GET effect image GT1 starts to be displayed on the image display section. At the timing when the GET effect image GT1 is displayed, the mode of the back lamp effect starts to change. In the illustrated example, the area illuminated by the back lamp begins to spread toward the upper and lower stages. After the GET effect image GT1 starts to be displayed, the display mode changes (in the illustrated example, the character size gradually decreases) and disappears from the image display section. Also, the back lamp effect returns to the normal lighting mode in which the area from the upper stage to the lower stage is illuminated during the period in which the display mode of the GET effect image GT1 is changing.

Until the navigation image NV1 disappears (becomes hidden), the player concentrates on the stop operation while watching the display of the navigation image NV1. Therefore, in this example, as described above, the execution of the back lamp effect and the GET effect is started after the timing when the navigation image NV1 has completely disappeared. It is possible for the player to intuitively recognize that the event and the awarding of the game medals occur in a natural flow. In this example, the back lamp effect is started slightly earlier than the GET effect (the GET effect is the display of an image) and ends earlier, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the GET effect starts first and ends first, or the back lamp effect starts first, but the GET effect ends first. The start timing and end timing of the back lamp effect can be set as appropriate.

- GET effect, back lamp effect, and display update of the number of credits When the pressing order is correct and the GET effect is executed, game medals are of course awarded. When game medals are awarded by adding credits, the number of credits displayed in the credit number display section (corresponding to the accumulated number display lamp 46h described above; also referred to as "credit lamp") is also updated. FIG. 106 illustrates the credit amount display portion CRL, and shows an example of execution timing of the GET effect and the back lamp effect and display update timing of the credit amount. Execution timings of the GET effect and the back lamp effect in FIG. 106 are the same as those shown in FIG.

In the example shown in FIG. 106, the number of awarded game medals is 15 (maximum number of awarded in one game), and the number of credits displayed in the credit number display section CRL depends on the actual timing of awarding each game medal. , and is updated while being incremented by one from 30 to 45. As shown, the credit amount in the credit amount display section CRL is updated at a timing after the navigation image NV1 and the navigation background image NH1 have all disappeared (see FIG. 105), and the execution of the back lamp effect is started. However, the GET effect (display of the GET effect image) is started at a timing when it has not been started yet. The update of the credit amount in the credit amount display section CRL is finished at a predetermined timing during the period in which both the GET effect and the back lamp effect are being executed. The GET effect and the back lamp effect end at the point in time after the update of the number of credits is completely finished.

As described above, in this example, at the time when the update of the credit amount in the credit amount display section CRL is completed, the GET effect and the back lamp effect that are executed in connection with the awarding of the game medals continue. Configured. If the GET effect or the back lamp effect ends in spite of the fact that the display of the number of credits continues to be updated, even if the player who has confirmed the end of the GET effect or the like attempts to start the next game, the game medals will be lost. In some cases, the game cannot be started because the application is not completed. In this example, the GET effect and the back lamp effect are terminated after the credit amount is updated (given game medals) in the credit amount display section CRL. It is possible to progress the game at a good tempo without memorizing it. In the above description, the back lamp effect in which the reels are illuminated from the inside by the back lamp has been described as an example, but other reel lighting effects may be used. For example, there is a reel lighting effect that illuminates the reel from the outside with a lighting lamp (also referred to as a “reel window frame lamp”) arranged near the frame of the reel window (corresponding to the display window W described above) on the back side of the front door. mentioned.

<Control during re-rotation of the reel due to power failure>
In the slot machine of the sixth mode, when the power is cut off while the reels are rotating, the reels that were rotating when the power was cut off are re-rotated after the power is restored. In the following, the contents of control related to the re-rotation of the reel after power recovery will be described with reference to FIGS. 107 to 109. FIG. The slot machine of the sixth embodiment includes three stepping motors (corresponding to the stepping motors 35a, 35b, and 35c described above) for rotating three reels respectively. It is designed to control rotation. In addition, the slot machine of the sixth embodiment determines an index serving as an index of the rotational position of each reel, an index sensor (corresponding to the reel sensor described above) for detecting the index, and the rotational position (symbol position) of the reel. The reel counter is configured to perform predetermined counting for the index, and the reel counter is reset each time the reel sensor detects the index.

First, an outline of reel control will be described with reference to FIG. Here, the stepping motor has four phases (φ0, φ1, φ2, φ3), and a 1-2 excitation method (φ0, φ0, φ1, φ1, φ1, φ2, φ2, 8 excitation phase steps of φ2, φ3, φ3, φ3, φ0 are sequentially switched), and during deceleration, control is performed by a deceleration method that excites all phases of φ0 to φ3 (stepping motor The configuration and control method can be changed as appropriate). Further, switching of the excitation phase is performed in an interrupt process (corresponding to the timer interrupt process described above) that is executed at predetermined time intervals.

As shown in FIG. 107, when a spinning drum starting operation (operation of the start lever) is received, this serves as a trigger for acceleration state processing (processing for rotating the spinning drum while accelerating it to a predetermined rotational speed). is executed. In the acceleration state process, as shown in the figure, when the number of interrupt process executions (also referred to as “interrupt count”) reaches 100 from the start of the process, the first step of excitation phase switching is performed. After that, when the number of interrupts reaches 50, the second step of excitation phase switching is performed, and when the number of interrupts reaches 10, 5, and 2, the excitation phases of steps 3, 4, and 5 are switched. . Then, when the next interrupt process (when the number of interrupts is 1) after the interrupt process in which the excitation phase is switched in the fifth step is executed (when the number of interrupts is 1), the excitation phase is switched in the sixth step, and the acceleration state process ( Excitation switching from the 1st step to the 6th step) ends (the value of the number of interrupts that determines the switching timing of the excitation phase can be changed as appropriate).

After the acceleration state processing is completed, the constant speed state processing (processing for rotating the reel at a constant speed) is executed. In the constant speed state process, the excitation phase is switched each time the interrupt process is executed (the number of interrupts is 1). When a rotation drum stop operation (operation of a stop switch for stopping the rotation drum) is accepted during execution of the constant-speed state processing, the planned stop position of the rotation drum (the deceleration state described later) is determined according to the received timing. The position to start processing) and the pattern to be stopped on the effective line (also called "planned stop pattern") are decided, and the drum is rotated (slid) at a constant speed until it moves to the planned stop position. A start process (also called a "sliding process") is executed. Then, when the spinning drum moves to the planned stop position, deceleration state processing (processing to stop the spinning drum while decelerating it) is executed to stop the planned stop symbols on the effective line. In the deceleration state process, all phases of φ0 to φ3 are excited while the interrupt process is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 6 times).

During execution of the constant-speed state process, out-of-step determination for determining whether or not the stepping motor is out of step (whether or not the reel rotation is defective) is performed as appropriate. This out-of-step determination is performed, for example, as follows. In this case, when the drum is rotating normally, the stepping motor makes one rotation when the excitation phase is switched by 336 steps. In this case, when the drum is in a constant speed state, one step advances for each interrupt, so if the drum rotates normally, the drum rotates once at 336 interrupts. Therefore, the number of interruptions is counted by a reel counter or the like, and when the reel rotates once (when the index is detected by the index sensor), the counted value is cleared and counting of the number of interruptions is restarted. In this way, if the index is not detected even after the number of interrupts exceeds 336, it is possible to determine that step-out (rotational failure) has occurred. If it is determined that step-out has occurred, the acceleration state process is executed again.

- Case where the power is cut off after receiving the stop operation Next, the processing procedure when the power is cut off after the stop operation is received will be described with reference to the flow charts of FIGS. Each flow chart describes not only the processing contents but also the state of the slot machine. Here, the third stop operation is accepted while the first reel (reel stopped by the first stop operation) and the second reel (reel stopped by the second stop operation) are stopped. A case where a power failure occurs later will be described as an example. Note that when power is cut off after the first stop operation is accepted, and when power is cut off after the second stop operation is accepted, power is cut off after the third stop operation is accepted. It will be the one that conforms to the processing in the case of

As shown in FIG. 108(A), when the constant speed state process is being executed for the third reel (reel stopped by the third stop operation) (J11), when the third stop operation is received (J12 ), the symbol to be stopped for the third drum is determined (J13), and deceleration start processing is executed for the third drum (J14). After the deceleration start process is started and before the third drum stops, if the power cutoff is detected (J15), the power cutoff process is executed (J16). Then, after the power is restored (J17), the re-rotation process A is executed for the third drum (J18), and the symbols to be stopped determined in step J11 are stopped and displayed on the activated line. In this example, the re-rotation process A is automatically started after power is restored. On the other hand, for example, if power failure occurs during deceleration start processing (sliding processing), the power failure is detected as an error. , the re-rotation process A may be started.

In the re-rotation process A, as shown in FIG. 108B, acceleration state processing is executed (J21), and then constant speed state processing is executed (J22). Also, during execution of the constant-speed state process, out-of-step determination is performed as appropriate. After that, deceleration start processing is executed (J23), and further deceleration state processing is executed (J24). Note that if the power-off is detected before the third stop operation is accepted (during the third rotation of the drum at a constant speed), re-rotation processing B shown in FIG. 108B is performed. This re-rotation process B differs from the re-rotation process A in that after the constant speed state process is executed, a stop operation is accepted (J221), and thereafter deceleration start process is executed.

As described above, in this example, if power failure occurs after the start of the deceleration start process, step-out determination is performed even during re-rotation of the drum after power is restored. Therefore, compared to the case where the step-out determination is not performed, it is possible to more accurately stop the symbols to be stopped determined before the occurrence of the power failure on the activated line. It should be noted that the planned stop symbols to be stopped on the active line after the re-spinning are not only the patterns that are in the same manner as the planned stop symbols determined before the power failure, but also the symbols that are arranged in the same position within the reel. Point. For example, a bell pattern with pattern number 3, a bell pattern with pattern number 8, a bell pattern with pattern number 13, and a bell pattern with pattern number 18 are arranged in one reel, and each bell pattern has the same mode. Suppose that it is a design of In this case, when the planned stop pattern determined before the power failure occurs is the bell pattern with the pattern number 3, the planned stop pattern after the re-rotation is also the bell pattern with the pattern number 3 (as for the pattern number, see FIG. 3). ). In the case where, for example, a watermelon pattern is arranged in the pattern number 2 adjacent to the bell pattern of the pattern number 3, and a cherry pattern is arranged in the pattern number 12 adjacent to the bell pattern of the pattern number 13, the power is turned off. Although the planned stop pattern decided before the occurrence is the bell pattern of the pattern number 3, if the planned stop pattern after the re-rotation is the bell pattern of the pattern number 13, the bell pattern of the pattern number 3 will be on the effective line. The contents of the nine symbols stopped and displayed in the reel window differ between when the game is stopped and when the bell symbol of symbol number 13 is stopped on the active line. According to this example, it is possible to prevent such a situation from occurring.

・Difference due to difference in timing of power interruption As shown in FIG. After re-rotation, the reel for which the stop operation has been accepted stops at a predetermined position without accepting the stop operation again. Even if the stop operation is performed again for the reel for which the stop operation has been accepted, it will be invalid and will not be accepted. On the other hand, when the power is turned off after receiving the stop operation, as shown in FIG. accepted by In addition, after re-rotation, the stop switch lamp of the stop switch corresponding to the reel for which the stop operation has been accepted is controlled to a state indicating invalidity (for example, off state), whereas the stop switch lamp corresponding to the reel before the stop operation is accepted The stop switch lamp of the switch is controlled to an effective lighting state (for example, a red lighting state) until the stop operation is performed.

A specific example is shown in FIG. Here, after the left stop switch SS1 is operated as the first stop operation to stop the left reel RE1, the middle stop switch SS2 is operated as the second stop operation, and the power is cut off while the middle reel RE2 is rotating. It is assumed that the middle reel RE2 and the right reel RE3 rotate again after the power is restored. In this case, the stop switch lamp of the middle stop switch SS2, which has already accepted the second stop operation, is controlled to be turned off, and the stop switch lamp of the right stop switch SS3, which has not accepted the third stop operation, is controlled to be turned on. .

In this way, in this example, the lighting state of the stop switch lamp during the re-rotation of the reel after the power is restored differs depending on whether the power is interrupted after receiving the stop operation or when the power is interrupted before accepting the stop operation. configured to be different. Therefore, the lighting state of the stop switch lamp allows the player to determine whether the reel that is rotating again after the power is restored is the reel that has received the stop operation before the power is turned off or the reel that has not received the stop operation before the power is turned off. can be notified to It should be noted that during normal rotation of the reels instead of re-spinning, a predetermined effect sound (also referred to as “reel rotation effect sound”) that gives the player a sense of exhilaration may be output from the speaker. . In that case, it is preferable to output the reel rotation effect sound even during the re-rotation. By outputting the reel rotation performance sound even during the re-rotation, the player can have an uplifting feeling even during the re-rotation.

- If an error occurs during reel re-rotation after power is restored An error may occur during reel re-rotation after power is restored. In the slot machine of the sixth mode, if a predetermined error (for example, an error that the auxiliary storage is full of game medals, etc.) occurs during re-rotation of the reels after the power is restored, the error is immediately notified even if the error is detected. Instead, it is configured to issue an error notification after the re-rotated reel stops. Specifically, for example, when a predetermined error occurs during the execution of the re-rotation process A (see FIG. 107B) for the reel for which the stop operation has been accepted, error detection is performed, while the error notification is performed by the stop operation. It is done after stopping the accepted reel. By enabling error detection even during re-rotation, it is possible to reduce the period during which error detection is not possible. Also, if an error notification is made during the re-rotation of the reels, the player may misunderstand that the error notification is for notifying the re-rotation of the reels. It is possible to prevent such misunderstandings from occurring.

In addition, when the error notification is performed using the error indicator controlled by the main control board and also using the image display unit and the speaker controlled by the sub control board, for example, the error notification using the error indicator This may be performed even during the re-rotation of the reel, and the error notification using the image display unit or the speaker may be performed after the re-rotated reel stops. Further, if a predetermined error occurs at a predetermined timing during the execution of the re-rotation process B (see FIG. 107(C)) for the reel before accepting the stop operation, the error is notified immediately after the error is detected. good too. For example, if an error is detected before the stopping operation is accepted during the re-rotation process B, the stopping operation may not be accepted effectively, and the error may be notified immediately.

- When power is cut off again during reel re-rotation after power is restored It is also assumed that power is cut off again during reel re-rotation after power is restored. In addition, there may be a plurality of timings at which the power is turned off again. For example, the timing at which the power is turned off again is the time before the index is detected after the reel starts to rotate again (also referred to as the "re-rotation index undetected time"), and the time when the index is detected after the reel starts to rotate again. after the re-rotation index is detected (also referred to as "time after re-rotation index detection"). In addition, the point after detection of the re-rotation index is the period from the detection of the index to the start of the deceleration start process (the period during which the rotation position of the reel during re-rotation is outside the range where the symbols to be stopped can be pulled onto the effective line). (also referred to as "time before deceleration start after re-rotation index detection"), and the period after index detection and after deceleration start processing is started (the rotation position of the reel during re-rotation is effective for the planned stop symbol). It can be considered separately from the point in time within the period within the range in which it can be drawn on the line (also referred to as "the point in time after the start of deceleration after detection of the re-rotation index").

In the slot machine of the sixth embodiment, even if the re-disconnection occurs at any of the time when the re-rotation index is not detected, the time before deceleration starts after the re-rotation index is detected, and the time after the deceleration starts after the re-rotation index is detected. , the reels are rotated again (also referred to as "re-re-rotation") at least until the index is detected after the power is restored from the re-cutting, and then the symbols to be stopped are stopped on the activated line. Therefore, even if the power is turned on again at any time, the symbols to be stopped can be stopped on the effective line based on the detection time of the index in the second re-rotation. Therefore, even if the stopped reel is moved due to the re-cutting of the power supply, the symbols to be stopped can be accurately stopped on the effective line by rotating the reel again.

As a change mode, if the power is cut off again when the re-rotation index is not detected, the same process as above is performed, but the power is cut off again at the time after the re-rotation index is detected and before the deceleration starts or after the re-rotation index is detected and after the deceleration starts. If this occurs, the reel may not be rotated again. According to this modification, when the power is cut off again at the time when the re-rotation index is not detected, the pattern to be stopped can be accurately stopped on the effective line based on the time when the index is detected in the re-re-rotation. can. Also, if the power is cut again after the re-rotation index is detected, the deceleration start process (sliding process) is already being executed, so the reel is scheduled to stop before the reel stops due to the power cut again. It is possible to stop the symbol on the activated line with a fairly high probability. In addition, since re-rotation is not performed, it is possible to immediately shift to the next game after recovery from re-power failure. On the other hand, if the power is cut off again before the re-rotation index is detected, the deceleration start process is not executed at the time of the power cut off again. The probability that the scheduled symbol can be stopped on the activated line is low. However, since it is the same that re-rotation is not performed, the effect of being able to quickly shift to the next game can be obtained.

As another modification, if the power is cut off again when the re-rotation index is not detected, or when the power is cut off again after the deceleration is started after the re-rotation index is detected, the same processing as the above modification is performed. , If power is cut off again at the time before deceleration starts before re-rotation index detection, after the power is restored after power is restored, the reels are rotated again until at least the index is detected, and then the planned stop pattern is moved to the effective line. You may make it stop on the top. By doing so, in the case where the power is cut off again when the re-rotation index is not detected, and when the power is cut off again after the deceleration is started after the re-rotation index is detected, the same effect as the above-described modification is obtained. can get. Further, even if power is cut off again after detection of the re-rotation index and before deceleration is started, the pattern to be stopped can be accurately stopped on the effective line.

Although the embodiments according to the present invention have been described above, the present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiments, and can be modified as appropriate. For example, in the correction counter of the first embodiment, a first threshold value and a second threshold value (first threshold value<second threshold value) are set, and the correction counter value exceeds the first threshold value but exceeds the second threshold value. The next AT starts when one AT ends with the correction counter value exceeding the second threshold rather than when one AT ends with the second threshold not exceeded. It may be set so that the probability that the number of games played by the time is increased becomes high. As a result, it is possible to create a wave of changes in the number of balls (the number of game medals acquired) within the range of 2400, which is the upper limit of the end of one advantageous section, and suppress the excessive acquisition of game medals. becomes possible.

In the above-described first embodiment, the image transition (switching) in the ending effect follows a flow (branch) of a specific image transition pattern corresponding to a change in a predetermined variable (for example, the number of game medals won). It is supposed to be done. On the other hand, an image transition pattern corresponding to a change in one variable (for example, the number of games in an advantageous section) and an image transition pattern corresponding to a change in another variable (for example, the number of game medals won) can be used. It is also possible to prepare a plurality of image transition patterns corresponding to the respective changes in the variables of (1) and to change the branching mode of the image transition patterns to be executed depending on the change in each variable. This makes it possible to diversify the image transition patterns in the ending effect.

In the above-described first embodiment, the suggestive effects using the design illumination lamps controlled by the sub-control means are performed in the symbol display area DA1, so that a predetermined symbol combination ("Red Seven, Red Seven, Red Seven", etc.) are notified to the player. On the other hand, for example, a display device controlled by the main control means such as the main push order display (payout number display lamp 46j) displays a predetermined display so that the player can arrange a predetermined symbol combination. may be notified. As a result, even if the sub-control means cannot perform the suggestive effect due to the occurrence of trouble such as a failure, the player can secure an opportunity to arrange a predetermined combination of symbols, so that the player can play the game with peace of mind. can be performed.

The type of characters displayed in the demonstration effect (the effect displayed during non-playing and executed after a predetermined period of time has passed after the end of the game. Also referred to as the "waiting effect") and the type of character displayed in the conversation effect It may be configured such that more dialogue effects are provided. A character that has a low appearance frequency (a so-called premium character) may not be displayed in the demonstration effect, and may appear in a conversation effect or other effects. As a result, a situation can occur in which a character that is not known in advance (a character whose existence is known but is not known to appear) will appear, and the appearance of such a character will effectively create a sense of anticipation. can be increased to Also, in the demo production, the conversation production and the subtitle production are configured not to be displayed.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, as an example of a gaming machine to which the present invention is applied, a slot machine (rotary-type gaming machine) using game medals as game values has been exemplified and explained, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, for example, a reel-type game machine that uses game balls as game value, a reel-type game machine that uses information recorded on an electronic recording medium as game value, a mahjong game machine, an arrangement ball machine, The same effect can be obtained by applying the same to a pachinko machine or the like. Also, the present invention can be similarly applied to slot machines having four or more reels to obtain similar effects.

1 slot machine 2 front door 3a, 3b, 3c reel (first embodiment)
25 start lever 26a, 26b, 26c stop switch (first embodiment)
60 main control board 70 sub control board 70A sub-main control board 70B sub-sub control board 100 main control means 200 sub-control means 200A sub-main control means 200B sub-sub control means 500 stop switch unit 510, 520, 530 stop switch (second embodiment) )
512, 522, 532 stop switch cover 514, 524, 534 stop switch lamp 540 stop switch panel 600 AT notification indicator 611, 612, 613 7 segment indicator RE1, RE2, RE3 reel (sixth embodiment)
SS1, SS2, SS3 stop switch (sixth embodiment)
W Display window DA1, DA2 Design display area GK1, GK2, GK3 Display design DP Image display unit

Claims (1)

a settlement switch;
with a predetermined bed switch,
In a predetermined situation, the settlement process is executed when the operation of the settlement switch continues for a predetermined period of time after receiving the operation of the settlement switch,
In the predetermined situation, if the payment switch is released before the operation of the payment switch continues for a predetermined time after the operation of the payment switch is accepted, the payment processing is not executed,
In the predetermined situation, game medals inserted from the medal slot can be accepted from a predetermined timing after accepting the operation of the settlement switch to a specific timing before the settlement processing is executed. is composed of
In the predetermined situation, when a predetermined bet switch operation is received, the maximum number of bets can be bet,
In the predetermined situation, the maximum bet number is bet even if the predetermined bet switch is operated from the predetermined timing after accepting the operation of the settlement switch to the specific timing before the settlement process is executed. configured to prevent
In the predetermined situation, a predetermined bet switch is operated between the predetermined timing after accepting the operation of the settlement switch and the specific timing before the settlement process is executed, and the predetermined bet switch is operated. In a situation where the operation is continued until the timing before the specific timing and then released, and the operation of the adjustment switch continues for the predetermined time after the operation of the adjustment switch is accepted, the adjustment processing can be executed. is configured to be
In the predetermined situation, a predetermined bed switch is operated, and in a situation in which the operation of the predetermined bed switch continues, the settlement switch is operated, and in a situation in which the settlement switch continues to be operated , the game machine configured so that the settlement process is not executed when the operation of the settlement switch continues for the predetermined time .

Images